MY PEUGEOT 208
HANDBOOK
Access to the Handbook
MOBILE APPLICATION ONLINE
Install the (content available Visit the website and select the Scan MyPeugeot App PEUGEOT offline). ‘MyPeugeot’ section to view or download the handbook or go to the following address:
http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/APddb/
Scan this QR Code for direct access.
Then select: – the vehicle, Select: – the issue period corresponding to the vehicle’s initial – the language, registration date. – the vehicle and body style, – the issue period of the handbook corresponding to the vehicle’s initial registration date.
This symbol indicates the latest information available.
Welcome Key
Safety warning Thank you for choosing a Peugeot 208 or a Peugeot e-208. This document presents the essential information and recommendations Additional information enabling you to get to know your vehicle in complete safety. We strongly
recommend that you familiarise yourself with it as well as the Warranty and
Maintenance Record, which contains information about warranties, servicing Environmental protection feature and roadside assistance associated with the vehicle.
Your vehicle will be fitted with only some of the equipment described in this Left-hand drive vehicle document, depending on its trim level, version and the specifications for the
country in which it was sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are for guidance only. Right-hand drive vehicle Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical specifications,
equipment and accessories without having to update this guide. Location of the equipment / button If ownership of your vehicle is transferred, please ensure this Handbook is described using a black area. passed on to the new owner.
Contents
Overview ■ Heating and Ventilation 46 Child seats 74 Manual air conditioning 47 Deactivating the front passenger airbag 76 Automatic air conditioning 48 ISOFIX child seats 79
Eco-driving ■ Front demisting - defrosting 50 i-Size child seats 82
Heated windscreen 50 Child lock 83 Rear screen demisting/defrosting 50 Instruments 1 Programmed heating (Electric) 51 Driving Instrument panels 9 Interior fittings 51 6 Warning and indicator lamps 12 Courtesy lamps 53 Driving recommendations 85 Indicators 19 Interior ambient lighting 54 Starting / Switching off the engine with the key 87 Manual test 23 Panoramic glass sunroof 54 Starting / Switching off the engine with Keyless Total distance recorder 23 Boot fittings 55 Entry and Starting 88 Lighting dimmer 23 Rear shelf (Van) 55 Manual parking brake 90 Trip computer 24 Electric parking brake 90 5-inch touch screen 25 5-speed manual gearbox 93 7-inch or 10-inch touch screen 26 Lighting and visibility 4 6-speed manual gearbox 93 Remotely operable features (Electric) 28 Exterior lighting control stalk 57 Automatic gearbox (EAT6) 94 Direction indicators 58 Automatic gearbox (EAT8) 95 Headlamp beam height adjustment 59 Drive selector (Electric) 98 Access 2 Automatic illumination of headlamps 59 Driving modes 99 Remote control / Key 30 Guide-me-home and welcome lighting 59 Hill start assist 100 Proximity Keyless Entry and Start 32 Automatic headlamp dipping 60 Gear efficiency indicator 100 Central locking 34 Wiper control stalk 61 Stop & Start 101 Back-up procedures 34 Changing a wiper blade 63 Under-inflation detection 102 Doors 36 Automatic wipers 63 Driving and manoeuvring aids - General Boot 37 recommendations 103 Alarm 37 Speed Limit Recognition and Safety Electric windows 39 5 Recommendation 105 General safety recommendations 65 Speed limiter 108 Hazard warning lamps 65 Ease of use and comfort 3 Cruise control 110 Horn 66 Drive Assist Plus 112 PEUGEOT i-Cockpit 41 Pedestrian horn (Electric) 66 Adaptive Cruise Control 112 Front seats 41 Emergency or assistance call 66 Active Lane Keeping Assist 115 Steering wheel adjustment 43 Electronic stability control (ESC) 68 Active Lane Keeping Assistance 119 Mirrors 43 Seat belts 70 Blind Spot Monitoring System 122 Rear bench seat 44 Airbags 71 Active Blind Spot Monitoring System 124
2 Contents
Active Safety Brake with Distance Alert and Changing a fuse 173 Frequently asked questions 211 Intelligent emergency braking assistance 124 12 V battery / Accessory battery 178 Distraction detection 126 Towing the vehicle 181 PEUGEOT Connect Nav Parking sensors 127 12 Visiopark 1 129 First steps 213 Technical data Park Assist 131 9 Steering mounted controls 214 Full Park Assist 134 Engine technical data and towed loads 183 Menus 214 Petrol engines 184 Voice commands 216 Diesel engines 187 Navigation 219 Practical information 7 Electric motor 188 Connected navigation 222 Compatibility of fuels 140 Dimensions 189 Applications 224 Refuelling 140 Identification markings 189 Radio 227 Misfuel prevention (Diesel) 141 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 228 Charging system (Electric) 141 Media 229 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system Charging the traction battery (Electric) 145 10 Telephone 230 Towing device 148 First steps 190 Settings 233 Towing device with quickly detachable towball 148 Steering mounted controls 190 Frequently asked questions 234 Roof bars 151 Menus 191 Snow chains 151 Radio 192 Alphabetical index ■ Energy economy mode 152 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 193 Bonnet 153 Media 194 Engine compartment 153 Telephone 195 Checking levels 154 Settings 197 Checks 156 Frequently asked questions 197 AdBlue® (BlueHDi) 158 Free-wheeling 160 PEUGEOT Connect Radio 11 Advice on care and maintenance 161 Access to additional videos First steps 199 Steering mounted controls 200
In the event of a breakdown 8 Menus 201 Warning triangle 163 Applications 202 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 163 Radio 202 Tool kit 163 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 204
Temporary puncture repair kit 165 Media 204 Spare wheel 167 Telephone 206 bit.ly/helpPSA Changing a bulb 170 Settings 209
3 Overview
Instruments and controls 1. Front courtesy / map reading lamps 5. Storage compartment or Wireless Emergency and assistance call buttons smartphone charger These illustrations and descriptions are intended Warning lamps display for seat belts and front 6. Storage compartment / 12 V socket as a guide. The presence and location of certain passenger airbag 7. Gearbox or drive selector elements may vary, depending on the version or 2. Interior rear view mirror Full Park Assist trim level. 3. Instrument panel 8. Electric parking brake 4. Fusebox 9. Choice of driving mode 5. Electric windows Electric door mirrors Steering mounted controls
6. Bonnet release 7. Front passenger airbag 8. Glove box
1. External lighting controls / Direction indicators / Service indicator 2. Wiper controls / Screenwash / Trip computer
3. Automatic gearbox control paddles 1. Touch screen 4. Audio system controls 2. Switching the engine on/off A. Select the instrument panel display mode 3. Central controls B. Voice commands 4. USB socket(s) C. Decrease / Increase volume
4 Overview
D. Select previous / next media Central controls Electric motor
Confirm a selection E. Access the Telephone menu Manage calls
F. Select an audio source G. Display the list of radio stations / audio tracks 5. Horn / Driver front airbag 6. Controls for the Speed limiter / Cruise control / Adaptive Cruise Control
Side controls
1. Heated seats
2. Access the touch screen menus 3. Touch screen on/off / Adjust volume 1. Charging connectors
4. Interior air recirculation 2. Traction battery 5. Air conditioning 3. Accessory battery 6. Maximum air conditioning 4. Heat pump 7. Hazard warning lamps 5. On-board charger
8. Central locking 6. Electric motor 1. Halogen headlamp beam height adjustment 9. Front demisting / defrosting 7. Charging cable with integrated control unit 2. Active lane departure warning system 10. Rear screen defrosting 3. Lane positioning assist The charging connectors 1 enable 3 types of 4. Heated windscreen charging: 5. Alarm – Domestic charging, via a mains power socket 6. Electric child lock and the supplied cable 7. – Accelerated charging, using a Wallbox accelerated charging unit and the corresponding cable. – Fast charging, using a fast public charger and the corresponding cable. The 400 V traction battery 2 uses Lithium-Ion technology. It stores and subsequently supplies electric energy to power the electric motor,
5 Overview
heating and air conditioning systems. Its charge level is represented by bars on a gauge, and there is a reserve power warning lamp on the instrument panel. The 12 V accessory battery 3 powers the vehicle’s conventional electrical system. It is used to start the electric motor. This battery is automatically recharged by the traction battery. The heat pump 4 provides passenger compartment heating and regulates traction battery and on-board charger cooling. The on-board charger 5 manages traction battery domestic and accelerated charging. The electric motor 6 provides motive power, based on the selected driving mode and the driving conditions. It recovers energy during vehicle braking and deceleration phases.
6 Eco-driving
Eco-driving Use electrical equipment wisely bicycle carrier, trailer, etc.). Preferably, use a Before moving off, if the passenger compartment roof box. Eco-driving refers to a range of everyday is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows Remove roof bars and roof racks after use. practices that allow the motorist to optimise their and air vents before using the air conditioning. At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit fuel consumption and CO emissions. 2 At speeds above 31 mph (50 km/h), close the summer tyres. Optimise your use of the gearbox windows and leave the air vents open. Comply with servicing instructions With a manual gearbox, move off gently and Consider using equipment that can help keep Check tyre pressures regularly, with the tyres change up promptly. While accelerating, change the temperature in the passenger compartment cold, referring to the label in the door aperture on up early. down (sunroof blind and window blinds, etc.). the driver's side. With an automatic gearbox, favour automatic Unless automatically regulated, switch off the air Carry out this check in particular: mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal conditioning as soon as the desired temperature – before a long journey. heavily or suddenly. has been reached. – at each change of season. The gear efficiency indicator prompts you to Switch off the demisting and defrosting functions, – after a long period out of use. engage the most suitable gear: whenever this if they are not managed automatically. Do not overlook the spare wheel and, where indication is displayed on the instrument panel, Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible. applicable, the tyres on your trailer or caravan. follow it straight away. Switch off the headlamps and foglamps when Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, With an automatic gearbox, this indicator the visibility conditions do not require their use. oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment filter, appears only in manual mode. Avoid running the engine before moving off, etc.) and observe the schedule of operations in Drive smoothly particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up the manufacturer's service schedule. much faster while driving. Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system As a passenger, avoid connecting your engine braking rather than the brake pedal and is faulty, your vehicle will emit pollution. Visit multimedia devices (film, music, video game, press the accelerator gradually. These attitudes a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop etc.) to help reduce consumption of electrical help to save fuel, reduce CO emissions and as soon as possible to restore your vehicle’s 2 energy, and hence fuel. decrease general traffic noise. nitrogen oxide emissions to regulatory Disconnect all portable devices before leaving If the vehicle has the steering-mounted compliance. the vehicle. "CRUISE" control, use cruise control at speeds When filling the fuel tank, do not continue after above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is Limit the causes of excess consumption the third nozzle cut-out, to avoid overflow. flowing well. Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the You will only see the fuel consumption of your heaviest items in the boot, as close as possible new vehicle settle down to a consistent average to the rear seats. after the first 1,900 miles (3,000 kilometres). Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and minimise wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack,
7 Eco-driving
Optimise the driving range (electric vehicles) The vehicle’s electrical consumption depends heavily on the route, the vehicle speed and your driving style. Try to remain in the "ECO" zone on the power indicator, by driving smoothly and maintaining a steady speed. Anticipate the need to slow down, and brake smoothly, whenever possible using engine braking with the regenerative braking function, which will move the power indicator into the "CHARGE" zone.
8 Instruments
LCD instrument panels 5. Fuel gauge 7. Engine oil level indicator (depending on 1 6. Engine oil level indicator (depending on engine) Dials engine) Service indicator, then total distance recorder
Service indicator, then total distance recorder (miles or km) (miles or km) These functions are displayed successively These functions are displayed successively when the ignition is switched on. when the ignition is switched on. 8. Trip computer information
7. Trip computer information 1. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h) 2. LCD display LCD display - Type 2 Matrix instrument panel 3. Rev counter (x 1000 rpm), graduation depends on the engine (Petrol or Diesel) Dials
LCD Display - Type 1
1. Cruise control / speed limiter settings Display of speed limit signs 2. Display of driving aids 1. Coolant temperature indicator (°C) (Petrol or 3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) Diesel) 4. Driving mode selected Thermal comfort consumption indicator
5. Gear shift indicator (Electric) 1. Cruise control / speed limiter settings Selector position and gear on automatic 2. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h) 2. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) gearbox 3. Matrix display 3. Driving mode selected 6. Fuel gauge 4. Rev counter (x 1000 rpm), graduation 4. Gear shift indicator depends on the engine (Petrol or Diesel) Selector position and gear on automatic Power indicator (Electric) gearbox
9 Instruments
5. Fuel gauge (Petrol or Diesel) 3. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) 1. Fuel gauge (Petrol or Diesel) Charge level indicator (Electric) Display of driving aids Charge level indicator (Electric) Trip computer information 2. Remaining range (miles or km) Matrix display Power flow / vehicle charge state (Electric) 3. Cruise control / speed limiter settings
4. Service indicator, then total distance recorder Display of speed limit signs (miles or km) 4. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h) Remaining range (Electric) 5. Total distance recorder (miles or km) These functions are displayed in turn when 6. Rev counter (x 1000 rpm) (Petrol or Diesel) the ignition is switched on. Power indicator (Electric) Driving mode selected (other than "Normal" 7. Gear shift indicator (arrow and recommended mode) gear) Selector position and gear on automatic gearbox (Petrol or Diesel)
Head-up 3D digital display Drive selector position (Electric) This 3D digital instrument panel can be Driving mode selected (other than "Normal" customised. mode) Depending on the display mode selected, certain 8. Coolant temperature indicator (°C) (Petrol or information is hidden or presented differently. Diesel) Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h) (Petrol Example with the "DIALS" display mode: 9. or Diesel)
Displays 1. Cruise control / speed limiter settings Some lamps have a fixed location, the others Display of speed limit signs can alter location. Gear shift indicator (arrow and recommended 2. For certain functions that have indicator lamps gear) for both operation and for deactivation, there is Selector position and gear on automatic only one dedicated location. gearbox (Petrol or Diesel) Permanent information Drive selector position (Electric) In the standard display, the instrument panel
shows: – in fixed locations:
10 Instruments
• Gearbox and gear shift indicator information. Customising the instrument Changing the display mode • Fuel gauge (Petrol or Diesel). 1 • Driving range (Petrol or Diesel). panel • Coolant temperature indicator (Petrol or You can modify the appearance of the instrument Diesel). panel by choosing: • Charge level and driving range indicator – a display colour. (Electric). – a display mode. • Power indicator (Electric). Display language and units • Driving mode. These depend on the touch screen – in variable locations: settings. • Digital speedometer. When travelling abroad, the speed must be • Total distance recorder. shown in the official units of the country you • Status or alert messages displayed are driving in (mph, miles or km/h, km). ► Turn the thumbwheel on the left of the temporarily. steering wheel to display and scroll through the Optional information As a safety measure, these adjustments various modes on the instrument panel. Depending on the display mode selected and the must be carried out with the vehicle ► Press the thumbwheel to confirm the mode. active features, additional information may be stationary. If you do not press the thumbwheel, the selected displayed: display mode is automatically applied after a few – Rev counter. Choosing a display colour moments. – Trip computer. Display mode overview – Driving aid functions. With PEUGEOT Connect Nav – " ": standard display of analogue and – Speed limiter or cruise control. The instrument panel display colour depends on DIALS digital speedometers, distance recorder and: – Media currently playing. the colour scheme chosen in this system. • fuel gauge, coolant temperature indicator – Navigation instructions. ► Press Settings in the side banner of and rev counter (Petrol or Diesel). – Analogue speedometer. the touch screen. • battery charge indicator and power indicator – Engine information (G-meters, Power-meters, ► Select "Color schemes". (Electric). Boost, Torque) in Sport mode. ► Select a display colour and then press – ": standard display plus current – Power flow (Electric). "OK" to confirm. NAVIGATION navigation information (map and navigation Setting the display mode instructions). In each mode, specific types of information are – "DRIVING" : standard display, plus information displayed on the instrument panel. relating to active driving aid systems.
11 Instruments
– "MINIMAL": 2D display with digital • "Energy consumption" (depending on When the ignition is switched on List of warning and speedometer, distance recorder and: version). Certain red or orange warning lamps come on indicator lamps • fuel gauge and engine coolant temperature ► Confirm to save and exit. for a few seconds when the ignition is switched indicator (Petrol or Diesel). Information is displayed immediately on the on. These warning lamps should go off as soon Red warning/indicator lamps • battery charge indicator (Electric). instrument panel if the corresponding display as the engine is started. STOP – "PERSONAL 1" / "PERSONAL 2": displays mode is selected. For more information on a system or a function, Fixed, associated with another warning the information selected by the driver in the The type of information selected in the refer to the corresponding section. lamp, accompanied by the display of a centre of the instrument panel. "PERSONAL 1" mode is not available in message and an audible signal. Configuring a "PERSONAL" display mode the "PERSONAL 2" mode. Warning lamp continuously A serious fault with the engine, braking system, With PEUGEOT Connect Radio lit power steering, automatic gearbox or a major ► Press Settings in the upper banner of The illumination of a red or orange warning lamp electrical fault has been detected. the touch screen. Warning and indicator indicates the occurrence of a fault that needs Carry out (1) and then (2). ► Select "Configuration". lamps further investigation. Engine self-diagnostics system (Petrol or If a warning lamp remains lit Diesel) ► Select "Instrument panel Displayed as symbols, the warning and indicator Fixed. The references (1), (2) and (3) in the warning personalisation". lamps inform the driver of the occurrence of a A major engine fault has been and indicator lamp description indicate whether With PEUGEOT Connect Nav malfunction (warning lamps) or of the operating detected. you should contact a qualified professional in ► Press Settings in the side banner of status of a system (operation or deactivation Carry out (1) and then (2). the touch screen. indicator lamps). Certain lamps light up in two addition to the immediate recommended actions. Maximum engine coolant temperature ► Select "OPTIONS". ways (fixed or flashing) and/or in several colours. (1): You must stop the vehicle. Fixed with display blocks lit in red ► Select "Instrument panel Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch off Associated warnings (with matrix instrument panel). personalisation". the ignition. The illumination of a lamp may be accompanied or ► Select "PERSONAL 1" or "PERSONAL 2". (2): Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified by an audible signal and/or a message displayed Fixed (except on matrix instrument panel). ► Select the type of information using the scroll workshop. in a screen. The cooling system temperature is too high. arrows in the touch screen: (3): Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Relating the type of alert to the operating status Carry out (1), then allow the engine to cool • "Default" (empty). workshop. of the vehicle allows you to determine whether before topping up the level, if necessary. If the • "Trip computer". the situation is normal or whether a fault has problem persists, carry out (2). • "Media". occurred: refer to the description of each lamp • "G-metres" (depending on version). Engine oil pressure (Petrol or Diesel) for further information. • "Power meters + Boost + Torque" Fixed. (depending on version). There is a fault with the engine lubrication system.
12 Instruments
List of warning and Carry out (1) and then (2). Door(s) open Fixed, associated with a message 1 indicator lamps System malfunction (Electric) Fixed. identifying the access. Red warning/indicator lamps An anomaly involving the electric motor or A door or the tailgate is not properly closed traction battery has been detected. (speed less than 6 mph (10 km/h)). STOP Fixed, associated with a message Fixed, associated with another warning Carry out (1) and then (2). identifying the access, accompanied by lamp, accompanied by the display of a Cable connected (Electric) an audible signal. message and an audible signal. Fixed. A door or the tailgate is not properly closed A serious fault with the engine, braking system, It is not possible to start the vehicle while (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). power steering, automatic gearbox or a major the charging cable is connected to the vehicle’s electrical fault has been detected. connector. Seat belts not fastened/unfastened Carry out (1) and then (2). Disconnect the charging cable and close the Fixed or flashing, accompanied by an flap. increasing audible signal. Engine self-diagnostics system (Petrol or A seat belt has not been fastened or has been 12 V battery charge Diesel) unfastened. Fixed. Fixed. A major engine fault has been The battery charging circuit has a fault Manual parking brake detected. (dirty terminals, slack or cut alternator belt, etc.). Fixed. Carry out (1) and then (2). Carry out (1). The parking brake is applied or not properly released. Maximum engine coolant temperature If the electric parking brake is no longer working, Fixed with display blocks lit in red immobilise the vehicle: Electric parking brake (with matrix instrument panel). ► With the manual gearbox, engage a gear. Fixed. or ► With the EAT6 automatic gearbox, move the The electric parking brake is applied. Fixed (except on matrix instrument panel). gear selector to position P. Flashing. The cooling system temperature is too high. ► With the EAT8 automatic gearbox or drive Application/release is faulty. Carry out (1), then allow the engine to cool selector, fit the chock against one of the wheels. Carry out (1): park on flat ground (on a level before topping up the level, if necessary. If the Clean and tighten the terminals. If the warning surface). problem persists, carry out (2). lamp does not go off when the engine is started, With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. carry out (2). With an automatic gearbox or drive selector, Engine oil pressure (Petrol or Diesel) select mode P. Fixed. Switch off the ignition and carry out (2). There is a fault with the engine lubrication system.
13 Instruments
Braking "Parking brake fault". As soon as traffic conditions permit, regenerate Fixed. Automatic release of the electric parking brake is the filter by driving at a speed of at least 37 mph The brake fluid level in the braking circuit unavailable. (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off. has dropped significantly. Carry out (2). Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal Carry out (1), then top up with fluid that complies Service warning lamp fixed and and a message indicating that the additive with the manufacturer's recommendations. If the service spanner flashing then level in the particle filter is too low. problem persists, carry out (2). fixed. The low level in the additive tank has been Fixed. The servicing interval has been exceeded. reached. The electronic brake force The vehicle must be serviced as soon as Top up without delay: carry out (3). distribution (EBFD) system is faulty. possible. Low fuel level (Petrol or Diesel) Carry out (1) and then (2). Only with BlueHDi Diesel engines. Fixed, with the blocks lit red, Orange warning/indicator lamps Engine pre-heating (Diesel) accompanied by an audible signal Temporarily on (with the matrix instrument panel) Service (up to approximately 30 seconds in or Temporarily on, accompanied by the severe weather conditions). Fixed, with the reserve level shown in red, display of a message. When switching on the ignition, if the weather accompanied by an audible signal and the One or more minor faults, for which there is/are conditions and the engine temperature make it display of a message (except with the matrix no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected. necessary. instrument panel). Identify the cause of the fault using the message Wait until the warning lamp goes off before When it first comes on, there remains displayed in the instrument panel. starting. approximately 5 litres of fuel in the tank You can deal with certain problems yourself, for When the warning lamp goes off, starting will (reserve). example an open door or the start of saturation occur immediately if you press and hold: Until the fuel level is topped up, this alert will of the particle filter. – the clutch pedal with a manual gearbox. be repeated every time the ignition is switched For other faults, such as with the tyre under- – the brake pedal with an automatic gearbox. on, with increasing frequency as the fuel level inflation detection system, carry out (3). If the engine does not start, make the engine decreases and approaches zero. Fixed, accompanied by the display of a starting request again, while keeping your foot Refuel without delay to avoid running out of fuel. message. on the pedal. Never drive until completely empty, as One or more major faults, for which there is/are this could damage the emissions control and no specific warning lamp(s), have been detected. Particle filter (Diesel) injection systems. Identify the cause of the fault using the message Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal displayed in the instrument panel, then carry out and a message about the risk of particle (3). filter blockage. Fixed, accompanied by the message The particle filter is nearing saturation.
14 Instruments
Low traction battery level (Electric) Fixed. SCR emissions control system (BlueHDi) Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal. A minor engine fault has been Fixed when the ignition is 1 The state of charge of the traction battery detected. switched on, accompanied is low. Carry out (3). by an audible signal and a message. View the remaining range. AdBlue® (BlueHDi) A malfunction involving the SCR emissions Put the vehicle on charge as soon as possible. On for around 30 seconds when starting control system has been detected. Limited power (Electric) the vehicle, accompanied by a message This alert disappears once the exhaust Fixed. indicating the driving range. emissions return to normal levels. ® The state of charge of the traction battery The driving range is between 1,500 and 500 Flashing AdBlue warning is critical. miles (2,400 and 800 km). lamp on switching on the The engine power gradually decreases. Top up the AdBlue®. ignition, with the Service and Engine self- You must put the vehicle on charge. Fixed, on switching on the ignition, diagnostics warning lamps on fixed, If the warning lamp remains lit, carry out (2). accompanied by an audible signal and a accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the driving range. Pedestrian horn (Electric) message indicating the driving range. Depending on the message displayed, it may be Fixed. The driving range is between 500 and 62 miles possible to drive for up to 685 miles (1,100 km) Horn fault detected. (800 and 100 km). ® before the engine immobiliser is triggered. Carry out (3). Promptly top up the AdBlue , or carry out (3). Flashing, accompanied by an audible Carry out (3) without delay, to avoid starting Engine self-diagnostics system (Petrol or signal and a message indicating the being prevented. Diesel) ® driving range. Flashing AdBlue warning Flashing. The driving range is less than 62 miles (100 km). lamp on switching on the The engine management system has a You must top up the AdBlue® to avoid engine ignition, with the Service and Engine self- fault. starting being prevented, or carry out (3). diagnostics warning lamps on fixed, There is a risk that the catalytic converter will be Flashing, accompanied by an audible accompanied by an audible signal and a destroyed. signal and a message indicating that message indicating that starting is prevented. You must carry out (2). starting is prevented. The engine immobiliser prevents the engine Fixed. The AdBlue® tank is empty: the regulatory engine from restarting (over the authorised driving limit The emissions control system has a fault. immobiliser prevents the engine from being after confirmation of an emissions control system The warning lamp should go off when the engine restarted. malfunction). is started. To restart the engine, top up the AdBlue®, or To start the engine, carry out (2). Carry out (3) without delay. carry out (2). You must add at least 5 litres of AdBlue® to its tank.
15 Instruments
Deactivation of the automatic functions message "Parking brake fault". If these warning lamps come on after the engine (with electric parking brake) The parking brake is faulty: manual and is switched off and then restarted, carry out (3). Fixed. automatic functions may not be working. Anti-lock braking system (ABS) The "automatic application" (on switching When stationary, to immobilise the vehicle: Fixed. off the engine) and "automatic release" (on ► Pull and hold the control lever for The anti-lock braking system has a fault. acceleration) functions are deactivated. approximately 7 to 15 seconds, until the indicator The vehicle retains conventional braking. If automatic application/release is no longer lamp comes on on the instrument panel. Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry possible: If this procedure does not work, secure the out (3). ► Start the engine. vehicle: Power steering ► Use the control lever to apply the parking ► Park on a level surface. Fixed. brake. ► With a manual gearbox, engage a gear. The power steering has a fault. ► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. ► With an automatic gearbox or drive selector, Drive carefully at moderate speed, then carry ► Hold the control lever pressed in the release select P, then place the supplied chock against out (3). direction for between 10 and 15 seconds. one of the wheels. ► Release the control lever. Then carry out (2). Dynamic stability control (DSC)/Anti-slip regulation (ASR) ► Depress and hold the brake pedal. Distance Alert / Active Safety Brake Fixed. ► Hold the control lever in the “Application” Fixed, accompanied by the display of a The system is deactivated. direction for 2 seconds. message. The DSC/ASR system is reactivated ► Release the control lever and the brake The system has been deactivated via the touch automatically when the vehicle is restarted, and pedal. screen ( Driving/ Vehiclemenu). from around 31 mph (50 km/h). Malfunction (with electric parking brake) Distance Alert/Active Safety Brake Below 31 mph (50 km/h), it can be reactivated Fixed, accompanied by the Flashing. manually. message "Parking brake fault". The system activates and brakes the Flashing. The vehicle cannot be immobilised with the vehicle momentarily so as to reduce the speed of The DSC/ASR adjustment is activated if engine running. collision with the vehicle ahead. there is a loss of grip or trajectory. If manual application and release commands are Fixed, accompanied by a message and Fixed. not working, the electric parking brake control an audible signal. The DSC/ASR system has a fault. lever is faulty. The system has a fault. Carry out (3). The automatic functions must be used at all Carry out (3). times and are automatically re-enabled in the Distance Alert / Active Safety Brake event of a control lever fault. Fixed. Carry out (2). The system has a fault. Fixed, accompanied by the
16 Instruments
Emergency brake malfunction (with Carry out (3). Reinitialise the detection system after adjusting electric parking brake) Airbags the pressure. 1 Fixed, accompanied by the Fixed. Under-inflation warning lamp message "Parking brake fault". One of the airbags or seat belt flashing then fixed and Service Emergency braking does not deliver optimal pretensioners is faulty. warning lamp fixed. performance. Carry out (3). The tyre pressure monitoring system is faulty. If automatic release is not available, use manual Under-inflation detection is no longer monitored. Front passenger airbag (ON) release or carry out (3). Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible Fixed. and carry out (3). Hill start assist The front passenger airbag is activated. Fixed, accompanied by the The control is in the "ON" position. Stop & Start (Petrol or Diesel) message "Anti roll-back system In this case, do NOT install a "rearward Fixed, accompanied by the display of a fault". facing" child seat on the front passenger seat message. The system has a fault. - Risk of serious injury! The Stop & Start system has been deactivated Carry out (3). manually. Front passenger airbag (OFF) The engine will not switch off at the next traffic Active Lane Keeping Assistance Fixed. stop. Fixed. The front passenger airbag is deactivated. Fixed. The system has been automatically The control is in the "OFF" position. The Stop & Start system has been deactivated or placed on standby. A "rearward facing" child seat can be installed, deactivated automatically. Flashing. unless there is a fault with the airbags (Airbags The engine will not switch off at the next traffic You are about to cross a broken warning lamp on). lane marking without operating the direction stop, if the exterior temperature is: Parking sensors indicators. – below 0°C. Fixed, accompanied by the display of a The system is activated, then corrects the – above +35°C. message and an audible signal. trajectory on the side of the lane marking Flashing then fixed, accompanied by a The system has a fault. detected. message. Carry out (3). Fixed. The system has a fault. The system has a fault. Under-inflation Carry out (3). Carry out (3). Fixed. Rear foglamp The pressure in one or more tyres is too Lane positioning assist Fixed. low. Fixed, accompanied by the Service The lamp is on. Check the pressure of the tyres as soon as warning lamp. possible. The system has a fault.
17 Instruments
Green warning/indicator lamps Direction indicators Fully depress the clutch pedal. Indicators Foot on the brake Stop & Start (Petrol or Diesel) Flashing with audible signal. Fixed. The direction indicators are on. Fixed. Service indicator When the vehicle stops, the Stop & Start Sidelamps Omission or insufficient pressure on the The servicing information is expressed in terms puts the engine into STOP mode. brake pedal. of distance (kilometres or miles) and time Flashing temporarily. Fixed. With the EAT6 automatic gearbox, with the (months or days). STOP mode is momentarily unavailable The lamps are on. engine running, before releasing the parking The alert is given at whichever of these two or START mode is automatically triggered. Dipped beam headlamps brake, to move out of position P. terms is reached first. Vehicle ready to drive (Electric) With the EAT8 automatic gearbox or the drive The servicing information is displayed in the Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal Fixed. selector, it may be necessary to depress the instrument panel. Depending on the version of when it comes on. The lamps are on. brake pedal to unlock the gearbox from mode N. the vehicle: The vehicle is ready to drive and the thermal Automatic headlamp dipping This warning lamp will remain on if you attempt – The distance recorder display line indicates comfort systems are available. to release the parking brake without depressing the distance remaining before the next service The indicator lamp goes out upon reaching a Fixed. the brake pedal. is due, or the distance travelled since it was due speed of approximately 3 mph (5 km/h) and The function has been preceded by the "-" sign. Automatic gearbox (EAT8) or Drive lights up again when the vehicle stops moving. activated via the touch screen (Driving / Vehicle – An alert message indicates the distance selector (Electric) The lamp will go out when you turn off the menu). remaining, as well as the period before the next engine and exit the vehicle. The lighting control stalk is in the "AUTO" Fixed. service is due or how long it is overdue. position. Park Assist or Full Park Assist The automatic gearbox is locked. The value indicated is calculated Fixed. Blue warning/indicator lamps The drive selector is locked. according to the distance covered and The function is active. You must press the Unlock button to unlock it. the time elapsed since the last service. Main beam headlamps Active Lane Keeping Assist Water in Diesel fuel filter (Diesel) The alert may also be triggered close to a Fixed. Fixed. due date. The function has been activated. The lamps are on. Fixed (with LCD instrument panels). All the conditions have been met: the system is The Diesel fuel filter contains water. Service spanner Black/white warning lamps operating. Carry out (2) without delay. Risk of damaging the On temporarily when the ignition is fuel injection system! Automatic wiping Foot on the clutch (Petrol or Diesel) switched on. Between 620 and 1,860 miles (1,000 and 3,000 Fixed (with LCD instrument panels). Fixed. km) remain before the next service is due. Stop & Start: the change to START mode Automatic windscreen wiping is Fixed, when the ignition is switched on. is rejected because the clutch pedal is not fully activated. The next service is due in less than 620 depressed. miles (1,000 km).
18 Instruments
Indicators Have your vehicle serviced very soon. Retrieving the service information Service spanner flashing The service information can be accessed 1 Service indicator Flashing then fixed, when the via the "Check/Diagnostics" button in the ignition is switched on. Driving/Vehicle menu of the touch screen. The servicing information is expressed in terms (With BlueHDi Diesel engines, combined with the of distance (kilometres or miles) and time Service warning lamp.) Engine oil level indicator (months or days). The servicing interval has been exceeded. (Depending on version.) The alert is given at whichever of these two Have your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. On versions fitted with an electric oil level terms is reached first. indicator, the engine oil level status is displayed The servicing information is displayed in the Resetting the service indicator on the instrument panel for a few seconds upon instrument panel. Depending on the version of The service indicator must be reset after each switching the ignition on, after the servicing the vehicle: service. information. – The distance recorder display line indicates If you have serviced your vehicle yourself: the distance remaining before the next service The level read will only be correct if the ► Switch off the ignition. is due, or the distance travelled since it was due vehicle is on level ground and the engine preceded by the "-" sign. has been off for more than 30 minutes. – An alert message indicates the distance remaining, as well as the period before the next Oil level incorrect service is due or how long it is overdue. This is indicated, depending on the instrument
The value indicated is calculated panel, by the display of "OIL" or by the message according to the distance covered and ► Press and hold the button located on the end "Oil level incorrect", accompanied by the the time elapsed since the last service. of the lighting control stalk. lighting of the Service warning lamp and an The alert may also be triggered close to a ► With no action on the brake pedal, press the audible signal. due date. START/STOP button once; a temporary display If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using window appears and a countdown begins. the dipstick, the level must be topped up to avoid Service spanner ► When the display indicates =0, release the damage to the engine. On temporarily when the ignition is lighting control stalk button; the spanner symbol For more information on Checking levels, refer switched on. disappears. to the corresponding section. Between 620 and 1,860 miles (1,000 and 3,000 If you disconnect the battery following Oil level indicator fault km) remain before the next service is due. this operation, lock the vehicle and wait This is indicated, depending on the instrument Fixed, when the ignition is switched on. at least 5 minutes for the reset to be panel, by the display of "OIL_ _" or by the The next service is due in less than 620 registered. message "Oil level measurement invalid", miles (1,000 km).
19 Instruments
accompanied by the lighting of the Service You must stop the vehicle as soon as it is It is then no longer possible to start the warning lamp and an audible signal. safe to do so. engine until the minimum level of AdBlue® has Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Wait a few minutes before switching off the been topped up. workshop. engine. In the event of a fault with the electric After switching off the ignition, carefully Manually displaying the driving range indicator, the oil level is no longer open the bonnet and check the coolant While the driving range is greater than monitored. level. 1,500 miles (2,400 km), it is not displayed If the system is faulty, you must check the automatically. engine oil level using the manual dipstick For more information on Checking You can view the range information by located under the bonnet. levels, refer to the corresponding pressing the "Check / Diagnostic" button For more information on Checking levels, section. in the touch screen’s Driving / Vehicle menu. refer to the corresponding section.
® Actions required related to a lack of AdBlue range indicators ® Engine coolant temperature AdBlue (BlueHDi) The following warning lamps light up when the indicator The Diesel BlueHDi engines are equipped with quantity of AdBlue® is lower than the reserve
a system that associates the SCR (Selective level corresponding to a range of 1,500 miles Catalytic Reduction) emissions control system (2,400 km). and the Diesel particle filter (DPF) for the Together with the warning lamps, messages treatment of exhaust gases. They cannot regularly remind you of the need to top up to function without AdBlue® fluid. avoid engine starting being prevented. Refer to When the level of AdBlue® falls below the the Warning and indicator lamps section for reserve level (between 1,500 and 0 miles (2,400 details of the messages displayed. and 0 km)), a warning lamp lights up when For more information on AdBlue® the ignition is switched on and an estimate (BlueHDi engines), and in particular on With the engine running: of the distance that can be travelled before topping up, refer to the corresponding section. – In zone A, the temperature is correct. engine starting is prevented is displayed in the – In zone B, the temperature is too high; the instrument panel. associated warning lamp and the central STOP warning lamp come on in red on the instrument The engine starting prevention system panel, accompanied by the display of a message required by regulations is activated ® and an audible signal. automatically once the AdBlue tank is empty.
20 Instruments
Malfunction of the SCR emissions While driving, the message is displayed every 30 Warning Action Remaining control system seconds. The alert is repeated when switching 1 lamps lit driving on the ignition. Malfunction detection range You can continue driving for up to 685 miles
Top up. Between If a malfunction is detected, (1,100 km) before the engine immobiliser 1,500 miles system is triggered.
these warning lamps come on, and 500 accompanied by an audible Have the system checked by a miles (2,400 signal and an "Emissions fault” PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified km and or “NO START IN” message. workshop as soon as possible. 800 km)
Top up as Between Starting prevented soon as 500 miles The alert is triggered while driving, when the
Whenever the ignition is switched on, the fault is detected for the first time, and thereafter possible. and 62 miles "Emissions fault: Starting prevented" or "NO when switching on the ignition for subsequent (800 km and START IN" message is displayed. 100 km) journeys, while the cause of the fault persists.
To be able to restart the engine, contact A top-up is Between If the fault is temporary, the alert a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified essential, 62 miles disappears during the next journey, after workshop. due to the and 0 miles self-diagnostic checks of the SCR emissions risk that the (100 km and control system.
engine will 0 km) Power indicator (Electric) be prevented Malfunction confirmed during the from starting. permitted driving phase (between 685
miles and 0 miles (1,100 km and 0 km)) To be able 0 miles (km) to restart If the fault indication is still displayed the engine, permanently after 31 miles (50 km) of driving, the add at least fault in the SCR system is confirmed.
5 litres of The AdBlue warning lamp flashes, and an AdBlue® to "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in X
its tank. miles" or "NO START IN X miles" message is displayed, indicating the driving range in miles or CHARGE kilometres. Traction battery charging during deceleration and braking.
21 Instruments
ECO With the ignition off, opening the driver's Thermal comfort thermal comfort consumption indicator then Moderate energy consumption and optimised door activates the indicator. moves into the "ECO" zone. driving range. consumption indicator To quickly heat or cool the passenger POWER (Electric)
Associated warning lamps compartment, feel free to temporarily Energy consumption by the drive train during select the maximum heating or cooling acceleration. Two successive alert levels indicate that the setting. NEUTRAL energy available has dropped to a low level: Excessive use of thermal comfort equipment, On switching on the ignition, your vehicle’s 1st level: Reserve particularly at low speed, can significantly electric drive train neither consumes nor The state of charge of the traction battery decrease the vehicle's range. generates energy: after sweeping over the is low. Remember to optimise equipment settings indicator, the needle or the cursor returns to its Fixed, accompanied by an audible signal. upon achieving the desired level of comfort, "neutral" position. ► View the remaining range on the instrument panel. and adjust them if necessary whenever you With the ignition off, opening the driver's ► Put the vehicle on charge as soon as start the vehicle. The gauge shows the consumption of electric door activates the indicator, which moves possible. After an extended period without using the power for thermal comfort functions. to the "neutral" position. 2nd level: Critical heating, you may notice a slight odour during It concerns the following equipment and The state of charge of the traction battery the first few minutes of use. systems: is critical. Charge level indicator – Heating. Fixed, together with the reserve warning lamp, – Air conditioning. (Electric) accompanied by an audible signal. Manual test – Front demisting/defrosting. ► You must put the vehicle on charge. – Rear screen demisting/defrosting. This function allows you to check certain The remaining range is no longer – Heated seats. indicators and display the alerts log. calculated. The drive train power The traction battery powers the heating and air It can be accessed via the "Diagnostic / gradually decreases. conditioning systems. Check" button in the Driving / Vehicle The heating and air conditioning are switched This equipment and these functions can be touch screen menu. off (even if the needle or cursor indicating used: The following information is displayed on the their consumption is not at the ECO position). – If the vehicle is not plugged in, when the instrument panel: READY lamp is lit. – Engine oil level.
– If the vehicle is plugged in, when the ignition is – Next service due. The traction battery charge status and remaining switched on. – Tyre pressures. range are displayed continuously when the Selecting Eco mode limits the performance of – Driving range associated with the AdBlue and vehicle is started. some equipment. The needle or cursor on the the SCR system (BlueHDi Diesel). – Active alerts.
22 Instruments thermal comfort consumption indicator then This information is also displayed With BLUETOOTH touch moves into the "ECO" zone. automatically every time the ignition is 1 switched on. screen audio system To quickly heat or cool the passenger ► Press on the Settings menu. compartment, feel free to temporarily select the maximum heating or cooling ► Select "Display". setting. Total distance recorder Excessive use of thermal comfort equipment, The total distance recorder measures the total ► Adjust the brightness by particularly at low speed, can significantly distance travelled by the vehicle since its initial pressing the buttons. decrease the vehicle's range. registration. You can also switch off the screen: Remember to optimise equipment settings With the ignition on, the total distance is ► Select "Turn off screen". upon achieving the desired level of comfort, displayed at all times. It remains displayed for and adjust them if necessary whenever you 30 seconds after switching off the ignition. It is The screen goes off completely. start the vehicle. displayed when the driver's door is opened, and ► Press the screen again (anywhere on its After an extended period without using the when the vehicle is locked or unlocked. surface) to activate it. heating, you may notice a slight odour during When travelling abroad, you may have to the first few minutes of use. change the distance units (km or miles): With PEUGEOT Connect the road speed must be displayed in the local Radio Manual test country’s official unit (km/h or mph). ► Press this button to select the The unit is changed via the screen Settings menu. This function allows you to check certain configuration menu, with the vehicle ► Select "Brightness". indicators and display the alerts log. stationary. It can be accessed via the "Diagnostic / ► Adjust the brightness by pressing the Check" button in the Driving / Vehicle arrows or moving the slider. touch screen menu. Lighting dimmer The settings are applied immediately. The following information is displayed on the ► Press outside the settings window to exit. This system allows the brightness of the instrument panel: You can also switch off the screen: instruments and controls to be adjusted to suit – Engine oil level. ► Press this button to select the the ambient light level. – Next service due. Settings menu. – Tyre pressures. ► Select "Dark". – Driving range associated with the AdBlue and the SCR system (BlueHDi Diesel). The screen goes off completely. – Active alerts.
23 Instruments
► Press the screen again (anywhere on its Pressing the end of the wiper control stalk Trip reset Calculated based on the past few surface) to activate it. displays the trip computer data. seconds. ► When the desired trip is displayed, This function is only displayed at speeds above With digital instrument panel press the button on the end of the wiper The trip computer data is permanently displayed 19 mph (30 km/h). WithPEUGEOT Connect Nav control stalk for more than 2 seconds. when the "PERSONAL" display mode is ► Press this button to select the Trips "1" and "2" are independent and are used selected. Average fuel consumption Settings menu. identically. ► Select "OPTIONS". In all other display modes, pressing the end of (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) ► Select "Screen configuration". the wiper control stalk will cause this data to Definitions (miles/kWh or kWh/100 km or km/kWh) appear temporarily in a specific window. Calculated since the last trip ► Select the "Brightness" tab. Display of the various tabs computer reset. Range ► Adjust the brightness by pressing the (miles or km) arrows or moving the slider. Average speed The distance which can still be travelled ► Press this button to save and exit. (mph or km/h) with the fuel remaining in the tank Calculated since the last trip computer (depending on the average fuel consumption You can also switch off the screen: reset. over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled). ► Press this button to select the This value may vary following a change in menu. Distance travelled Settings the style of driving or the terrain, resulting ► Select " ". (miles or km) Turn off screen in a significant change in the current fuel Calculated since the last trip computer consumption. The screen goes off completely. ► Pressing the button located on the end of the reset. When the range falls below 19 miles (30 km), ► Press the screen again (anywhere on its wiper control stalk displays the following tabs dashes are displayed. surface) to activate it. in turn: Stop & Start time counter After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range – Current information: (minutes/seconds or hours/minutes) is recalculated and is displayed if it exceeds 62 • Driving range (Petrol or Diesel). miles (100 km). Trip computer • Current fuel consumption. If your vehicle is equipped with Stop & Start, a If dashes instead of figures continue to be Information displayed about the current journey • Stop & Start time counter (Petrol or Diesel). time counter calculates the time spent in STOP displayed when driving, contact a PEUGEOT (range, fuel consumption, average speed, etc.). • Total mileage (Electric). mode during a journey. dealer or a qualified workshop. – Trips "1" then "2": It resets to zero every time the ignition is Data displayed on the • Average speed. Current fuel consumption switched on. • Average fuel consumption. instrument panel (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) • Distance travelled. With instrument panels with dials (miles/kWh or kWh/100 km or km/kWh)
24 Instruments
Calculated based on the past few 5-inch touch screen Right thumbwheel: air flow adjustment (rotation)/ seconds. direct access to the Climate menu (press). 1 This function is only displayed at speeds above This system gives access to the following Access to menus. 19 mph (30 km/h). elements: – Audio system and telephone controls and Return to the previous screen or confirm. Average fuel consumption display of related information. (mpg or l/100 km or km/l) – Vehicle function and equipment setting menus. After a few moments with no action on (miles/kWh or kWh/100 km or km/kWh) – Air conditioning system controls (depending the second page, the first page is Calculated since the last trip on version). displayed automatically. computer reset. For safety reasons, always stop the vehicle before performing operations Average speed that require sustained attention. Menus (mph or km/h) Some functions are not accessible while Radio Calculated since the last trip computer driving. See "Audio equipment and telematics" reset. section. Media Distance travelled Recommendations See "Audio equipment and telematics" (miles or km) Do not use pointed objects on the touch screen. section. Calculated since the last trip computer Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. Climate reset. Use a soft, clean cloth to clean the touch screen. Settings for temperature, air flow, etc. For more information on Manual air Stop & Start time counter Main controls conditioning, refer to the corresponding section.
(minutes/seconds or hours/minutes) Telephone See "Audio equipment and telematics" If your vehicle is equipped with Stop & Start, a section. time counter calculates the time spent in STOP Driving mode during a journey. Activation, deactivation and settings for It resets to zero every time the ignition is certain functions. switched on. With the ignition off: system start-up. Settings With the engine running: mute. Main system settings. Left thumbwheel: volume adjustment (rotation)/direct access to the Media menu (press).
25 Instruments
7-inch or 10-inch touch Use a soft, clean cloth to clean the touch screen. For more information on Manual air Principles and conditioning Automatic dual-zone air Some menus may display across two pages: screen conditioning, refer to the corresponding section. Main controls press the "OPTIONS" button to access the This system gives access to the following second page. elements: With All-In-One With 7-inch touch screen
– Permanent display of the time and the exterior If no action is performed on the second temperature (a blue warning lamp appears if page, the first page is displayed automatically.
there is a risk of ice).
– Heating/air conditioning controls. To deactivate/activate a function, select "OFF" – Vehicle functions and equipment setting or "ON". menus. Configure a function. – Audio system and telephone controls and display of related information. Access additional information on the – Display of visual manoeuvring aid functions function. (visual parking sensor information, Park Assist, Confirm.
etc.). – Internet services and display of related Use the buttons arranged around the touch Return to the previous page or confirm. information. screen to access the menus, then press the – Navigation system controls and Audio system on/off. virtual buttons on the touch screen. display of related information (depending on Menus version). Volume control / mute. With 10-inch touch screen See "Audio equipment and Press with three fingers on the touch For safety reasons, always stop the telematics" section. screen to show all menu buttons. vehicle before performing operations Access to the rolling menu display.
that require sustained attention. Radio / Media
Some functions are not accessible while ► Press this button located on the side of the See "Audio equipment and driving. touch screen, then press the virtual buttons on telematics" section.. the touch screen. Climate Recommendations Access to the air conditioning settings. Settings for temperature, air flow, etc.
► Press this button located below the This screen is of the capacitive type. touch screen. Do not use pointed objects on the touch screen. Use the buttons arranged below the touch * The TomTom Traffic logo displayed on the map confirms the availability of connected navigation services. For more information, refer to the connected Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. screen to access the menus, then press the navigation section. virtual buttons on the touch screen. ** Depending on equipment.
26 Instruments
Principles For more information on Manual air Information banner(s) conditioning and Automatic dual-zone air 1 Some menus may display across two pages: Certain information is displayed permanently in conditioning, refer to the corresponding section. press the "OPTIONS" button to access the the touch screen banner(s). * second page. Connected Navigation See "Audio equipment and 7-inch touch screen upper banner If no action is performed on the second telematics" section. – Time and exterior temperature (a blue warning page, the first page is displayed Driving or Vehicle** lamp appears if there is a risk of ice). automatically. Activation, deactivation and – Reminder of the air conditioning information, settings for certain functions. and direct access to the corresponding menu. To deactivate/activate a function, select "OFF" The functions are organised in 2 tabs : "Driving – Reminder of the information in the or "ON". functions" and "Vehicle settings". Radio Media and Telephone menus. Configure a function. Telephone – Notifications. See "Audio equipment and – Access to the Settings for the touch screen Access additional information on the telematics" section.. and the digital instrument panel (date/time, function. Applications languages, units, etc.). Confirm. Access to certain configurable 10-inch HD touch screen side banners equipment. Return to the previous page or confirm. – Exterior temperature (a blue warning lamp Electric / Energy appears if there is a risk of ice). Access the specific Electric functions – Access to the Settings for the touch screen (energy flow, consumption statistics, deferred and the digital instrument panel (date/time, Menus charge) organised in the corresponding 3 tabs. languages, units, etc.). or Press with three fingers on the touch – Notifications. Settings screen to show all menu buttons. – Reminder of the air conditioning information, Main settings for the audio system, and direct access to the corresponding menu. Radio / Media touch screen and digital instrument panel. – Time. See "Audio equipment and Volume adjustment/mute. telematics" section.. See "Audio equipment and telematics" Electric / Energy menu Climate section. Settings for temperature, air flow, etc. Depending on version, this is accessible either:
* The TomTom Traffic logo displayed on the map confirms the availability of connected navigation services. For more information, refer to the connected navigation section. ** Depending on equipment.
27 Instruments
– directly, by pressing the button near the Activation Network coverage touch screen. ► Connect the vehicle to the desired charging In order to be able to use the various – via the Applications menu. equipment. remotely operable features, ensure that your ► Press this button within one minute to vehicle is located in an area covered by the mobile network.
activate the system (confirmed by the Energy flows A lack of network coverage may prevent – Blue bar chart: directly consumed energy charging indicator lamp coming on in blue). The Flow tab provides a real-time representation communication with the vehicle (for example, supplied by the traction battery. of the electric drive train’s operation. if it is in an underground car park). In such
– Green bar chart: energy recovered during Remotely operable cases, the application will display a message deceleration and braking, used to recharge the indicating that the connection with the vehicle battery. features (Electric)
could not be established. The average result for the current trip is stated in
kWh/100 km. ► You can change the displayed time scale by These features are accessible pressing the - or + buttons. using a smartphone, via the
Deferred charge MyPeugeot application: 1. Active driving mode By default, charging begins immediately when 2. Electric motor the nozzle is plugged in. The system can be – Battery charge management. 3. Traction battery charge level programmed to defer charging. – Programmed heating management. 4. Energy flows – Consumption, charge status and driving range Settings The energy flows have a specific colour for each statistics. ► In the Electric / Energy touch screen menu, type of driving: Installation procedure select the Charge tab. A. Blue: energy consumption ► Set the charging start time. ► Download the MyPeugeot app from the B. Green: energy recovery ► Press OK. appropriate online store for your smartphone. The settings are saved in the system. ► Create your user account. Consumption statistics You can also program the deferred charge ► Enter your vehicle’s VIN number (code The Statistics tab shows electrical energy function using a smartphone, via the beginning with "VF" on the vehicle registration consumption statistics. MyPeugeot application. document). For more information on Remotely operable For more information on Identification features, refer to the corresponding section. markings, refer to the corresponding section.
28 Instruments
Network coverage In order to be able to use the various 1 remotely operable features, ensure that your vehicle is located in an area covered by the mobile network. A lack of network coverage may prevent communication with the vehicle (for example, if it is in an underground car park). In such cases, the application will display a message indicating that the connection with the vehicle could not be established.
29 Access
Remote control / Key Integral key Opening the windows Depending on version, holding the The key built into the remote control can be unlocking button pressed for more than 3 used for the following operations, depending on Remote control function seconds opens the windows. version: The windows stop when the button is released. – Unlocking/Locking/Deadlocking the vehicle. – Activation/Deactivation of the manual child Selective unlocking of the boot lock. When selective unlocking of the boot is – Activation/Deactivation of the front passenger activated : airbag. ► Press this button to unlock the boot.
– Back-up Unlocking/Locking of the doors. The doors remain locked. – Switching on the ignition and starting/switching ► To eject the key or put it back in place, pull If selective unlocking of the boot is deactivated, off the engine. and hold the button. pressing this button also unlocks the doors. The remote control can be used for the following Without Keyless Entry and Starting
remote functions, depending on version: Unlocking the vehicle Do not forget to lock the boot again by – Unlocking / Locking / Deadlocking the vehicle. pressing the locking button. – Unlocking / Locking the boot. – Remote operation of lighting. – Folding / Unfolding the door mirrors. Selective unlocking (driver’s door, Locking the vehicle boot) is configured in the
– Activating / Deactivating the alarm. – Locating the vehicle. Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu. – Opening / Closing the windows. Complete unlocking – Activating the vehicle’s electronic immobiliser. Normal locking ► Press the unlocking button. Back-up procedures allow the vehicle to be ► Press the locking button. locked / unlocked in the event of a failure of the Selective unlocking Locking and alarm activation is confirmed by the remote control, the central locking, the battery, lighting of the direction indicators. ► To unfold or fold the key, press the button. Driver’s door and fuel/charging flap etc. For more information on the Back-up Depending on version, the door mirrors fold. With Keyless Entry and Starting ► Press the unlocking button. procedures, please refer to the corresponding section. ► Press it again to unlock the other doors and An access (door or boot) that is not the boot. properly closed prevents locking of the Complete or selective unlocking and alarm vehicle. However, if the vehicle is fitted with deactivation is confirmed by the flashing of the an alarm, it will be activated after 45 seconds. sidelamps and/or daytime running lamps. If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or boot Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold. are not subsequently opened, the vehicle
30 Access
Opening the windows will automatically lock itself again after about Locating the vehicle Depending on version, holding the 30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with an 2 This function helps you to spot your vehicle from unlocking button pressed for more than 3 alarm, it will also be reactivated automatically. a distance, with the vehicle locked: seconds opens the windows. – The direction indicators or sidelamps and/or The windows stop when the button is released. Deadlocking daytime running lamps, depending on version, flash for approximately 10 seconds.
Selective unlocking of the boot – The door mirror spotlamps come on. When selective unlocking of the boot is – The courtesy lamps come on. activated : ► Press the locking button again within ► Press this button. ► Press this button to unlock the boot. 3 seconds to deadlock the vehicle (confirmed by The doors remain locked. the temporary lighting of the direction indicators). If selective unlocking of the boot is deactivated, Deadlocking renders the interior door Remote lighting of the pressing this button also unlocks the doors. controls inoperative. It also deactivates lamps Do not forget to lock the boot again by the central locking button. Availability of this function depends on version. pressing the locking button. The horn remains operational. ► Press this button. The sidelamps, Never leave anyone inside the vehicle dipped beam headlamps, number plate when it is deadlocked. Locking the vehicle lamps and door mirror spotlamps come on for 30 Closing the windows seconds.
Holding the locking button pressed for Pressing again before the end of the timed more than 3 seconds closes the windows. period switches off the lamps immediately. Normal locking When closing the windows, ensure that Advice ► Press the locking button. no person or object could prevent their Locking and alarm activation is confirmed by the correct closure. Remote control lighting of the direction indicators. To leave the windows partly open on versions The remote control is a sensitive, high- Depending on version, the door mirrors fold. with alarm, you must first deactivate the frequency device; avoid handling it in your interior volumetric alarm protection. pocket, due to the risk of unintentionally An access (door or boot) that is not For more information on the , refer to unlocking the vehicle. properly closed prevents locking of the Alarm the corresponding section. Avoid pressing the remote control buttons vehicle. However, if the vehicle is fitted with while out of range of the vehicle, due to an alarm, it will be activated after 45 seconds. the risk of rendering the remote control If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or boot are not subsequently opened, the vehicle
31 Access
inoperative. It would then be necessary to Proximity Keyless Entry The automatic functions are configured functions are deactivated and the vehicle reset it. via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen locks. The remote control does not work when the and Start menu. To unlock the vehicle, use the remote control key is in the ignition switch, even when the This Keyless Entry and Starting system enables or press one of the handles. ignition is switched off. automatic vehicle locking/unlocking simply by Unlocking the vehicle
detection of the electronic key. Selective unlocking Anti-theft protection As long as the driver has the electronic key Driver’s door and fuel/charging flap Do not modify the electronic vehicle on their person, the vehicle unlocks as they They unlock: immobiliser, as this might result in approach and locks when they walk away. ► Either automatically when approaching the malfunctions. Key recognition zones:
driver’s door, if the automatic functions are For vehicles with a key ignition switch, activated. remember to remove the key and turn the ► Or by gently pressing the driver's door steering wheel to engage the steering lock. Selective unlocking (driver’s door, boot) is handle. ► Once inside the vehicle, to unlock all Locking the vehicle configured in the Driving/Vehicle touch screen menu. accesses, press the central locking button or pull Driving with the doors locked could make the opening control on any door. it more difficult for the emergency services to Selective unlocking is deactivated by default. enter the vehicle in an emergency. Complete unlocking Selective unlocking of the boot As a safety precaution, remove the key from The boot unlocks automatically as you approach the ignition or take the electronic key with you The vehicle (doors and boot) unlocks: ► Either automatically as the driver approaches the rear of the vehicle. when leaving the vehicle, even for a short ► Press the tailgate control to open the boot. in zone C, if the automatic functions are time. Zone A: welcome lighting on approaching activated. The doors remain locked. the vehicle (between 3 and 5 metres from the ► Or by gently pressing the driver's door handle Purchasing a second-hand vehicle vehicle). or boot button. Locking the vehicle Have the key codes memorised by a Zone B: automatic locking on leaving the vehicle Unlocking and alarm deactivation is confirmed PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the keys (about 2 metres from the vehicle). by the flashing of the sidelamps and/or daytime Normal locking in your possession are the only ones able to Zone C: automatic unlocking and welcome running lamps. start the vehicle. lighting on approaching the vehicle (between 1 Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold. and 2 metres from the vehicle). For more information on Welcome lighting, If the electronic key remains in zone B
please refer to the corresponding section. for more than 15 minutes without any With the doors and boot closed, the vehicle action on the vehicle doors, the automatic locks:
32 Access
functions are deactivated and the vehicle ► Either automatically, upon leaving zone B, if Never leave anyone inside the vehicle locks. the automatic functions are activated. when it is deadlocked. 2 To unlock the vehicle, use the remote control ► Or by gently pressing the driver's door or press one of the handles. handle. If one of the doors or the boot is still open Locking is confirmed by the lighting of the or if the electronic key for the Keyless direction indicators, and by an audible signal Selective unlocking Entry and Starting system has been left inside when the vehicle is locked upon walking away. the vehicle, central locking will be disabled. Driver’s door and fuel/charging flap It is not possible to lock the vehicle if the They unlock: electronic key is left inside the vehicle. ► Either automatically when approaching the If the vehicle is unlocked but the doors or driver’s door, if the automatic functions are For safety and theft protection reasons, boot are not subsequently opened, the activated. never leave the electronic key in the vehicle will automatically lock itself again after ► Or by gently pressing the driver's door vehicle, even when you are close to it. about 30 seconds. If the vehicle is fitted with handle. an alarm, it will also be reactivated automatically. ► Once inside the vehicle, to unlock all Deadlocking accesses, press the central locking button or pull the opening control on any door. The automatic door mirror folding/ unfolding function is configured via the
Selective unlocking of the boot touch screen’s Driving / Vehicle menu. The boot unlocks automatically as you approach the rear of the vehicle. As a safety measure, never leave the ► Press the tailgate control to open the boot. vehicle, even for a short time, without
The doors remain locked. taking the Keyless Entry and Starting ► Gently press the driver's door handle to lock system’s electronic key with you. the vehicle. Locking the vehicle Be aware of the risk of theft of the vehicle if ► Press it again within 3 seconds to deadlock the key is present in one of the defined areas the vehicle (confirmed by the temporary lighting Normal locking while the vehicle is unlocked.
of the direction indicators).
Deadlocking renders the interior door In order to preserve the battery in the controls inoperative. It also deactivates electronic key and the vehicle's battery: the central locking button. – The unlocking on approach function With the doors and boot closed, the vehicle The horn remains operational. (zone C) automatically goes into standby locks: after several days of non-use (approximately
33 Access
one week). To unlock the vehicle, use the Manual vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h), the locks remote control or press on one of the front will rebound and an alert will appear. ► Press this button to lock/unlock the vehicle door handles. At the next vehicle start, the (doors and boot) from inside the vehicle. automatic unlocking and locking functions will be reactivated. The central locking does not take place if Back-up procedures one of the doors is open. – After the welcome lighting is triggered ► Insert the key in the door lock. several times in succession without starting Lost keys, remote control, ► Turn the key towards the front/rear to unlock/ the vehicle, it will be deactivated. When locking/deadlocking from the lock the vehicle. – All of the "hands-free" functions go into outside electronic key ► Turn the key rearwards again within extended stand-by after 21 days of non-use. When the vehicle is locked or deadlocked Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's 3 seconds to deadlock the vehicle. To restore these functions, unlock the vehicle from the outside, the indicator lamp flashes registration certificate, a personal identification using the remote control and start the engine. and the button is inoperative. document and, if possible, the label bearing the If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will ► After normal locking, pull one of the key code. not be activated when locking with the key. Electrical interference interior door controls to unlock the vehicle. The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve the The electronic key may not operate if ► After deadlocking, it is necessary to use key code and the transponder code required to If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds close to certain electronic devices: telephone the remote control, Keyless Entry and Starting order a new key. when the door is opened; switch on the (switched on or on standby), laptop computer, or the integral key to unlock the vehicle. ignition to stop it. strong magnetic fields, etc. Complete unlocking/locking Automatic (anti-intrusion of the vehicle with the key Central locking not Use this procedure in the following situations: functioning Central locking security) – Remote control battery discharged. Use these procedures in the following cases: The doors and boot lock automatically when – Remote control malfunction. – Central locking malfunction. driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)). – Vehicle battery discharged. – Battery disconnected or discharged. To deactivate/reactivate this function (activated – Vehicle in an area subject to strong by default): electromagnetic interference. In the event of a malfunction of the ► Press the button until a confirmation In the first case, change the remote control central locking system, the battery must message appears. battery. be disconnected to ensure that the vehicle is Transporting long or bulky objects In the second case, reinitialise the remote locked fully. Press the central locking control to drive control. with the boot open and the doors locked. Refer to the corresponding sections. Driver's door Otherwise, every time the speed of the ► Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it.
34 Access
Passenger doors Without Keyless Entry and Starting Battery type: CR2032 / 3 volts. 2 Unlocking
► Pull the interior door opening control. Locking
► Insert the key in the door lock. ► Turn the key towards the front/rear to unlock/ lock the vehicle. ► Turn the key rearwards again within 3 seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
If the vehicle is fitted with an alarm, it will not be activated when locking with the
key. With Keyless Entry and Starting If the alarm is activated, the siren sounds Battery type: CR2032 / 3 volts.
when the door is opened; switch on the ignition to stop it. ► Open the doors. ► For the rear doors, check that the child lock Central locking not is not on. Refer to the corresponding section. functioning ► Remove the black cap, located on the edge Use these procedures in the following cases: of the door, using the key. – Central locking malfunction. ► Insert the key into the socket without forcing – Battery disconnected or discharged. it, then turn the latch towards the inside of the door. In the event of a malfunction of the ► Remove the key and refit the black cap.
central locking system, the battery must ► Close the doors and check from the outside be disconnected to ensure that the vehicle is ► Unclip the cover by inserting a small that the vehicle is locked. locked fully. screwdriver in the slot and raise the cover. Changing the battery ► Remove the discharged battery from its housing. Driver's door If the battery is discharged, this warning ► Insert the new battery, observing the polarity, lamp comes on, accompanied by an ► Turn the key towards the rear of the vehicle and clip the cover onto the housing. to lock it, or towards the front to unlock it. audible signal and the display of a message.
35 Access
► Reinitialise the remote control. ► Switch off the ignition and remove the key Doors Boot For more information on Reinitialising the from the switch. remote control, refer to the corresponding The remote control is now fully operational section. again. Opening Opening ► After unlocking the vehicle or just the boot, Do not throw remote control batteries With Keyless Entry and Starting From outside press the opening control and then raise the away, as they contain metals that are ► After unlocking the vehicle or with the tailgate. harmful to the environment. Take them to an Keyless Entry and Starting electronic key in the approved disposal point. recognition zone, pull the door handle. Closing ► Lower the tailgate using one of the interior Reinitialising the remote From inside grab handles. ► Pull the interior opening control of a door; this If the tailgate is not properly closed, this control unlocks the vehicle completely. warning lamp comes on accompanied by Following replacement of the battery or in a message, if the engine is running, and an With selective unlocking activated: the event of a fault, it may be necessary to audible signal, if the vehicle is travelling at more – Opening the driver's door unlocks reinitialise the remote control. than 6 mph (10 km/h). the driver's door only (if the vehicle has not Without Keyless Entry and Starting already been completely unlocked). In the event of a malfunction or if you
– Opening one of the passenger doors experience difficulty opening or closing ► Insert the mechanical key (integral with the unlocks the rest of the vehicle. the tailgate, have it checked by a PEUGEOT remote control) in the lock to open the vehicle. dealer or a qualified workshop without delay, ► Place the electronic key against the back-up to avoid the issue deteriorating and prevent reader on the steering column and hold it there Closing any risk of the tailgate dropping, potentially until the ignition is switched on. If a door is not properly closed, this causing serious injury. ► Switch on the ignition by pressing the warning lamp comes on accompanied by "START/STOP" button. a message if the engine is running, and an ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever audible signal when the vehicle is travelling at Back-up release in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. more than 6 mph (10 km/h). To manually unlock the boot in the event of a ► With an automatic gearbox or drive battery or central locking failure.
selector, while in mode P, depress the brake ► Switch off the ignition. pedal. Unlocking ► Return the key to position 2 (Ignition on). If the fault persists after reinitialisation, contact ► Fold the rear seats to gain access to the lock ► Immediately press the closed padlock button a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop from inside the boot. for a few seconds. without delay.
36 Access
Boot System which protects and provides a deterrent against theft and break-ins. 2 Opening Exterior perimeter monitoring ► After unlocking the vehicle or just the boot, The system checks for opening of the vehicle. press the opening control and then raise the The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a tailgate. door, the boot or the bonnet, for example.
Interior volumetric monitoring ► Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the Closing The system checks for any variation in volume in lock to unlock the boot. ► Lower the tailgate using one of the interior the passenger compartment. ► Move the latch to the left. grab handles. The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a If the tailgate is not properly closed, this Locking after closing window, enters the passenger compartment or warning lamp comes on accompanied by moves inside the vehicle. a message, if the engine is running, and an If the fault persists after closing again, the boot Self-protection function audible signal, if the vehicle is travelling at more will remain locked. The system checks for the putting out of service than 6 mph (10 km/h). In the event of a fault with the central of its components. locking system, it is essential to In the event of a malfunction or if you The alarm is triggered if the battery, the central disconnect the battery to lock the boot and so experience difficulty opening or closing control or the siren wiring is put out of service or ensure complete locking of the vehicle. the tailgate, have it checked by a PEUGEOT damaged. dealer or a qualified workshop without delay, to avoid the issue deteriorating and prevent For all work on the alarm system, contact any risk of the tailgate dropping, potentially Alarm a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. causing serious injury. (Depending on version)
Back-up release Locking the vehicle with full
To manually unlock the boot in the event of a alarm system
battery or central locking failure. Activation Unlocking ► Switch off the ignition and exit the vehicle. ► Fold the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot.
37 Access
► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the sidelamps and/or the daytime running lamps Only exterior perimeter monitoring is activated; Failure of the remote control remote control or by pressing on the driver's flash for about 2 seconds. the red indicator lamp in the button flashes every To deactivate the monitoring functions: door handle. second. After unlocking using the remote ► Unlock the vehicle using the key in the When the monitoring system is active, the red To take effect, this deactivation must be control driver's door lock. indicator lamp in the button flashes once per performed whenever the ignition is switched If the vehicle automatically locks itself again ► Open the door; the alarm is triggered. second and the direction indicators come on for off. (as happens if a door or the boot is not ► Switch on the ignition; this stops the alarm. about 2 seconds. opened within 30 seconds of unlocking), the The indicator lamp in the button goes off. The exterior perimeter monitoring is activated Reactivating interior volumetric monitoring system is automatically activated. after 5 seconds and the interior volumetric monitoring Locking the vehicle without monitoring after 45 seconds. ► Deactivate exterior perimeter monitoring by unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or activating the alarm The alarm does not activate when Locking the vehicle the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system. ► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key locking automatically from a distance. with exterior perimeter The indicator lamp in the button goes off. (integral to the remote control) in the driver's monitoring only ► Reactivate the full alarm system by locking door lock. If an opening (door, boot or bonnet) is not Disable volumetric monitoring to avoid unwanted the vehicle using the remote control or by properly closed, the vehicle is not locked, alarm triggering in certain cases, such as: pressing the driver’s door handle. Malfunction but the exterior perimeter monitoring will be – Slightly open window. The red indicator lamp in the button once again When the ignition is switched on, fixed activated after 45 seconds, at the same time – Washing the vehicle. flashes every second. illumination of the red indicator lamp in the as the interior volumetric monitoring. – Changing a wheel. button indicates a malfunction of the system. – Towing your vehicle. Triggering of the alarm Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a Deactivation – Transport on a ship or ferry. This is indicated by sounding of the siren qualified workshop. ► Press one of the remote control unlocking and flashing of the direction indicators for 30 Deactivating interior volumetric buttons: seconds. Automatic activation short press monitoring Depending on the country of sale, certain (Depending on country of sale) ► Switch off the ignition and within 10 seconds monitoring functions remain active until the alarm The system is activated automatically 2 minutes long press press the alarm button until the indicator lamp is has been triggered eleven times consecutively. after the last door or the boot is closed. on fixed. When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote ► To avoid triggering the alarm on entering the or ► Exit the vehicle. control or the Keyless Entry and Starting system, vehicle, first press the unlocking button on the ► Unlock the vehicle by pressing the driver’s ► Immediately lock the vehicle using the remote rapid flashing of the red indicator lamp in the remote control or unlock the vehicle using the door handle. control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" button informs you that the alarm was triggered “Keyless Entry and Starting” system. The monitoring system is deactivated: the system. during your absence. When the ignition is indicator lamp in the button goes off and the switched on, this flashing stops.
38 Access
Failure of the remote control Electric windows Operating the switch again stops the movement of the window. 2 To deactivate the monitoring functions: ► Unlock the vehicle using the key in the Window controls remain operational for driver's door lock. approximately 45 seconds after switching ► Open the door; the alarm is triggered. off the ignition or after locking the vehicle. ► Switch on the ignition; this stops the alarm. After that time, the controls are disabled. The indicator lamp in the button goes off. To reactivate them, switch on the ignition or 1. Left-hand front unlock the vehicle. Locking the vehicle without 2. Right-hand front 3. Right-hand rear (depending on version) Anti-pinch activating the alarm 4. Left-hand rear (depending on version) (Depending on version) ► Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key 5. Deactivation of the electric window controls If the window meets an obstacle while rising, it (integral to the remote control) in the driver's located by the rear seats (depending on stops and immediately partially lowers again. door lock. version) Locking the rear doors - Electric child lock Malfunction (depending on version) Deactivating the rear When the ignition is switched on, fixed For more information on the , controls for the rear electric illumination of the red indicator lamp in the Electric child lock refer to the corresponding section. windows
button indicates a malfunction of the system. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Manual operation ► To open/close the window, press/pull the Automatic activation switch without passing the point of resistance; the window stops as soon as the switch is (Depending on country of sale) released. The system is activated automatically 2 minutes For your children's safety, press control 5 to after the last door or the boot is closed. deactivate the controls for the rear electric ► To avoid triggering the alarm on entering the Automatic operation windows, irrespective of their positions. vehicle, first press the unlocking button on the (Depending on version) The red indicator lamp in the button comes remote control or unlock the vehicle using the ► To open/close the window, press/pull the on and a confirmation message is displayed. “Keyless Entry and Starting” system. switch past its resistance point: the window opens/closes completely when the switch is The lamp will remain lit until the controls are released. reactivated.
39 Access
The rear electric windows can still be controlled Be particularly aware of children when using the driver's controls. operating the windows. Be aware of passengers and/or other persons In the event of a serious impact, use of present when closing the windows using the rear electric window controls is the electronic key or the "Keyless Entry and re-enabled, if they had been deactivated. Starting" system. Reinitialising the electric windows Following reconnection of the battery, or if the windows move abnormally, the anti-pinch function must be reinitialised. The safety anti-pinch function is not active during these operations. For each of the windows: ► Lower the window fully, then raise it; it will rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the control is pressed. Repeat the operation until the window is fully closed. ► Continue to pull the switch for at least one second after reaching the window closed position.
If an electric window meets an obstacle during operation, the movement of the window must be reversed. To do this, press the switch concerned. When the driver operates the passengers’ electric window switches, it is important to ensure that nothing can prevent the window from closing properly. It is important to ensure that the passengers use the electric windows correctly.
40 Ease of use and comfort
PEUGEOT i-Cockpit Before moving the seat backwards, Removing a head restraint
ensure that there is no person or object ► Pull the head restraint fully up. 3 that might prevent the full travel of the seat. ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint There is a risk of trapping or pinching and remove it completely. passengers if present in the rear seats or of ► Stow the head restraint securely. jamming the seat if large objects are placed on the floor behind the seat. Refitting a head restraint ► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides in the corresponding seat backrest. Front seats ► Push the head restraint down as far as it will go. Front head restraints ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint and push it down. Before taking to the road and to make the Height adjustment ► Adjust the height of the head restraint.
most of the ergonomic layout of the PEUGEOT i-Cockpit, carry out these adjustments in the Never drive with the head restraints following order: removed; they should be in place and – head restraint height. adjusted for the occupant of the seat. – seat backrest angle. – seat cushion height. Manually-adjustable seats – longitudinal seat position. – steering wheel depth and then height. Longitudinal
– rear view mirror and door mirrors.
Once these adjustments have been made, check that the "head up" ► Upwards: pull the head restraint up to the instrument panel can be viewed correctly over desired position; the head restraint can be felt to the smaller diameter steering wheel. click into position. ► Downwards: press lug A to lower the head restraint. ► Raise the control bar and slide the seat The adjustment is correct when the forwards or backwards. upper edge of the head restraint is level with the top of the head.
41 Ease of use and comfort
Backrest angle Backrest angle Massage function (Driver’s seat only)
The function is active only with the engine running.
► Turn the knob to adjust the backrest. ► Tilt the control forwards or rearwards. On/Off
► Press the button corresponding to your seat. This function provides lumbar massage; it only Height Cushion height and angle ► Each press changes the heating level; the operates when the engine is running as well as corresponding number of indicator lamps come in STOP mode of the Stop & Start system. on. Activation/Deactivation ► To stop heating, press the button again until all the indicator lamps are off. ► Press this button to activate/deactivate The system status is memorised when the the function. ignition is switched off. Upon activation, the indicator lamp comes on. ► Pull the control upwards to raise the seat or ► Tilt the rear of the control upwards or The massage function is activated for a period Do not use the function when the seat push it downwards to lower it until the desired downwards to obtain the required height and of one hour. is not occupied. position is obtained. angle. During this time, massage is performed in Reduce the heating intensity as soon as 6 cycles of 10 minutes (6 minutes of massage possible. Electrically-adjustable seats Comfort functions followed by a 4-minute break). When the seat and passenger compartment After one hour, the function is deactivated; the have reached a satisfactory temperature, Longitudinal Electric lumbar adjustment indicator lamp goes off. switch the function off; reducing electricity
consumption in turn decreases fuel Heated seats consumption.
► Push the control forwards or rearwards to ► Press the + or - control to obtain the desired slide the seat. lumbar support.
42 Ease of use and comfort
Prolonged use of the heated seats is not As a safety measure, these adjustments recommended for those with sensitive must only be carried out with the vehicle 3 skin. stationary. There is a risk of burns for people whose perception of heat is impaired (illness, taking The function is active only with the engine medication, etc.). Mirrors running. To keep the heated pad intact and to prevent On/Off a short circuit: – do not place sharp or heavy objects on the Door mirrors ► Press the button corresponding to your seat. seat, As a safety measure, the mirrors should ► Each press changes the heating level; the – do not kneel or stand on the seat, be adjusted to reduce the "blind spots". corresponding number of indicator lamps come – do not spill liquids onto the seat, The objects that you see in the mirrors are on. – never use the heating function if the seat in fact closer than they appear. Take this ► To stop heating, press the button again until is wet. into account in order to correctly judge the all the indicator lamps are off. distance of vehicles approaching from behind. The system status is memorised when the ignition is switched off. Steering wheel Do not use the function when the seat Manual adjustment is not occupied. adjustment ► Move the adjustment lever in any of the four
Reduce the heating intensity as soon as directions to position the mirror. possible. When the seat and passenger compartment Electric adjustment
have reached a satisfactory temperature, switch the function off; reducing electricity consumption in turn decreases fuel consumption.
► When stationary, pull the control to release the steering wheel. ► Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving position. ► Push the control lever to lock the steering wheel.
43 Ease of use and comfort
► Move control A to the right or to the left to Demisting/Defrosting Automatic "electrochrome" model Rear head restraints
select the corresponding mirror. If the vehicle is so equipped, demisting/ ► Move control B in any of the four directions defrosting of the heated door mirrors is to adjust. performed when the heated rear screen is ► Return control A to its central position. switched on. For more information on Rear screen Manual folding demisting/defrosting, refer to the
The mirrors can be folded manually (parking corresponding section. obstruction, narrow garage, etc.). ► Turn the mirror towards the vehicle. Interior rear view mirror Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which Electric folding darkens the mirror glass and reduces the They have two positions: If the vehicle is so equipped, the mirrors can nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, be folded electrically from the inside, with the – A high position, for when the seat is in use:
headlamps of other vehicles, etc. vehicle parked and the ignition on: ► Pull the head restraint fully up. This system automatically and progressively Manual model – A low position, for stowing, when the seat is ► Place control A in the centre transitions between day and night modes, using not in use: position. Day/night position a sensor that measures the light entering from ► Press the lug A to release the head ► Pull control A back. the rear of the vehicle. restraint and push it down. To ensure optimum visibility during your The rear head restraints can be removed. ► Lock the vehicle from the outside. manoeuvres, the mirror lightens Removing a head restraint automatically when reverse gear is engaged. Electric unfolding ► Release the backrest using control 1. ► Tilt the backrest slightly forwards. ► From outside: unlock the vehicle.
► Pull the head restraint fully up. ► From inside: with the ignition on, place Rear bench seat ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint control A in the central position and then pull it ► Pull the lever to change to the anti-dazzle and remove it completely. rearwards. "night” position. Bench seat with fixed cushions and split folding ► Push the lever to change to the normal "day" backrests (2/3-1/3) to adapt the boot load space. Refitting a head restraint The automatic door mirror folding/ position. ► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides unfolding function is configured via the Adjustment in the corresponding seat backrest. Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. ► Set the mirror to the normal “day” position. ► Push the head restraint down as far as it will go.
44 Ease of use and comfort
Rear head restraints ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint and push it down. 3 Never drive with passengers seated at the rear when the head restraints are removed; the head restraints should be in place and in the high position. The head restraint for the centre seat and those for the outer seats are not
interchangeable. ► Press the backrest release grip 1.
Folding the backrests ► Guide backrest 2 down to the horizontal They have two positions: position. – A , for when the seat is in use: high position Manoeuvring the seat backrests should When the backrest is released, the red ► Pull the head restraint fully up. only be done when the vehicle is indicator is visible in the release grip. – A low position, for stowing, when the seat is stationary. not in use: ► Press the lug A to release the head First steps: Repositioning the backrests restraint and push it down. ► Lower the head restraints. The rear head restraints can be removed. ► If necessary, move the front seats forward. First check that the outer seat belts are ► Check that no person or object will interfere lying vertically flat alongside the backrest Removing a head restraint with folding down the backrests (clothing, latching rings. ► Release the backrest using control 1. luggage, etc.). ► Tilt the backrest slightly forwards. ► Check that the seat belts are free, not ► Pull the head restraint fully up. engaged in the buckles. Release them so that ► Press the lug A to release the head restraint the backrest can be moved. and remove it completely. Refitting a head restraint ► Insert the head restraint rods into the guides in the corresponding seat backrest. ► Push the head restraint down as far as it will go.
45 Ease of use and comfort
Controls air outlets and the air extractor in the boot water underneath the vehicle. This is perfectly Depending on version, the controls are free from obstructions. normal. accessible in the "Air conditioning" touch ► Do not cover the sunshine sensor located screen menu or are grouped together in the on the dashboard; this sensor is used to Servicing the ventilation and air control panel on the centre console. regulate the automatic air conditioning conditioning system system. Air distribution ► Ensure that the passenger compartment ► Operate the air conditioning system for at
filter is in good condition and have the filter least 5 to 10 minutes once or twice a month to elements replaced regularly. keep it in perfect working order. We recommend using a composite passenger ► If the system does not produce cold air, compartment filter. Thanks to its special active
switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT dealer additive, this type of filter helps to purify the ► Put the backrest 2 in the upright position and or a qualified workshop. push it firmly to latch it home. air breathed by the occupants and keep the When towing the maximum load on a steep ► Check that the red indicator is no longer passenger compartment clean (by reducing gradient in high temperatures, switching off allergic symptoms, unpleasant odours and visible in the release grip 1. the air conditioning increases the available ► Ensure that the outer seat belts were not greasy deposits). engine power, enhancing the towing capacity. trapped during the operation. ► To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, have it checked
Please note: an incorrectly latched Avoid driving for too long with the according to the recommendations in the backrest compromises the safety of 1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents ventilation off or with prolonged operation Maintenance and Warranty Guide. passengers in the event of sudden braking or 2. Front side window demisting/defrosting vents of interior air recirculation. Risk of misting and an accident. 3. Adjustable and closable side air vents deterioration of the air quality! Stop & Start The contents of the boot may be thrown 4. Adjustable and closable central air vents The heating and air conditioning systems forward - risk of serious injury! 5. Air outlets to the front footwells If the interior temperature is very high only operate when the engine is running. 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells (depending on after the vehicle has stood for a long Temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start version) time in the sunshine, air the passenger system to maintain a comfortable temperature Heating and Ventilation compartment for a few moments. in the passenger compartment. Put the air flow control at a setting high For more information on the Stop & Start, Air intake Advice enough to quickly change the air in the refer to the corresponding section. The air circulating in the passenger compartment Using the ventilation and air passenger compartment. is filtered and originates either from the conditioning system exterior, via the grille located at the base of the ► To ensure that air is distributed evenly, Condensation created by the air windscreen, or from the inside in air recirculation keep the external air intake grilles at the base conditioning results in a discharge of mode. of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents, the
46 Ease of use and comfort water underneath the vehicle. This is perfectly Manual air conditioning Temperature adjustment normal. 3 Press the Climate button to display the ► Press one of the buttons 1 (- or +) to adjust system controls page. the temperature to your liking. Servicing the ventilation and air conditioning system Air flow adjustment ► Ensure that the passenger compartment ► Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) or turn the filter is in good condition and have the filter knob 2 to decrease or increase the speed of the elements replaced regularly. fan. We recommend using a composite passenger When the air flow is reduced to a minimum, compartment filter. Thanks to its special active ventilation stops. additive, this type of filter helps to purify the air breathed by the occupants and keep the
Air distribution adjustment passenger compartment clean (by reducing With 5-inch touch screen ► Press button 3 to adjust the air flow allergic symptoms, unpleasant odours and distribution inside the passenger compartment. greasy deposits). Central and side air vents, footwells ► To ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, have it checked Central and side air vents according to the recommendations in the Maintenance and Warranty Guide. Windscreen
Stop & Start Windscreen, footwells The heating and air conditioning systems only operate when the engine is running. Footwells Temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start system to maintain a comfortable temperature With 7-inch or 10-inch touch screen in the passenger compartment. 1. Temperature adjustment Air conditioning on / off 2. Air flow adjustment For more information on the Stop & Start, The air conditioning system is designed to 3. Air distribution adjustment refer to the corresponding section. operate effectively in all seasons, with the 4. Air conditioning on/off windows closed. It is used to: – lower the temperature in summer,
47 Ease of use and comfort
– increase the effectiveness of the demisting in Temperature adjustment Air conditioning on / off winter, above 3°C. ► Press one of the buttons 1 to increase (red) The air conditioning system is designed to ► Press button to activate/deactivate the air 4 or decrease (blue) the value. operate effectively in all seasons, with the conditioning system. The value displayed corresponds to a level of windows closed. Air conditioning does not operate when comfort and not to a precise temperature. It is used to: the air flow is disabled. – lower the temperature in summer, To obtain cool air more quickly, enable interior Air flow adjustment – increase the effectiveness of the demisting in air recirculation for a brief period. Then return ► Press one of the buttons 2 (- or +) to winter, above 3°C. to the intake of exterior air. decrease or increase the speed of the air ► Press button 4 to activate/deactivate the air
Switching off the air conditioning may result in booster fan. conditioning system. some discomfort (humidity or misting). The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in Air conditioning does not operate when progressively as the speed of the fan is the air flow is disabled. increased. To obtain cool air more quickly, enable interior When the air flow is reduced to a minimum, Automatic air conditioning air recirculation for a brief period. Then return ventilation stops. This system automatically controls the activation to the intake of exterior air. "OFF" is displayed alongside the fan. of the air conditioning system, regulating the Switching off the air conditioning may result in temperature, air flow and air distribution inside Air distribution adjustment some discomfort (humidity or misting). the passenger compartment. ► Press the buttons 3 to adjust the air flow The air conditioning operates with the engine distribution inside the passenger compartment. Automatic Comfort running, but the ventilation and its controls can Windscreen and side windows be accessed with the ignition on. 1. Temperature adjustment programme Press the Climate menu button to access 2. Air flow adjustment This automatic mode ensures optimum Central and side air vents the system controls. 3. Air distribution adjustment management of the passenger compartment
4. Air conditioning on/off temperature, air flow and air distribution, based Footwells 5. Automatic Comfort programme on/off on the selected comfort level. 6. System switch-off (depending on version) ► Press button 5 to activate or deactivate the The lighting of the button indicates that air is 7. Access to the secondary page air conditioning system’s automatic mode . being blown in the specified direction. 8. Automatic Comfort programme settings (Soft/ The indicator lamp in the button lights up It is possible to activate all three buttons Normal/Fast) when the air conditioning system is operating simultaneously, for uniform distribution 9. Programmed heating (Electric) automatically. throughout the passenger compartment.
48 Ease of use and comfort
Air conditioning on / off You can adjust the intensity of the Interior air recirculation automatic Comfort programme by using the 3 The air conditioning system is designed to " " button to select a profile: The intake of exterior air prevents the formation operate effectively in all seasons, with the OPTIONS – " ": provides soft and quiet operation by of mist on the windscreen and side windows. windows closed. Soft limiting air flow. Recirculating the interior air isolates the It is used to: – " ": offers the best compromise passenger compartment from outside odours – lower the temperature in summer, Normal between a comfortable temperature and quiet and fumes and allows the desired passenger – increase the effectiveness of the demisting in operation (default setting). compartment temperature to be achieved more winter, above 3°C. – "Fast": provides strong and effective air flow. rapidly. ► Press button 4 to activate/deactivate the air To change the current profile (shown by the ► Press this button to activate/deactivate conditioning system. corresponding indicator lamp), press button 8 the function (confirmed by the Air conditioning does not operate when repeatedly until the desired profile is displayed: illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). the air flow is disabled. The "Normal" or "Fast" profiles are the most The function is activated automatically To obtain cool air more quickly, enable interior comfortable for passengers in the rear seats. when reverse gear is engaged. air recirculation for a brief period. Then return This profile setting is associated with automatic to the intake of exterior air. mode only. However, on deactivation of the Switching off the air conditioning may result in AUTO mode, the indicator lamp for the most Maximum air conditioning some discomfort (humidity or misting). recently selected profile remains on. Changing the profile setting does not reactivate This function automatically adjusts the AUTO mode if it was deactivated. temperature setting to the lowest possible, the Automatic Comfort air distribution towards the central and side air programme In cold weather with the engine cold, the vents, the air flow to maximum and, if necessary, air flow is increased gradually until the This automatic mode ensures optimum activates interior air recirculation. comfort setting has been reached, in order to management of the passenger compartment ► Press this button to activate/deactivate limit the delivery of cold air into the passenger temperature, air flow and air distribution, based the function (confirmed by the compartment. on the selected comfort level. illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). On entering the vehicle, if the interior ► Press button to activate or deactivate the Once the function is deactivated, the system 5 temperature is much colder or warmer than air conditioning system’s automatic mode . returns to the previous settings. the comfort setting requested, there is no The indicator lamp in the button lights up need to alter the value displayed to more when the air conditioning system is operating quickly reach the required level of comfort. System switch-off
automatically. The system automatically corrects the
/ temperature difference as quickly as possible.
49 Ease of use and comfort
► Depending on version, press this button or With Stop & Start, when demisting has On/Off as reducing the consumption of electrical switch. been activated, STOP mode is not current reduces fuel consumption. Its indicator lamp comes on the other indicator available. lamps for the system go off.
This action deactivates all functions of the air In wintry conditions, remove all snow or Programmed heating conditioning system. ice on the windscreen near the camera The temperature is no longer regulated. A slight before moving off. (Electric) flow of air can still be felt, due to the forward Otherwise, the operation of the equipment This function allows you to programme the movement of the vehicle. associated with the camera may be affected. vehicle to adjust the passenger compartment
temperature to a pre-defined, non-modifiable ► With the engine running, press this button to temperature (approx. 21°C) before you enter the Front demisting activate/deactivate the function (confirmed by an vehicle, on the days and times of your choice. Heated windscreen indicator lamp). - defrosting The function is activated when the exterior temperature drops below 0°C. It is deactivated Programming Automatic Visibility automatically when the engine is switched off. (With PEUGEOT Connect Nav) In the Climate > OPTIONS menu: programme Select Temperature conditioning. This mode allows the windscreen and side Rear screen demisting/ windows to be demisted or defrosted as quickly defrosting ► Press + to programme. as possible. ► Select the time of entry into the vehicle and ► Press this button to activate/deactivate Demisting/defrosting only operates with the the desired days. Press OK.
the mode (confirmed by the illumination/ engine running. ► Press ON to activate this programming. In cold weather, this system heats the bottom of extinction of the indicator lamp). Depending on version, this also applies to the Heating begins approximately 45 minutes before the windscreen, as well as the area alongside The programme automatically manages the air door mirrors. the programmed time, and is maintained for 10 the left-hand windscreen pillar. conditioning (depending on version), air flow ► Press this button to activate/deactivate minutes afterwards. and air intake, and provides optimum distribution Without changing the settings for the air the function (confirmed by the towards the windscreen and side windows. conditioning system, it allows faster release illumination/extinction of the indicator lamp). You can define multiple programmings. It is possible to manually change the air flow of the windscreen wiper blades when they are Demisting/defrosting switches off automatically Each one is saved in the system. without deactivating the automatic Visibility frozen to the windscreen and helps to prevent to prevent an excessive consumption of To optimise battery life, we recommend programme. the accumulation of snow resulting from the electrical current. programming with the vehicle plugged in. operation of the windscreen wipers. Switch off demisting/defrosting as soon as you no longer consider it necessary,
50 Ease of use and comfort
as reducing the consumption of electrical This feature can be programmed using a Interior fittings
current reduces fuel consumption. smartphone, via the 3 MyPeugeot application. With PEUGEOT Connect Radio, the feature can Programmed heating only be programmed using a smartphone, via the application. (Electric) For more information on Remotely operable This function allows you to programme the features, refer to the corresponding section. vehicle to adjust the passenger compartment temperature to a pre-defined, non-modifiable Conditions for operation temperature (approx. 21°C) before you enter the – Programmed heating is only activated with the vehicle, on the days and times of your choice. ignition off and the vehicle locked. – The heating is not activated if the battery Programming charge level is below 50%. (With PEUGEOT Connect Nav) – If recurrent programming is activated (e.g. In the Climate > OPTIONS menu: from Monday to Friday) and two successive 1. Grab handle Select Temperature conditioning. heating sequences are performed without the 2. Sun visor vehicle being used, the programming will be 3. Glove box ► Press + to programme. deactivated. 4. Door pockets ► Select the time of entry into the vehicle and 5. Storage compartment or Storage the desired days. Press OK. compartment with flap or Wireless ► Press ON to activate this programming. smartphone charger with flap (depending on Heating begins approximately 45 minutes before version) the programmed time, and is maintained for 10 ► Press the top centre of the flap to open it. minutes afterwards. 6. Storage compartment with 12 V accessory socket. You can define multiple programmings. 7. Cup holder Each one is saved in the system. 8. Centre armrest with storage compartment To optimise battery life, we recommend Rear USB socket(s) (depending on version) programming with the vehicle plugged in.
51 Ease of use and comfort
Sun visor These applications can be managed using the causing faults such as poor radio reception or ► With the charging area clear, place a device steering mounted controls or the audio system interference with displays in the screens. in its centre. ► With the ignition on, raise the concealing flap; controls. the mirror is illuminated automatically. The system is not designed to charge This sun visor is also equipped with a ticket When the USB port is used, the portable Wireless smartphone multiple devices simultaneously. holder. device charges automatically. charger
A message is displayed if the power drawn Glove box by the portable device exceeds the current
► To open the glove box, raise the handle. supplied by the vehicle.
The glove box is lit when open. For more information on how to use this
Do not leave any metal objects (coins, equipment, refer to the Audio equipment Never drive with the glove box open keys, vehicle remote control, etc.) in the and telematics section . when a passenger is at the front. It may charging area while a device is being cause injury during sharp deceleration! charged, due to the risk of overheating or 12 V accessory socket interrupting the charging process.
USB sockets It allows wireless charging of a portable device
such as a smartphone, using the magnetic Mats induction principle, in accordance with the Qi 1.1
standard. Fitting
The portable device to be charged must be compatible with the Qi standard, either by design or by using a compatible holder or shell. The charging area is identified by the Qi symbol.
► Always use the correct adapter to connect a The charger works with the engine running and They allow the connection of a portable device in 12 V accessory (max. power: 120 W). with the Stop & Start system in STOP mode. order to recharge it. Observe the maximum power rating to Charging is managed by the smartphone. The front right USB port avoid damaging your accessory. With Keyless Entry and Starting, the charger’s also allows a smartphone to operation may be briefly disrupted when a door be connected by MirrorLinkTM, Android Auto® or is opened or the ignition is switched off. CarPlay®, enabling certain smartphone The connection of an electrical device
not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a applications to be used on the touch screen. Charging For best results, use a cable made or approved USB charger, may adversely affect the When fitting the mat for the first time, on the ► Open the flap to access the charging area. by the device manufacturer. operation of vehicle electrical systems, driver's side use only the fasteners supplied in the enclosed sachet.
52 Ease of use and comfort
► With the charging area clear, place a device The other mats are simply laid over the carpet. Courtesy lamps in its centre. 3 Removing/refitting The system is not designed to charge ► To remove it on the driver's side, move the Non-touch version with bulb multiple devices simultaneously. seat backwards and unclip the fasteners. ► To refit it, position the mat and secure it by pressing. ► Check that the mat is secured correctly.
To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: Do not leave any metal objects (coins, – Only use mats which are suitable for keys, vehicle remote control, etc.) in the the fasteners already present in the vehicle; charging area while a device is being these fasteners must be used. charged, due to the risk of overheating or 1. Front courtesy lamp – Never fit one mat on top of another. interrupting the charging process. 2. Front map reading lamps (depending on The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT version) may interfere with access to the pedals and Mats hinder the operation of the cruise control/ speed limiter. Front courtesy lamp Fitting The approved mats have two fasteners In this position, the courtesy lamp comes located underneath the seat. on gradually: – when the vehicle is unlocked. – when the key is removed from the ignition switch. – when a door is opened. – when the remote control locking button is activated, in order to locate the vehicle. It switches off gradually: – when the vehicle is locked. – when the ignition is switched on. – 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Permanently off. When fitting the mat for the first time, on the driver's side use only the fasteners supplied in the enclosed sachet.
53 Ease of use and comfort
Permanent lighting. Interior ambient lighting Advice on care To preserve the properties of the glazed roof, In "Permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time Soft passenger compartment lighting improves wipe and dry-clean the inner glass using a clean, varies according to the circumstances: visibility in the vehicle in low-light conditions. soft cloth. – With the ignition off, approximately 10 minutes. At night, the ambient lighting comes on/goes off For stubborn stains, clean the glass using – In energy saving mode, approximately 30 automatically when the sidelamps are switched screenwash fluid, rinse with clean water, then dry seconds. on/off. with a clean, soft cloth. – With the engine running, unlimited. You can activate/deactivate this function, adjust the brightness and Never use soapy water, abrasive Map reading lamps 3. Rear touch-sensitive reading lamps select a colour in the Driving / Vehicle touch products, petrol, solvents or detergents ► With the ignition on, operate the screen menu. (particularly ammonia-based or strongly corresponding switch. Front touch-sensitive courtesy lamp alcoholic products). It comes on gradually: Take care not to place anything in Panoramic glass sunroof – when the vehicle is unlocked. contact with the courtesy lamps. It has a tinted glass panoramic surface to – when the ignition is switched off. increase brightness and vision inside the vehicle. Boot fittings – when a door is opened. It is equipped with a manual blind which helps to – when the remote control locking button is Touch version with LED maintain a comfortable temperature and reduce activated, in order to locate the vehicle. the noise. It switches off: – when the vehicle is locked. Opening/closing the blind
– when the ignition is switched on. – 30 seconds after the last door is closed. The front and rear touch-sensitive reading lamps come on and go off at the same time as the courtesy lamp. 1. Front touch-sensitive courtesy lamp A long press on the courtesy lamp completely 2. Front touch-sensitive reading lamps deactivates it from coming on (confirmed by the "OFF" symbol).
Touch-sensitive reading lamps
► To open/close the blind, take it by its handle ► With the ignition on, press the corresponding 1. Load space cover and pull it backwards/forwards to the required reading lamp. 2. Boot lamp position.
54 Ease of use and comfort
Advice on care 3. Bag hook – in energy economy mode, approximately 30 seconds. 3 To preserve the properties of the glazed roof, 4. Luggage retaining strap – with the engine running, unlimited. wipe and dry-clean the inner glass using a clean, 5. Stowing rings soft cloth. 6. Boot mat For stubborn stains, clean the glass using 7. Tool kit (depending on equipment) Rear shelf (Van)
screenwash fluid, rinse with clean water, then dry 8. Storage well with a clean, soft cloth. The stowing rings are designed to secure Never use soapy water, abrasive luggage using different types of retaining products, petrol, solvents or detergents nets. (particularly ammonia-based or strongly These retaining nets are available as an alcoholic products). accessory. For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer. Boot fittings
Storage well ► Fully raise the boot carpet to access the The rear shelf supplements the existing shelf to storage well. conceal the interior of the vehicle. Depending on version, it includes: – A temporary puncture repair kit with the tool kit. – A spare wheel alone or with the tool kit. Boot lamp It comes on automatically when the boot is opened and goes off automatically when the boot is closed. The lighting time varies according to the
circumstances:
1. Load space cover – when the ignition is off, approximately 10 2. Boot lamp minutes. Do not place objects above the load retaining partition.
55 Ease of use and comfort
If the vehicle is equipped with a safety grille, objects can be placed above the load retaining partition.
Do not place hard or heavy objects on the rear shelf. They can become dangerous projectiles in the event of sudden braking or impact.
56 Lighting and visibility
Headlamp dipping Exterior lighting control 4 stalk
Main lighting ► Rotate the ring forwards to switch it on and backwards to switch it off. When the lamps are switched off automatically
("AUTO" position), the foglamp and the dipped
beam headlamps will remain on. ► Pull the stalk to switch between dipped and main beam headlamps. Switching on the foglamps is prohibited in clear weather or in rain, both day and In the lighting off or “AUTO”, depending on night. In these situations, the power of their
version, and sidelamps modes, the driver can beams may dazzle other drivers. They must Automatic illumination of lamps/daytime switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily only be used in fog or falling snow (rules may running lamps (“headlamp flash”) by pulling the stalk. vary depending on country). or Do not forget to switch off the foglamps when Lamps off (ignition off)/ Displays they are no longer necessary. Daytime running lamps (engine running) Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp Sidelamps only in the instrument panel confirms that the lighting selected is on. Switching off of the lamps when the Dipped or main beam headlamps A fault with a lamp is signalled by the ignition is switched off permanent illumination of this warning When the ignition is switched off, all of the lamp, accompanied by the display of a message lamps turn off immediately, except for dipped "Highway function" and an audible signal. beam headlamps if automatic guide-me-home With "Full LED" technology headlamps, lighting is activated. the range of the dipped beam headlamps is Rear foglamp automatically increased once the speed of the It only works if the dipped or main beam Switching on the lamps after vehicle is above 68 mph (110 km/h). headlamps are on. switching off the ignition To reactivate the lighting control, rotate the ring, depending on version, to the "0" position - lamps off, or to the AUTO" " position, then to the desired position.
57 Lighting and visibility
If the driver's door is opened, a temporary Daytime running lamps / Three flashes Headlamp beam height audible signal warns the driver that the lamps ► Press briefly upwards or downwards, without are on. Sidelamps adjustment going beyond the point of resistance; the They will go off automatically after a period of These LED lamps at the front and rear of the direction indicators will flash 3 times. time that depends on the state of charge of vehicle light up automatically when the engine Manual headlamp the battery (entering energy economy mode). starts. They perform the following functions: Parking lamps adjustment
– Daytime running lamps (lighting control stalk Vehicle side marking by lighting the sidelamps In some weather conditions (e.g. low at position " " or " " with adequate ambient on the traffic side only. temperature or humidity), misting on the 0 AUTO light). ► Depending on version, within one minute internal surface of the glass of the headlamps – Sidelamps (lighting control stalk at position of switching off the ignition, move the lighting and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear " " with low ambient light or "Sidelamps control stalk up or down, depending which side after the lamps have been on for a few AUTO only" or "Dipped/main beam headlamps"). the traffic is on (for example, when parking on minutes. the left, moving the lighting control stalk upwards turns on the right-hand sidelamps). Never look too closely at the luminous Direction indicators This is confirmed by an audible signal and the beam of Full LED headlamps: risk of lighting of the corresponding direction indicator To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, serious eye injury! lamp on the instrument panel. the height of these headlamp beams should be ► To switch off the parking lamps, return the adjusted according to the load in the vehicle. 0 (Initial setting) Travelling abroad lighting control stalk to the central position. Driver only or driver + front passenger Vehicles equipped with halogen 1 5 people headlamps: 2 5 people + load in the boot If planning to use your vehicle in a country 3 Driver only + load in the boot that drives on the other side of the road, the 4 5 6 Not used headlamp dipped beams must be adjusted to avoid dazzling oncoming drivers. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. ► Left or right: lower or raise the lighting control Automatic adjustment of stalk, beyond the point of resistance. the Full LED technology If you forget to cancel the direction indicators for more than 20 seconds, the headlamps volume of the audible signal will increase if This system automatically adjusts the height of the speed is above 50 mph (80 km/h). the headlamp beams according to the load in the vehicle.
58 Lighting and visibility
Headlamp beam height In the event of a malfunction, this warning the instrument panel, accompanied by an lamp comes on on the instrument panel, audible signal and/or the display of a message. 4 adjustment accompanied by the display of a message and Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified an audible signal. workshop. The system then places the headlamp beams in Manual headlamp Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor the lowest position. adjustment located at the top centre of the
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT windscreen behind the interior rear view dealer or a qualified workshop. mirror; the associated functions would no Do not touch the "Full LED" technology longer be controlled.
headlamps - risk of electrocution! In fog or snow, the rain/sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. In this case, Automatic illumination of the lighting will not come on automatically.
headlamps To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, When the ring is at the "AUTO" position and the height of these headlamp beams should be Guide-me-home and a low level of ambient light is detected by adjusted according to the load in the vehicle. the rain/sunshine sensor, the number plate welcome lighting 0 (Initial setting) lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps Driver only or driver + front passenger are switched on automatically, without any action 1 5 people Guide-me-home lighting on the part of the driver. They can also come on 2 5 people + load in the boot Automatic if rain is detected, at the same time as automatic 3 Driver only + load in the boot operation of the windscreen wipers. With the ring in the "AUTO" position, when the 4 5 6 Not used As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient light is poor, the dipped beam headlamps come level or after the windscreen wipers are switched on automatically when the ignition is switched Automatic adjustment of off, the lamps are switched off automatically. off. the Full LED technology You can activate/deactivate this Malfunction function and adjust the guide-me- headlamps In the event of a malfunction of the rain/ home lighting duration in the Driving / Vehicle This system automatically adjusts the height of sunshine sensor, the vehicle’s lighting touch screen menu. the headlamp beams according to the load in the comes on and this warning lamp is displayed in vehicle.
59 Lighting and visibility
Manual – when the vehicle is unlocked. traffic, and for observation of driving and This indicator lamp goes out when the
– when a door is opened. vehicle regulations. function is deactivated. – when a request to locate the vehicle is received from the remote control. The system becomes operational when Pause They also come on with the welcome lighting the vehicle exceeds 16 mph (25 km/h). If the situation requires a change of headlamp and guide-me-home lighting functions. When the speed falls below 9 mph (15 km/h), beam, the driver can take over at any time. They go off automatically after 30 seconds. the function is no longer operational. ► A "headlamp flash" pauses the function: • if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" indicator Automatic headlamp lamps were on, the system changes to main Activation/Deactivation beam,
It is set via the Driving / Vehicle ► With the ignition off, pull the lighting control dipping • if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator touch screen menu. stalk toward you ("headlamp flash") to activate/ When the ring is in the "AUTO” position, this lamps were on, the system changes to The state of the system stays in the memory deactivate the function. system automatically switches between dipped dipped beam. when switching off the ignition. Manual guide-me-home lighting goes off and main beam headlamps according to the To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps again. automatically after a period of time. lighting and traffic conditions, using a camera Operation located at the top of the windscreen. The system may suffer interference or If the ambient light level is sufficient and/or the Welcome lighting not work correctly: traffic conditions do not allow the main beam When the vehicle is unlocked, if the ambient – under conditions of poor visibility (snow, headlamps to be lit: light is low and the "Automatic illumination of heavy rain, etc.), – The dipped beam headlamps headlamps" function is activated, this system – if the windscreen in front of the camera is remain lit. These indicator lamps automatically turns on certain exterior lamps dirty, misted or obscured (for example, by a come on on the instrument panel. as well as certain lamps in the passenger sticker, etc.), If the ambient light level is very low and traffic compartment. – if the vehicle is facing highly reflective conditions permit: You can activate/deactivate this signs. – The main beam headlamps function and adjust the welcome When the system detects thick fog, it come on automatically. These lighting duration in the Driving / Vehicle touch temporarily deactivates the function. indicator lamps come on on the instrument
screen menu. The system is not able to detect: panel. – road users that do not have their own This system is a driving aid. The function is deactivated if the fog lamps are Door mirror spotlamps lighting, such as pedestrians, The driver remains responsible for switched on or the system detects dense fog. These spotlamps facilitate access to the vehicle – vehicles whose lighting is obscured (for the vehicle's lighting, its correct use for the When the fog lamps are switched off or the by lighting the ground near the front doors. example: vehicles running behind a safety prevailing conditions of light, visibility and vehicle leaves the area of dense fog, the function The spotlamps come on automatically: barrier on a motorway), is automatically reactivated.
60 Lighting and visibility
This indicator lamp goes out when the – vehicles at the top or bottom of a steep Without AUTO wiping function is deactivated. slope, on winding roads, on crossroads. 4
Pause Clean the windscreen regularly,
If the situation requires a change of headlamp particularly the area in front of the beam, the driver can take over at any time. camera. ► A "headlamp flash" pauses the function: The internal surface of the windscreen can • if the "AUTO" and "Dipped beam" indicator also become misted around the camera. lamps were on, the system changes to main In humid and cold weather, demist the beam, windscreen regularly. • if the "AUTO" and "Main beam" indicator Do not allow snow to accumulate on the lamps were on, the system changes to bonnet or roof of the vehicle as this could With AUTO wiping dipped beam. obstruct the detection camera. To reactivate the system, flash the headlamps again. The system may suffer interference or Wiper control stalk not work correctly:
– under conditions of poor visibility (snow, In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or frost present on the windscreen, around heavy rain, etc.), Windscreen wipers – if the windscreen in front of the camera is the wiper arms and blades and on the ► To select the wiping speed: raise or lower the dirty, misted or obscured (for example, by a windscreen seal, before operating the wipers. stalk to the desired position. sticker, etc.), Fast wiping (heavy rain) – if the vehicle is facing highly reflective Do not operate the wipers on a dry signs. windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold Normal wiping (moderate rain) When the system detects thick fog, it conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are temporarily deactivates the function. not stuck to the windscreen before operating Intermittent wiping (proportional to the The system is not able to detect: the wipers. vehicle’s speed) – road users that do not have their own Off lighting, such as pedestrians, – vehicles whose lighting is obscured (for Single wipe (press down and release). example: vehicles running behind a safety barrier on a motorway), or
61 Lighting and visibility
Automatic. To avoid damaging the wiper blades, do In the event of accumulation of snow or not operate the screenwash if the hard frost or if a bicycle carrier is fitted to Refer to the corresponding section. screenwash reservoir is empty. a towing system, deactivate the automatic Only operate the screenwash if there is no rear wiper via the touch screen’s Driving/ If the ignition has been switched off with risk of the fluid freezing on the windscreen Vehicle menu. the windscreen wiper active, it is and hindering visibility. During the winter necessary to operate the control stalk to period, use "very cold climate" rated products. reactivate the wiping when the ignition is Never top up with water. Rear screenwash switched on (unless the ignition is off for less ► Turn the ring all the way towards the than 1 minute). dashboard and hold. Rear wiper The screenwash and the wiper operate for as In position 1 or 2, the wiping frequency is long as the ring remains turned. automatically reduced when the speed of A final wiping cycle is performed when the vehicle drops below 3 mph (5 km/h). screenwashing ends. When the speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h) again, the wiping frequency returns to the Special position of the original frequency (fast or normal). ► Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with windscreen wipers the marking. This maintenance position is used for cleaning or Single wipe Off replacement of the wiper blades. It can also be ► Pull the stalk briefly towards you. useful, in winter (ice, snow), to release the wiper Intermittent wipe blades from the windscreen.
Front screenwash To maintain the effectiveness of the flat Wash-wipe ► Pull the wiper control stalk towards you and wiper blades, it is advisable to: hold. – handle them with care. The screenwash and windscreen wipers operate Reverse gear – clean them regularly using soapy water. for as long as the control stalk is pulled. – avoid using them to hold cardboard on the When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper A final wiping cycle is performed when windscreen. will come into operation automatically if the front screenwashing ends. – replace them at the first signs of wear. windscreen wipers are operating. With automatic air conditioning, any This function is set via the action on the screenwash control results Driving / Vehicle touch screen in temporary closure of the air intake to avoid menu. odours inside the passenger compartment.
62 Lighting and visibility
Before removing a front wiper blade Changing a wiper blade ► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the arm. 4 Removing/refitting at the front ► Repeat the procedure for the other wiper
blade. ► Starting with the wiper blade closest to you, once again hold each arm by the rigid section and lower it carefully to the windscreen.
Removing/refitting at the rear ► Within one minute of switching off the ignition, ► Hold the arm by the rigid section and raise it any operation of the wiper control stalk will as far as possible. position the wiper blades vertically. ► Clean the rear screen using screenwash ► Proceed with the desired operation or the fluid. replacement of the wiper blades. ► Unclip the worn wiper blade and remove it.
After refitting a front wiper blade ► Install the new wiper blade and clip it to the ► Carry out these wiper blade replacement arm. ► To return the wiper blades to their initial operations from the driver's side. ► Once again hold the arm by the rigid section, position, switch on the ignition and operate the ► Starting with the wiper blade farthest from then guide it carefully onto the rear screen. wiper control stalk. you, hold each arm by the rigid section and raise it as far as possible. Automatic windscreen Do not touch the wiper blades - risk of irreversible distortion. wipers Do not release them while they are moving - In AUTO mode, the windscreen wipers operate risk of damaging the windscreen! automatically, without any action on the part of the driver. If rain is detected, the wiping adapts to ► Clean the windscreen using screenwash the intensity of the rainfall automatically. fluid. Detection of rainfall is by means of a rain/ Do not apply "Rain X" type water- sunshine sensor at the top centre of the repellent products. windscreen, behind the rear view mirror.
► Unclip the worn wiper blade closest to you and remove it.
63 Lighting and visibility
Do not cover the rain/sunshine sensor. If the ignition has been off for more than When using an automatic car wash, one minute, the automatic wipers must switch off the automatic wipers and the be reactivated by pushing the control stalk ignition. downwards. In winter, wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic wipers. Malfunction If a fault occurs with the automatic wipers, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode. Switching on Have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
► Give a short downwards push to the control stalk. A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has been accepted. This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message. Switching off ► Give the control stalk another brief push downwards or place the control stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2). This indicator lamp goes off in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message.
64 Safety
General safety PEUGEOT dealers or qualified workshops, Hazard warning lamps
equipped with the special tools required (risk 5 recommendations of malfunctions of the vehicle's electronic systems that could cause breakdowns or Do not remove the labels attached in serious accidents). The Manufacturer cannot different places on your vehicle. They be held responsible if this advice is not include safety warnings as well as followed. identification information for the vehicle. – Any modification or adaptation not intended or authorised by PEUGEOT or carried out For all work on your vehicle, use a without meeting the technical requirements
qualified workshop that has the technical defined by the Manufacturer will result in the ► Pressing the red button causes all the information, skills and equipment required, all suspension of the commercial warranty. direction indicators to flash. of which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to They can operate with the ignition off. provide. Installation of accessory radio communication transmitters Automatic operation of Depending on country regulations, Before installing a radio communication certain safety equipment may be transmitter with an external aerial, you must hazard warning lamps mandatory: high visibility safety vests, without fail contact a PEUGEOT dealer for When braking in an emergency, depending on warning triangles, breathalysers, spare bulbs, the specification of transmitters which can the rate of deceleration, the hazard warning spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial lamps come on automatically. They switch off flaps at the rear of the vehicle, etc. position, specific installation requirements), automatically when you next accelerate. in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic It is also possible to switch them off by pressing the button. Installing electrical accessories: Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC). – The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories not approved by PEUGEOT may Declarations of conformity for radio cause excessive current consumption and equipment faults and failures with the electrical system The relevant certificates are available on the of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/APddb/ for information on the range of approved website. accessories. – As a safety measure, access to the diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's electronic systems, is reserved strictly for
65 Safety
Horn Emergency or assistance If an impact is detected by the airbag
control unit, an emergency call is made call automatically, independently of the deployment of any airbags.
‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ is a service that
can be accessed free of charge.
System operation – Upon switching on the ignition, if the indicator
lamp lights up red, then green, and then goes
out: the system is operating correctly. ► Press the central part of the steering wheel. Peugeot Connect SOS – If the indicator lamp is fixed red: system (PE112) malfunction – If the indicator lamp flashes red: replace the ► In an emergency, press button 1 for more Pedestrian horn (Electric) emergency battery. than 2 seconds. The pedestrian horn operates once the vehicle In the latter two cases, emergency and The lighting of the indicator lamp and a voice is moving and at speeds of up to 19 mph assistance call services may not work. message confirm that the call has been made to (30 km/h), in forward or reverse gear. Contact a dealer or a qualified repairer as soon the emergency services*. as possible. Malfunction ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ immediately locates In the event of a malfunction, this warning your vehicle and puts you in contact with the The system fault does not prevent the lamp comes on on the instrument panel. appropriate emergency services**. vehicle from being driven. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► Pressing again immediately cancels the workshop to have the system checked. request. Data processing The indicator lamp flashes when the vehicle All processing of personal information by data is sent, and then remains lit when the "Peugeot Connect SOS" system (PE112) communication is established. complies with the framework for protection
* In accordance with the general conditions of use of the service, available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations. ** In areas covered by ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’ and ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’. The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.
66 Safety
of personal information established by a call is made. The system is not traceable Peugeot Connect Regulation 2016/679 (GDPR) and Directive and is not continuously monitored in its 5 2002/58/EC of the European Parliament normal operating mode. Assistance and the Council, and in particular, seeks to The data in the system's internal memory is ► If the vehicle breaks down, press button 2 protect the vital interests of the data subject, automatically and continuously erased. Only for more than 2 seconds to request assistance in accordance with Article 6.1, paragraph d) of the vehicle’s three most recent locations are (confirmed by a voice message*). Regulation 2016/679. stored. ► Pressing again immediately cancels the Personal information processing is strictly When an emergency call is triggered, the data request. limited to the management of the "Peugeot log is stored for no more than 13 hours. Privacy mode allows you to manage the Connect SOS" system used with the “112” level of sharing (data and/or position) European single emergency call number. Access to data between your vehicle and the PEUGEOT The "Peugeot Connect SOS" system is able You have the right to access the data brand. to collect and process only the following and, if necessary, submit a request to It can be configured in the Settings menu on data relating to the vehicle: chassis number, rectify, erase or restrict the processing of the touch screen. type (passenger vehicle or light commercial any personal information not processed in By default, depending on equipment, vehicle), fuel type or power source, most accordance with the provisions of Regulation deactivate/reactivate geolocation by recent three locations and direction of travel, 2016/679 (GDPR). Third parties to which data simultaneously pressing the 2 buttons, then and a timestamped log file recording the has been communicated shall be notified of press the "Peugeot Connect Assistance" automatic activation of the system. any rectification, erasure or restriction carried button to confirm. The recipients of the processed data are the out in accordance with the aforementioned emergency call handling centres designated Directive, unless doing so would be If you purchased your vehicle outside the by the relevant national authorities in the impossible or require a disproportionate effort. PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you territory in which they are located, enabling You also have the right to lodge a complaint to have a dealer check the configuration of priority reception and handling of calls to the with the relevant data protection authority. these services and, if desired, modify them to “112” emergency number. suit your wishes. In a multilingual country, configuration is possible in the official national Data storage language of your choice. Data contained in the system’s memory is not accessible from outside the system until
* According to the geographic coverage of ‘Peugeot Connect SOS’, ‘Peugeot Connect Assistance’ and the official national language chosen by the owner of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and telematic services provided is available from dealers or on the website for your country.
67 Safety
For technical reasons, in particular to Anti-lock braking system When changing wheels (tyres and rims), more wheels to return the vehicle to the desired improve the quality of telematic services ensure that these are approved for your path, within the limits of the laws of physics. for customers, the Manufacturer reserves the (ABS) and Electronic brake vehicle. These systems are activated automatically every right to carry out updates to the vehicle's force distribution (EBFD) time the vehicle is started. on-board telematic system at any time. These systems enhance the vehicle’s stability After an impact, have these systems They come into operation in the event of a grip and handling during braking, and enable greater checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a or trajectory problem. If you benefit from the Peugeot Connect control while cornering, particularly on poor or qualified workshop. This warning lamp on the instrument Packs offer with the SOS and Assistance slippery road surfaces. panel flashes to indicate that they are Pack included, there are additional services ABS prevents wheel locking in the event of operating. available to you in your personal space, via emergency braking. Emergency braking Deactivation / Reactivation the website for your country. EBFD manages the braking pressure wheel by assistance (EBA) In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle stuck For information about the SOS and wheel. In an emergency, this system enables you in mud, immobilised in snow, on soft ground, Assistance Pack, please refer to the general This warning lamp comes on fixed in the to reach the optimum braking pressure more etc.), it may be useful to deactivate the ASR conditions for these services. event of an ABS malfunction. quickly and therefore reduce the stopping system to freely spin the wheels and regain The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive distance. traction. carefully at a moderate speed. It is triggered in relation to the speed at which Reactivate the system as soon as the level of Electronic stability control Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a grip permits. workshop as soon as possible. reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an It is set via the (ESC) This warning lamp, when lit together with increase in braking efficiency. Driving / Vehicle The electronic stability control programme the STOP and ABS warning lamps, touch screen menu. includes the following systems: accompanied by a message and an audible Anti-slip regulation (ASR) Deactivation is confirmed by the illumination of this indicator lamp in the – Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and Electronic signal, indicates an EBFD malfunction. / Dynamic stability control brake force distribution (EBFD). You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. instrument panel and the display of a message. – Emergency braking assistance (EBA). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (DSC) The ASR system is reactivated automatically – Anti-slip regulation (ASR). workshop. Anti-slip regulation optimises traction using every time the ignition is switched back on or – Dynamic stability control (DSC). engine braking and by applying the brakes on from 31 mph (50 km/h). The normal operation of the ABS may – Trailer stability assist (TSA). the driving wheels to avoid wheel spinning. It Reactivation is manual below 31 mph (50 km/h). result in slight vibrations in the brake also enhances the vehicle's directional stability pedal. Malfunction while accelerating. If there is a difference between the vehicle’s In the event of a system malfunction, this When braking in an emergency, press trajectory and the path desired by the driver, the warning lamp comes on, accompanied by very firmly and maintain this pressure. dynamic stability control system automatically an onscreen message and audible signal. uses engine braking and the brakes on one or
68 Safety more wheels to return the vehicle to the desired Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The electronic stability control system (ESC) path, within the limits of the laws of physics. workshop to have the systems checked. must not have any faults. 5 These systems are activated automatically every Between 37 and 99 mph (60 and 160 km/h), if ASR / DSC time the vehicle is started. the system detects oscillations (snaking) in the These systems enhance safety during They come into operation in the event of a grip movement of the trailer, it acts on the brakes to normal driving, but should not encourage or trajectory problem. stabilise the trailer and, if necessary, reduces the driver to take extra risks or drive at high This warning lamp on the instrument engine power to slow down the vehicle. speed. panel flashes to indicate that they are This warning lamp flashes in the It is in conditions of reduced grip (rain, snow, operating. instrument panel and the brake lamps ice) that the risk of loss of grip increases. It light up to draw attention to this corrective action. is therefore important for your safety to keep Deactivation / Reactivation For information on towed loads and masses, these systems activated in all conditions, and In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle stuck refer to the Technical data section or your particularly in difficult conditions. in mud, immobilised in snow, on soft ground, vehicle’s registration certificate Correct operation of these systems depends etc.), it may be useful to deactivate the ASR To ensure complete safety while driving with on compliance with the manufacturer's system to freely spin the wheels and regain a Towing device, refer to the corresponding recommendations relating to the wheels traction. section. (tyres and rims), braking and electronic Reactivate the system as soon as the level of components, as well as the assembly and grip permits. Malfunction repair procedures used by PEUGEOT It is set via the Driving / Vehicle If a fault occurs, this warning lamp comes dealers. touch screen menu. on in the instrument panel, accompanied The use of snow tyres is recommended, to Deactivation is confirmed by the by a message and an audible signal. ensure that these systems remain effective illumination of this indicator lamp in the If you wish to continue towing a trailer, reduce in winter conditions. All four wheels must be instrument panel and the display of a message. your speed and drive carefully! fitted with tyres approved for the vehicle. The ASR system is reactivated automatically Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified every time the ignition is switched back on or workshop to have the system checked. from 31 mph (50 km/h). Trailer stability assist (TSA) The trailer stability assist system offers Reactivation is manual below 31 mph (50 km/h). When towing, this system reduces the risk of the enhanced safety in normal driving, vehicle or trailer snaking. Malfunction provided that the recommendations on towing a trailer are observed. It should not In the event of a system malfunction, this Operation encourage the driver to take risks, such as warning lamp comes on, accompanied by The system is activated automatically when the towing a trailer in adverse operating an onscreen message and audible signal. ignition is switched on. conditions (overloading, failure to observe the
69 Safety
trailer nose weight, worn or under-inflated This system reduces the pressure of the seat Rear seat belts Seat belt not fastened/ tyres, faulty braking system, etc.), or to drive belt on the chest of the occupant, thus improving at excessive speeds. their protection. unfastened alerts
In certain cases, the system may not detect In the event of an impact trailer snaking, particularly with a light trailer. Depending on the nature and
When driving on slippery or poor surfaces, the
seriousness of impacts, the pyrotechnic system may not be able to prevent sudden pretensioner device may trigger before trailer snaking. and independently of airbag deployment. Deployment of the pretensioners is accompanied by a slight discharge of Seat belts harmless smoke and a noise, due to the 1. Front left seat belt warning lamp Inertia reel activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge 2. Front right seat belt warning lamp The seat belts are equipped with an inertia reel incorporated in the system. Each of the rear seats has a three-point seat belt 3. Rear left seat belt warning lamp which allows the strap length to automatically In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes with inertia reel. 4. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp adjust to your shape. The seat belt returns to its on. The outer seats are fitted, depending on the 5. Rear right seat belt warning lamp storage automatically when it is not used. Following an impact, have the seat belt version, with a pyrotechnic pretensioning and The inertia reels are fitted with a device which system checked, and if necessary replaced, force limiting system. If the corresponding seat belt is not fastened automatically locks the strap in the event of a by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified or is unfastened, when the ignition is switched collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls workshop. Fastening on, the seat belts warning lamp comes on in the over. It can be released by pulling the strap firmly ► Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the instrument panel and the corresponding warning and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly. Front seat belts buckle. lamp (1 to 5) comes on in red in the seat belt and Pyrotechnic pretensioning ► Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly front passenger airbag warning lamps display. The front seat belts are fitted with a pyrotechnic This system improves safety in the event of a by pulling the strap. frontal or side impact. pretensioning system, depending on version, If a rear seat belt is not fastened, the Depending on the severity of the impact, the and a force limiting system. corresponding warning lamp (3 to 5) Unlocking comes on for around 30 seconds. pyrotechnic pretensioning system instantly ► Press the red button on the buckle. tightens the seat belts against the body of the ► Guide the seat belt as it is reeled in. From about 12 mph (20 km/h) and for 2 occupants. minutes, each warning lamp corresponding to The pyrotechnic pretensioning seat belts are an occupied seat whose seat belt is unfastened enabled when the ignition is on. flashes, accompanied by an audible signal. After Force limiter these 2 minutes, the corresponding seat warning
70 Safety
Seat belt not fastened/ lamp remains on until the driver or the front/rear Recommendations for children passenger fasten their seat belt. Use a suitable child seat if the passenger 5 unfastened alerts is less than 12 years old or shorter than one
Advice and a half metres. Never use the same seat belt to secure more The driver must ensure that passengers
than one child.
use the seat belts correctly and that they Never carry a child on your lap. are all fastened before setting off. For more information on Child seats, refer to Wherever seated in the vehicle, you must the corresponding section. always fasten the seat belt, even for short journeys. Do not interchange the seat belt buckles, as Maintenance In accordance with current safety 1. Front left seat belt warning lamp they will not fulfil their role fully. regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle's 2. Front right seat belt warning lamp Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with 3. Rear left seat belt warning lamp is reeled in correctly. the skills and equipment needed, which a 4. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp After folding or moving a seat or rear bench PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. 5. Rear right seat belt warning lamp seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned Have the seat belts checked regularly by a If the corresponding seat belt is not fastened and reeled in correctly. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, or is unfastened, when the ignition is switched particularly if the straps show signs of on, the seat belts warning lamp comes on in the Installation damage. instrument panel and the corresponding warning The lower part of the strap must be Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or lamp (1 to 5) comes on in red in the seat belt and positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT front passenger airbag warning lamps display. The upper part must be positioned in the dealers. hollow of the shoulder. If a rear seat belt is not fastened, the In order to be effective, a seat belt: corresponding warning lamp (3 to 5) – must be tightened as close to the body as comes on for around 30 seconds. possible; Airbags From about 12 mph (20 km/h) and for 2 – must be pulled in front of you with a smooth minutes, each warning lamp corresponding to movement, ensuring that it is not twisted; General information an occupied seat whose seat belt is unfastened – must only be used to secure one person; System designed to help improve the safety flashes, accompanied by an audible signal. After – must not show signs of tearing or fraying; of the occupants sitting in the front seats and these 2 minutes, the corresponding seat warning – must not be changed or modified, in order the rear outer seats, in the event of a violent to avoid affecting its performance. collision. The airbags supplement the action
71 Safety
of the seat belts equipped with a force limiting Impact detection zones Front airbags The front airbag inflates between the thorax and system. head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the Electronic detectors record and analyse the steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, front and side impacts sustained in the impact passenger's side, to cushion their forward detection zones: movement. – In the event of violent impact, the airbags deploy instantly and help better protect the Lateral airbags occupants of the vehicle; immediately after the This system protects the driver and front impact, the airbags deflate rapidly in order not A. Front impact zone passenger in the event of a serious side impact to hinder the visibility or the possible exit of the B. Side impact zone to mitigate the risk of injury to the chest, between occupants. the hip and the shoulder. – In the event of a slight impact, a rear impact When one or more airbags are deployed, Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest and under certain rollover conditions, the airbags the detonation of the pyrotechnic charge frame, door side. may not deploy; only the seat belt helps to incorporated in the system makes a noise and This system protects the driver and front protect you in these situations. releases a small quantity of smoke. passenger in the event of a serious front impact, Deployment in order to limit the risk of head and chest The seriousness of the impact depends on the This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive They are deployed on one side in the event of a injuries. nature of the obstacle and the speed of the individuals may experience slight irritation. serious side impact applied to all or part of the The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the vehicle at the moment of collision. The detonation noise associated with the side impact zone B. steering wheel; the front passenger airbag is deployment of one or more airbags may result The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and The airbags do not operate when the fitted in the dashboard above the glove box. in a slight loss of hearing for a short time. shoulder of the vehicle's occupant and the ignition is switched off. corresponding door trim panel. This equipment will only deploy once. If a The front airbags are adaptive. In second impact occurs (during the same or a particular, they inflate less firmly in the subsequent accident), the airbag will not be presence of a smaller occupant, with the seat Curtain airbags deployed again. set in a forward longitudinal position. System contributing towards greater protection for the driver and passengers (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a Deployment serious side impact in order to limit the risk of They deploy, except the front passenger airbag injury to the side of the head. if it is deactivated*, in the event of a serious front Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and impact to all or part of the front impact zone A. the upper passenger compartment area.
* For more information on Deactivating the front passenger airbag, refer to the corresponding section.
72 Safety
The front airbag inflates between the thorax and Deployment fix or attach anything close to or in the way of head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the It deploys simultaneously with the corresponding the airbag release trajectory; this could cause 5 steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, lateral airbag in the event of a serious side injuries during their deployment. passenger's side, to cushion their forward impact applied to all or part of the side impact Never modify the original definition of your movement. zone B. vehicle, particularly in the area directly around The curtain airbag inflates between the front the airbags. Lateral airbags and rear occupants of the vehicle and the After an accident or if the vehicle has been This system protects the driver and front corresponding windows. stolen, have the airbag systems checked. passenger in the event of a serious side impact All work on the airbag systems must only to mitigate the risk of injury to the chest, between Malfunction be performed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a the hip and the shoulder. If this warning lamp comes on in the qualified workshop. Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest instrument panel, you must contact a Even if all of the precautions mentioned frame, door side. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to are observed, a risk of injury or of minor have the system checked. burns to the head, chest or arms cannot be Deployment The airbags may not be deployed in the event of ruled out when an airbag is deployed. The They are deployed on one side in the event of a a serious impact. airbag inflates almost instantly (within a few serious side impact applied to all or part of the milliseconds) then deflates within the same side impact zone B. In the event of a minor impact or bump at time discharging the hot gas via openings The lateral airbag inflates between the hip and the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle provided for this purpose. shoulder of the vehicle's occupant and the rolls over, the airbags may not be deployed. In the event of a rear or front collision, none of corresponding door trim panel. Front airbags the lateral airbags are deployed. Do not drive holding the steering wheel Curtain airbags by its spokes or resting your hands on the System contributing towards greater protection Advice centre part of the wheel. for the driver and passengers (with the exception Passengers must not place their feet on the of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a For the airbags to be fully effective, dashboard. serious side impact in order to limit the risk of observe the safety recommendations Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags injury to the side of the head. below. can cause burns or the risk of injury from a Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and Adopt a normal upright sitting position. cigarette or pipe. the upper passenger compartment area. Fasten the seat belt ensuring it is correctly Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or positioned and adjusted. hit it violently. Do not leave anything between the occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, object, etc.), nor
73 Safety
Do not fix or attach anything to the steering Do not remove the grab handles installed on Make sure that the seat belt is correctly Installing a booster seat wheel or dashboard, as this could cause the roof, as they play a part in securing the positioned and tightened. The chest part of the seat belt must be injuries when the airbags are deployed. curtain airbags. For child seats with a support leg, ensure that positioned on the child's shoulder without the support leg is in firm and steady contact touching the neck. Lateral airbags with the floor. Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt Use only approved covers on the seats, Child seats passes correctly over the child's thighs. compatible with the deployment of the lateral Advice Use a booster seat with backrest, equipped airbags. For information on the range of seat The regulations on carrying children are with a belt guide at shoulder level. covers suitable for your vehicle, contact a specific to each country. Refer to the An incorrectly installed child seat PEUGEOT dealer. legislation in force in your country. compromises the child's safety in the Additional protections Do not fix or attach anything to the seat event of an accident. To prevent accidental opening of the For maximum safety, please observe the backrests (clothes, etc.), as this could cause Ensure that there is no seat belt or seat belt doors and rear windows, use the "Child lock". following recommendations: injuries to the thorax or arm when the lateral buckle under the child seat, as this could Take care not to open the rear windows by – In accordance with European regulations, all airbag is deployed. destabilise it. more than one third. children under the age of 12 or less than 4 Do not sit with the upper part of the body any Remember to fasten the seat belts or the To protect young children from the rays of the ft 11” (150 cm) tall must travel in approved nearer to the door than necessary. harness of child seats, keeping the slack sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows. child seats suited to their weight, on seats The vehicle's front door panels include side relative to the child's body to a minimum, As a safety precaution, do not leave: fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings. impact sensors. even for short journeys. – a child alone and unattended in a vehicle, – Statistically, the safest seats in your A damaged door or any unauthorised or When installing a child seat using the seat – a child or an animal in a vehicle which is vehicle for carrying children are the rear incorrectly executed work (modification or belt, ensure that the seat belt is tightened exposed to the sun, with the windows closed, seats. repair) on the front doors or their interior trim correctly on the child seat and that it secures – the keys within reach of children inside the – Children weighing less than 9 kg must could compromise the operation of these the child seat firmly on the seat of the vehicle. vehicle. travel in the "rear facing" position, whether in sensors - risk of malfunction of the lateral If the passenger seat is adjustable, move it the front or rear of the vehicle. airbags! forwards if necessary. Such work must only be done by a PEUGEOT It is recommended that children travel Remove the head restraint before Child seat at the rear dealer or a qualified workshop. on the rear seats of the vehicle: installing a child seat with a backrest on a "Forward facing" or "Rearward – ‘rear facing’ up to the age of 3, passenger seat. – ‘forward facing’ over the age of 3. Ensure that the head restraint is stored or facing" Curtain airbags Do not fix or attach anything to the roof, attached securely to prevent it from being as this could cause head injuries when the thrown around the vehicle in the event of curtain airbag is deployed. sharp braking. Refit the head restraint once the child seat has been removed.
74 Safety
Installing a booster seat "Forward facing" The chest part of the seat belt must be 5 positioned on the child's shoulder without
touching the neck. Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt ► Move the vehicle's front seat forward and passes correctly over the child's thighs. straighten the backrest so that the legs of the Use a booster seat with backrest, equipped child in the "forward facing" child seat or the with a belt guide at shoulder level. "rearward facing" child seat itself do not touch
the vehicle's front seat. ► Verify that the backrest of the "forward facing" Additional protections You must leave the front passenger child seat is as close as possible to the backrest To prevent accidental opening of the airbag active. doors and rear windows, use the "Child lock". of the vehicle's rear seat, and is ideally in contact Take care not to open the rear windows by with it. more than one third. "Rearward facing" Centre rear seat To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows. A child seat with a support leg must never be As a safety precaution, do not leave: installed on the centre rear passenger seat. – a child alone and unattended in a vehicle, – a child or an animal in a vehicle which is Child seat at the front
exposed to the sun, with the windows closed, – the keys within reach of children inside the
vehicle. The front passenger airbag must be deactivated before installing a rearward
Child seat at the rear facing child seat. Otherwise, the child risks ► Adjust the front passenger seat to the being seriously injured or killed if the highest and fully back longitudinal position, "Forward facing" or "Rearward airbag deploys. facing" with the backrest straightened.
75 Safety
Deactivating the front Recommended child seats passenger airbag Range of recommended child seats secured using a three-point seat belt. Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Warning label - Front passenger airbag
Passenger airbag OFF
For your child’s safety, the front passenger airbag MUST be deactivated With the ignition off: when a "rearward facing" child seat is ► To deactivate the airbag, turn the key in the Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt installed on the front passenger seat. switch to the "OFF" position. In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing universally approved (a) child seats secured using the seat belt, Otherwise, the child would be exposed to the ► To reactivate it, turn the key to the "ON" based on the child’s weight and the seat position in the vehicle.
risk of death or serious injury in the event of position. You must comply with the following instruction, airbag deployment. When the ignition is switched on: reminded by the warning label on both sides of This warning lamp comes on and remains the passenger sun visor: Vehicles not equipped with a lit to signal the deactivation. Or NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint deactivation/reactivation control Installing a "rearward facing" child seat on This warning lamp comes on for about 1 on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in the front passenger seat is strictly prohibited minute to signal the activation. front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the - risk of death or serious injury in the event of CHILD can occur. airbag deployment!
Deactivating/Reactivating the front passenger airbag For vehicles on which it is fitted, the control is located on the side of the glove box.
76 Safety
Recommended child seats Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg 5 Range of recommended child seats secured L1 L5 using a three-point seat belt. "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" "RÖMER KIDFIX XP" Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg Installed in the "rearward facing" position. Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings. Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg The child is restrained by the seat belt.
A version with a removable backrest may be used for children weighing more than 25 kg.
However, for better protection, use a booster seat with backrest for all children weighing up
to 36 kg.
Locations for child seats secured using the seat belt In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing universally approved (a) child seats secured using the seat belt, based on the child’s weight and the seat position in the vehicle.
77 Safety
The backrest must be in an upright position. Weight of the child/indicative age (e) Seat Front passenger Under 13 kg From 9 to 18 kg From 15 to 25 kg From 22 to 36 kg (f) To install a "rearward facing" or "forward airbag (groups 0 (b) and (group 1) (group 2) (group 3) facing" child seat at the rear, move the front 0+) From about 1 to 3 From about 3 to 6 From about 6 to seat forward, then adjust the backrest to an Up to about 1 years old years old 10 years old upright position to allow enough room for the year old child seat and the child's legs. Row 1 (c) Passenger seat Deactivated: U U U U (g) Never install a child seat with a support leg with height adjustment "OFF" on the centre rear passenger seat. or without height (d) Activated: "ON" X UF UF UF adjustment (e) “ISOFIX" mountings The seats shown below are fitted with ISOFIX compliant mountings:
Row 2 (f) Rear seats (g) U U U U
U: Seat position suitable for the installation of UF: Seat position suitable for the installation a (b) Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Carrycots and a child seat secured using the seat belt and child seat secured using the seat belt and "car" infant carriers cannot be installed on universally approved for "rearward facing" universally approved for "forward facing" the front passenger seat.
and/or "forward facing" use. use. (c) Refer to the current legislation in your * Depending on version. X : Seat position not suitable for the installation country before placing a child in this seat The mountings comprise three rings for each of a child seat for the specified weight position. seat, indicated by a marking: group. – Two rings A, located between the vehicle seat (d) The front height-adjustable seat must backrest and cushion. (a) Universal child seat: child seat that can be be adjusted to the highest and fully back installed in all vehicles using the seat belt. longitudinal position.
78 Safety
(e) The backrest must be in an upright position. 5 (f) To install a "rearward facing" or "forward facing" child seat at the rear, move the front seat forward, then adjust the backrest to an upright position to allow enough room for the child seat and the child's legs.
(g) Never install a child seat with a support leg on the centre rear passenger seat.
Rear seats The 2 latches of ISOFIX child seats are secured This system prevents the child seat from tipping to them. forward in the event of a front impact. “ISOFIX" mountings – One ring B, located behind the seat, called This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, The seats shown below are fitted with ISOFIX the TOP TETHER, for fixing seats fitted with an reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in the compliant mountings: upper strap. vehicle.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER: ► Remove and stow the head restraint before installing the child seat on this seat (refit it once the child seat has been removed). ► Pass the upper strap of the child seat behind the seat backrest, between the head restraint rods. ► Secure the upper strap hook to ring B. ► Tighten the upper strap.
When fitting an ISOFIX child seat to the
Front seat left-hand rear seat of the bench seat, * Depending on version. before fitting the seat, first move the centre The mountings comprise three rings for each rear seat belt towards the middle of the seat, indicated by a marking: vehicle, so as to avoid the seat interfering – Two rings A, located between the vehicle seat with the operation of the seat belt. backrest and cushion.
79 Safety
An incorrectly installed child seat " " compromises the child's safety in the "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus and its ISOFIX RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX (size category: ) event of an accident. base" B1 (size category: E) Strictly observe the fitting instructions Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
provided in the user guide supplied with the Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
child seat.
For information about the installation
possibilities for ISOFIX child seats in Installed "rearward facing" using an ISOFIX your vehicle, refer to the summary table. base which is attached to rings A. Suitable for forward-facing installation only. The base has a support leg, height- Attached to rings A and ring B, referred to as Recommended ISOFIX child adjustable, which rests on the vehicle's floor. TOP TETHER, using an upper strap. This child seat can also be secured with a Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, seats seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used lying down. Also consult the user guide from the child and attached to the vehicle seat using the This child seat can also be used in seat seat’s manufacturer to find out how to three-point seat belt. positions not equipped with ISOFIX install and remove the seat. mountings. In this case, it must be secured to the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt. Adjust the front seat of the vehicle so that the child's feet do not touch the backrest.
Locations for ISOFIX child seats In line with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on the vehicle seats fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
80 Safety
Weight of the child/indicative age 5 Under 10 kg Under 10 kg From 9 to 18 kg (group 0) Under 13 kg (group 1) Up to about 6 (group 0) From about 1 to 3 years old months old (group 0+) Up to about 1 year old Type of ISOFIX child seat Cot "Rearward facing" "Rearward "Forward facing" facing" ISOFIX size category F G C D E C D A B B1 Seat Front passenger airbag Row 1 (a) Passenger Deactivated: X IL IL IUF/IL (b) seat with "OFF" (depending ISOFIX Activated: X X X IUF/IL on version) with or "ON" without height adjustment Passenger Not ISOFIX seat without ISOFIX Row 2 (b) Rear side seats (c) (d) X IL IL IUF/IL Rear centre seat Not ISOFIX
IUF: Seat position suitable for the installation of an IsofixU niversal seat, "Forward facing", secured using the upper strap. IL: Seat position suitable for the installation of an IsofixS emi-Universal seat, either: – "rearward facing" fitted with an upper strap or a support leg. – "forward facing" fitted with a support leg.
81 Safety
– a carrycot fitted with an upper strap or a support leg. For securing the upper strap using the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section. X: Seat position not suitable for the installation of an ISOFIX seat or carrycot for the specified weight group. (a) Refer to the current legislation in your country before placing a child in this seat position. (b) Remove the head restraints. (c) Behind the driver: adjust the driver’s seat to its maximum height setting. (d) Behind the front passenger: adjust the front passenger seat to its fully forward longitudinal position. i-Size child seats i-Size child seats have two latches that engage on the two rings A. These i-Size child seats also have: – either an upper strap that is attached to ring B. – or a support leg that rests on the vehicle floor, compatible with the approved i-Size seat position. Their role is to prevent the child seat from tipping forward in the event of a collision. For more information on the ISOFIX mountings, refer to the corresponding section. In accordance with European regulations, this table indicates the options for installing i-Size child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings approved for i-Size.
Seat Front passenger airbag i-Size restraint system Row 1 (a) Passenger seat with ISOFIX, with or Deactivated: "OFF" i-U (depending on version) without height adjustment (b)
Activated: "ON" i-UF
Passenger seat without ISOFIX Not i-Size
82 Safety
Seat Front passenger airbag i-Size restraint system 5 Row 2 Rear side seats (c) i-U
Rear centre seat Not i-Size
i-U : Suitable for i-Size restraint systems in the "Universal" category, "forward facing" and Manual child lock "rearward facing". This system prevents opening of a rear door using its interior handle. i-UF: Only suitable for i-Size restraint systems The control, red in colour, is located on the edge in the "Universal" category which are of each rear door (marked by a label). "forward facing".
(a) Refer to the current legislation in your Locking / Unlocking Do not confuse the child lock control, country before placing a child in this seat which is red, with the back-up locking position. control, which is black. (b) The front height-adjustable seat must be adjusted to the highest and fully back longitudinal position. Electric child lock
(c) Where the passenger seat is affected,
the front height-adjustable seat must be ► To lock, turn the red control as far as it will go adjusted to the highest and fully forward using the integral key: This control prevents the opening of the rear longitudinal position, with the backrest • To the right on the left-hand rear door. doors using their interior handles and the use of straightened; where the driver’s seat • To the left on the right-hand rear door. ► To unlock, turn it in the opposite direction. the rear electric windows.
is affected, the highest and mid-runner position, with the backrest straightened.
83 Safety
Activation/Deactivation
► With the ignition on, press this button to activate/deactivate the child lock. When the indicator lamp is on, the child lock is activated.
With the child lock activated, it is still possible to open the doors from outside and to operate the rear electric windows from the driver's controls.
This system is independent and in no circumstances does it take the place of the central locking control. Check the status of the child lock each time you switch on the ignition. Always keep the electronic key with you when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time. In the event of a serious impact, the electric child lock is switched off automatically to permit the exit of the rear passengers.
84 Driving
Driving recommendations Do not park the vehicle or leave the ► check that the depth of water does not engine running on a flammable exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that 6 ► Observe the driving regulations and remain surface (dry grass, dead leaves, etc.). The might be generated by other users, vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. exhaust system of your vehicle is very hot, ► deactivate the Stop & Start function, ► Monitor your environment and keep your even several minutes after the engine stops. ► drive as slowly as possible without stalling. In hands on the wheel to be able to react to Risk of fire! all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h), anything that may happen any time. ► do not stop and do not switch off the engine. ► Drive smoothly, anticipate the need for Never leave a vehicle unattended with On leaving the flooded road, as soon as safety braking and maintain a longer safety distance, the engine running. If you have to leave conditions allow, make several light brake especially in bad weather. your vehicle with the engine running, apply applications to dry the brake discs and pads. ► Stop the vehicle to carry out operations that the parking brake and put the gearbox into If in doubt about the state of your vehicle, require close attention (such as adjustments). neutral or position N or P (depending on the contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified ► During long trips, take a break every two type of gearbox). workshop. hours. Noise (Electric) Important! Never leave children inside the vehicle unsupervised. On the outside Never leave the engine running in a Due to the vehicle’s quiet operation when driving, closed space without sufficient On flooded roads the driver should pay particular attention. ventilation. Internal combustion engines emit At speeds of up to 19 mph (30 km/h), the We strongly advise against driving on flooded toxic exhaust gases such as carbon pedestrian horn warns other road users of the roads, as this could cause serious damage to monoxide. Danger of poisoning and death! vehicle’s presence. the engine or gearbox, as well as to the electrical systems of your vehicle. On the inside
In severe wintry conditions (temperature below -23°C), let the engine run for 4 During use, you may hear certain perfectly minutes before moving off, to ensure the normal noises specific to electric vehicles, such correct operation and durability of the as: mechanical components of your vehicle – Traction battery relay when starting. (engine and gearbox). – Vacuum pump when braking. – Vehicle tyres or aerodynamics when driving. – Jolting and knocking noise during hill starts. Never drive with the parking brake applied. Risk of overheating and If you are obliged to drive on a flooded road: damage to the braking system!
85 Driving
Towing Tyres Brakes ► Check the tyre pressures of the towing Braking distances are increased when towing a Driving with a trailer places greater vehicle and of the trailer, observing the trailer. To avoid overheating the brakes, the use demands on the towing vehicle and recommended pressures. of engine braking is recommended. particular care must be taken. Lighting Side wind Do not exceed the maximum towable ► Check the electrical signalling on the trailer Bear in mind that the vehicle will be more weights. and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle. susceptible to wind when towing. At altitude: reduce the maximum load by If a genuine PEUGEOT towing device is 10% per 1,000 metres of altitude; the lower used, the rear parking sensors will be Anti-theft protection air density at high altitudes decreases engine deactivated automatically to avoid the audible performance. signal. Electronic immobiliser The keys include an electronic engine New vehicle: do not tow a trailer until the immobiliser system, with a code that must be vehicle has driven at least 620 miles When driving recognised in order for starting to be possible. (1,000 kilometres). Cooling If the system malfunctions, indicated by the Towing a trailer uphill causes the coolant display of a message, the engine will not start. If the outside temperature is high, let the temperature to increase. The maximum towable Contact a PEUGEOT dealer. engine idle for 1 to 2 minutes after the load depends on the gradient and the exterior vehicle comes to a stop, to help it to cool. temperature. The fan’s cooling capacity does not increase with engine speed. Before setting off ► Reduce speed and lower the engine speed to limit heating up. Nose weight In all cases, pay attention to the coolant ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the temperature. heaviest items are as close as possible to the If this warning lamp and the STOP axle and the nose weight (at the point where it warning lamp come on, stop the joins your vehicle) approaches the maximum vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as permitted without exceeding it. possible.
86 Driving
Starting / Switching off the Once the state of charge of the battery drops to ► With a Diesel engine, turn the key to position the reserve level, the system switches to energy 2, ignition on, to operate the engine preheating 6 engine with the key economy mode : the power supply is cut off system. automatically to preserve the remaining battery Wait until this warning lamp goes off in the Key ignition switch charge. instrument panel, then operate the starter motor by turning the key to position 3 without Starting the engine pressing the accelerator pedal, until the engine With the parking brake applied: starts. Once the engine starts, release the key. ► With a , place the gear lever manual gearbox In wintry conditions, the warning lamp in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal. may stay on for a longer period. When ► With an , place the gear automatic gearbox the engine is hot, the warning lamp does not selector in mode or then fully depress the N P come on. brake pedal. ► Insert the key into the ignition switch; the If the engine does not start straight away, system recognises the code. switch off the ignition. Wait a few
► Unlock the steering column by simultaneously seconds before operating the starter motor It has 3 positions: turning the steering wheel and the key. again. If the engine does not start after a few – 1. Stop: inserting and removing the key, In certain cases, you may have to apply attempts, do not keep trying - risk of steering column locked. significant force to move the steering damaging the starter motor and the engine. – 2. Ignition: steering column unlocked, ignition wheel (wheels on full lock, for example). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified on, Diesel preheating, engine running. workshop. – 3. Starting. ► With a petrol engine, operate the starter motor by turning the key to position 3 without Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key In mild conditions, do not leave the pressing the accelerator pedal, until the engine or the remote control. It would weigh engine at idle to warm up but move off starts. Once the engine starts, release the key. down on its shaft in the ignition switch and straight away and drive at moderate speed. could cause a malfunction. With petrol engines, after a cold start, preheating the catalytic converter can Switching off the engine Ignition on position cause noticeable engine vibrations for anything up to 2 minutes while stationary with ► Immobilise the vehicle. It allows the use of the vehicle's electric the engine running (accelerated idle speed). ► With the engine at idle, turn the key to equipment or portable devices to be charged. position 1. ► Remove the key from the ignition switch.
87 Driving
► To lock the steering column, turn the steering Key left in Starting wheel until it locks. When opening the driver's door, an alert message is displayed, accompanied by an To facilitate unlocking of the steering audible signal, to remind you that the key is column, it is recommended that the still in the ignition switch at position 1 (Stop). wheels be returned to the straight ahead If the key has been left in the ignition switch position before switching off the engine. at position 2 (Ignition on), the ignition will be switched off automatically after one hour. Never switch off the ignition before the To switch the ignition back on, turn the key complete immobilisation of the vehicle. to position 1 (Stop), then back to position 2 With the engine off, the braking and steering (Ignition on).
assistance systems are also cut off - risk of loss of control of the vehicle! ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever Starting / Switching off the in neutral and depress the clutch pedal fully. Check that the parking brake is correctly ► With an automatic gearbox, select mode P applied, particularly on sloping ground. engine with Keyless Entry or N and press the brake pedal. When leaving the vehicle, keep the key in and Starting ► Press the "START/STOP" button while your possession and lock the vehicle. maintaining pressure on the pedal until the The electronic key must be present in the engine starts. For Diesel engines, when the temperature is Energy economy mode passenger compartment. For versions equipped with Proximity Keyless below zero and/or the engine is cold, starting After the engine has stopped (position 1. Stop), Entry and Starting, the electronic key is also will only occur once the preheater warning lamp for a maximum combined duration of about thirty detected in the boot. is off. minutes, you can still use functions such as the If it is not detected, a message is displayed. If this warning lamp comes on after audio and telematics system, courtesy lamps, Move the electronic key so that the engine pressing the "START/STOP" button: windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, can be started or switched off. ► Keep the pedal fully depressed and do not etc. If there is still a problem, refer to the "Key press the "START/STOP" button again until the For more information on Energy not detected - Back-up starting or Back-up engine is running. economy mode, refer to the switch-off" section. If one of the starting conditions is not met, a corresponding section. message is displayed. In some circumstances, a message indicates that it is necessary to turn the steering wheel
88 Driving while pressing the "START/STOP" button to Never leave your vehicle with the accompanied by the display of a warning assist unlocking of the steering column. electronic key still inside. message. 6 With petrol engines, after a cold start, preheating the catalytic converter can Starting/Switching off the Switching on the ignition cause noticeable engine vibrations for electric motor without starting the engine
anything up to 2 minutes while stationary with the engine running (accelerated idle speed). Starting The drive selector must be in mode P. If the engine stalls, release the clutch ► Fully depress the brake pedal and briefly pedal and push it all the way down again, press the "START/STOP" button. the engine will restart automatically. ► Keep your foot on the brake pedal until the READY indicator lamp comes on and an audible signal is emitted, indicating that the vehicle is Switching off ready to drive. ► Immobilise the vehicle, with the engine at ► With your foot on the brake, press the idle. "Unlock" button and select mode D/B or R. ► With a manual gearbox, ideally put the gear ► Release the brake pedal, then accelerate. With the electronic key in the passenger lever into neutral. On starting, the instrument panel lights up and compartment, pressing the “START/STOP” ► With an automatic gearbox, ideally select the power indicator needle or cursor moves button, without pressing any of the pedals, mode P or N. to the "neutral" position. The steering column allows the ignition to be switched on without ► Press the "START/STOP" button.. automatically unlocks (you may hear a sound starting the engine. In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn and feel the steering wheel move). ► Press this button again to switch off the the steering wheel to lock the steering column. Switching off ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked. If the vehicle is not immobilised, the ► Press the "START/STOP" button. Key not detected engine will not switch off. Before exiting the vehicle, check that: – The drive selector is in mode P. Back-up starting With the engine off, the braking and – The READY indicator lamp is off. A back-up reader is fitted to the steering column, steering assistance systems are also cut If the driver's door is opened while the to enable the engine to be started if the system off - risk of loss of control of the vehicle! required conditions for stopping are not fails to detect the key in the recognition zone, or satisfied, an audible signal is emitted, if the battery in the electronic key is discharged.
89 Driving
appears in the instrument panel when closing a When driving the vehicle, if this warning door or trying to switch off the engine. lamp and the STOP warning lamp come ► To confirm the instruction to switch off the on, accompanied by an audible signal and the engine, press the "START/STOP" button for display of a message, this means that the approximately 5 seconds. parking brake is still applied or has not been fully In the event of a fault with the electronic key, released. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
workshop. ► Place and hold the remote control against the Application reader. ► Pull the parking brake lever up to immobilise ► With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever Emergency switch-off the vehicle. In the event of an emergency only, the engine in neutral, then fully depress the clutch pedal. When parking on a slope, turn the can be switched off without conditions (even ► With an automatic gearbox or a drive wheels against the kerb, apply the when driving). selector, select mode P, then fully depress the parking brake, engage a gear and switch off ► Press the "START/STOP" button for about brake pedal. the ignition. ► Press the "START/STOP" button. 5 seconds. The engine starts. In this case, the steering column locks as soon as the vehicle stops. Back-up switch-off Electric parking brake Manual parking brake In automatic mode, this system applies the parking brake when the engine is switched off and releases it when the vehicle moves off. Release
If the electronic key is not detected or is no ► Pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press At any time, with the engine running: longer in the recognition zone, a message the release button, then lower the lever fully. ► to apply the parking brake, briefly pull the control lever;
90 Driving
► to release it, brieflypush the control lever Manual operation while pressing the brake pedal. 6 Automatic mode is activated by default. Manual release With the ignition on or engine running: Indicator lamp ► Depress the brake pedal. This indicator lamp comes on on the ► While maintaining pressure on the brake
instrument panel and on the control lever pedal, briefly push the control lever. to confirm the application of the parking brake, Before leaving the vehicle, check that the If you push the control lever without accompanied by the display of the message parking brake is applied: the indicator pressing the brake pedal, the parking "Parking brake applied". lamps on the instrument panel and the control brake is not released and a message is The indicator lamp goes out to confirm the lever must be on fixed. displayed. release of the parking brake, accompanied If the parking brake is not applied, there is an by the display of the message "Parking brake audible signal and a message is displayed on released". opening the driver's door. Manual application The indicator lamp flashes in response to a With the vehicle stationary: manual request to apply or release the brake. Never leave a child alone inside the ► Pull briefly on the control lever. In the event of a battery failure, the vehicle, as they could release the parking The control lever indicator lamp flashes to electric parking brake will not operate. brake. confirm the application request. As a safety measure, with a manual gearbox, if the parking brake is not applied, immobilise When the vehicle is parked: on a Automatic operation the vehicle by engaging a gear. steep slope, heavily loaded or during As a safety measure, with an automatic towing Automatic release gearbox or drive selector, if the parking brake With a manual gearbox, turn the wheels First ensure that the engine is running and the is not applied, immobilise the vehicle by toward the pavement and engage a gear. driver's door is properly closed. placing the supplied chock against one of the With an automatic gearbox or a drive selector, The electric parking brake gradually releases wheels. turn the wheels toward the pavement and automatically as the vehicle moves off. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified select mode P. With a manual gearbox workshop. When towing, the vehicle is approved for ► Fully depress the clutch pedal and engage
parking on slopes of up to 12%. first gear or reverse. ► Depress the accelerator pedal and release the clutch pedal. With an automatic gearbox
91 Driving
► Depress the brake pedal. Special cases With an automatic gearbox or drive ► Select mode D, M or R. selector, while mode N is selected, ► Release the brake pedal and depress the Immobilising the vehicle with the opening the driver’s door triggers an audible accelerator pedal. engine running signal. It stops when the driver's door closes With a drive selector again. To immobilise the vehicle with the engine ► Depress the brake pedal. running, briefly pull the control lever. ► Select mode D, B or R. Deactivating automatic ► Release the brake pedal and depress the Parking the vehicle with the brake accelerator pedal. released operation With an automatic gearbox or drive In some situations, for example when it is In very cold conditions (ice), applying the selector, if the brake does not release extremely cold or when towing (e.g. caravan, parking brake is not recommended. automatically, check that the front doors are breakdown), it may be necessary to deactivate To immobilise the vehicle, engage a gear or correctly closed. automatic operation of the system. place the chocks against one of the wheels. ► Start the engine. ► Use the control lever to apply the parking When stationary with the engine running, Immobilising the vehicle with the parking brake, if it is released. do not depress the accelerator pedal brake released ► Take your foot fully off the brake pedal. unnecessarily. Risk of parking brake release. ► Switch off the engine. ► Hold the control lever pressed in the release ► Switch on the ignition again, without starting direction for between 10 and a maximum of 15 the engine. Automatic application seconds. ► Release the parking brake manually by With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake ► Release the control lever. pushing the control lever while keeping your foot ► Depress and hold the brake pedal. is automatically applied when the engine is on the brake pedal. . ► Pull the control lever in the “Application” switched off ► Switch off the ignition. direction for 2 seconds. It is not applied automatically if the With an automatic gearbox or drive This indicator lamp on the instrument engine stalls or enters STOP mode selector, mode P is automatically panel comes on to confirm deactivation of of Stop & Start. selected when the ignition is switched off. The the automatic functions. wheels are blocked. ► Release the control lever and the brake With automatic operation, it is also For more information on Changing to free- pedal. possible to manually apply or release the wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. From now on, the parking brake can only be parking brake using the control lever. applied and released manually using the control lever.
92 Driving
Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic 5-speed manual gearbox Failure to follow this instruction could operation (confirmed by the indicator lamp on the cause permanent damage to the gearbox 6 rd th instrument panel going off). Engaging reverse gear (inadvertent engagement of 3 or 4 gear). Emergency braking Engaging reverse gear
In the event of a fault with the brake pedal or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver taken ill, driver under instruction), a continuous pull on the electric parking brake control lever will brake the vehicle. Braking continues while the control lever is pulled, and ceases when the control lever is released. ► Fully depress the clutch pedal. The ABS and DSC systems stabilise the vehicle ► Push the gear lever fully to the right, then during emergency braking. backwards. If emergency braking malfunctions, the message "Parking brake control faulty" will be displayed Only engage reverse gear when the on the instrument panel. vehicle is stationary with the engine at If the ABS and DSC systems idle. ► Raise the ring under the knob and move the malfunction, indicated by lighting gear selector to the left, then forwards. one or both warning lamps on the instrument As a safety precaution and to facilitate Only engage reverse gear when the panel, the vehicle’s stability is no longer ensured. starting the engine: vehicle is stationary with the engine at In this event, the driver must keep the vehicle – Always select neutral. idle. stable by successively pulling and releasing the – Depress the clutch pedal. control lever, repeating the operation until the vehicle has stopped. As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting the engine: 6-speed manual gearbox – Always select neutral. – Press the clutch pedal. Engaging 5th or 6th gear ► Move the gear selector fully to the right to engage 5th or 6th gear.
93 Driving
Automatic gearbox (EAT6) M. + / - Manual operation If position N is selected inadvertently ► To shift up/down through the gears, while driving, allow the engine to return 6-speed automatic gearbox which offers a choice push the control backwards/forwards. to idle, then select position D to accelerate. between the comfort of automatic operation or manual gear changing. When the engine is running at idle with Two driving modes are available: Information displayed on the brakes released, if position R, D or M – Automatic operation for electronic the instrument panel is selected, the vehicle moves even without management of the gears by the gearbox. When a position is selected in the grate with the the accelerator being pressed. – Manual operation for sequential changing of gear selector, the corresponding indicator lamp Never leave children unattended in the the gears by the driver. lights up on the instrument panel. vehicle when the engine is running. Gear selector module P. Park When carrying out maintenance with the R. Reverse engine running, apply the parking brake and N. Neutral select position P. D. Drive (automatic operation) 1...6. Gear engaged during manual operation -. Instruction not processed in manual Automatic operation operation ► Select position D for automatic changing of the six gears. The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive P. Park Starting the vehicle mode, without any intervention on the part of the – Vehicle immobilised, parking brake ► With your foot on the brake pedal, driver. It continuously selects the most suitable applied or released. select position P or N. gear according to the driving style, the road – Engine starting. ► Start the engine. profile and the load in the vehicle. R. Reverse If the conditions are not met, you will hear an For maximum acceleration without touching the – Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle audible signal, accompanied by the display of a selector, press the accelerator fully down (kick- stationary, engine at idle. message. down). The gearbox changes down automatically N. Neutral ► With the engine running, press the brake or holds the gear selected until the maximum – Vehicle immobilised, parking brake pedal. engine speed is reached. applied. ► Release the parking brake, unless it is When braking, the gearbox changes down – Engine starting. programmed to automatic mode. automatically to provide effective engine braking. D. Automatic operation ► Select position R, D or M. If you release the accelerator sharply, the ► Gradually release the brake pedal. gearbox will not shift to a higher gear for safety The vehicle moves off immediately. reasons.
94 Driving
Never select position N while the vehicle This symbol is displayed if a gear is not There is a risk of damaging the gearbox: is moving. engaged correctly (gear selector between – If the accelerator and brake pedals are 6 Never select positions P or R unless the two positions). pressed simultaneously. vehicle is completely stationary. – In the event of a battery failure, forcing the Switching the vehicle off selector from position P to another position. Before switching off the engine, it is possible to Manual operation engage position P or N to place the gearbox in To limit fuel consumption during an neutral. Automatic gearbox (EAT8) In both cases, apply the parking brake to extended standstill with the engine Automatic 8 speed gearbox with a push selector. immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed running (for example, in a traffic jam), set the It also offers a manual mode with gear changes to automatic mode. gear selector to N and apply the parking via control paddles situated behind the steering brake. If the selector is not in position P, when wheel. the driver's door is opened or ► Selecting position M enables sequential approximately 45 seconds after the ignition is shifting between the six gears. Gearbox selector positions switched off, an audible signal sounds and a ► Push backwards to shift up a gear. P. Park message appears. ► Push forwards to shift down a gear. For parking the vehicle: the front wheels are ► Return the gear selector to ; the audible The gearbox only changes gear if the road P blocked. signal stops and the message disappears. speed and engine speed permit; apart from R. Reverse gear this condition, the rules for automatic operation N. Neutral temporarily apply. Malfunction For moving the vehicle with the ignition off, or disappears, and the gears engaged to allow it to free-wheel. D In the event of a malfunction, this warning appear in succession on the instrument For more information on Changing to free- lamp comes on and a message is panel. wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. displayed, when the ignition is switched on. If the engine speed is too low or too high, the D. Driving in automatic mode In this case, the gearbox goes into back-up selected gear flashes for a few seconds, then the The gearbox manages gear changes mode and is locked in 3rd gear. It is possible to gearactually activated is displayed. according to the style of driving, the road feel a significant jolt (without risk for the gearbox) It is possible to change from position D to profile and the vehicle load. while changing from P to R and from N to R. position at any time. M. Driving in manual mode M Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h), local speed When the vehicle is stationary or moving The driver changes gear using the steering- restrictions permitting. very slowly, the gearbox selects gear mounted controls. M1 Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a automatically. qualified workshop.
95 Driving
Push selector
► Pull the "+" or "-" paddle towards you and release to shift up or down a gear, respectively. ► Move the selector by pressing it forwards
(N or R) or rearwards (N or D) once or twice, Information displayed on A. Button P passing the point of resistance if necessary. To put the gearbox into Park mode. The push selector returns to its initial position the instrument panel B. Unlock button when released. When the ignition is switched on, the gearbox To unlock the gearbox and come out of P or For example, to change from P to R, either status is displayed on the instrument panel: to change to R, with the foot on the brake push forwards twice without passing the point of P : Park. pedal. resistance or push just once, passing the point R : Reverse. Press and hold this button before pushing the of resistance: N : Neutral. selector. – In the first case, the gearbox goes from P to N, D1...D8 : Automatic mode. C. Button M then from N to R. M1...M8 : Manual mode. To change from mode D to permanent – In the second case, the gearbox goes directly - : Instruction not processed in manual mode. manual mode. from P to R. If the driver's door is opened with the ignition on, (Depending on version: with Full Park Assist, a message is displayed, prompting you to set the the manual mode is accessed via the DRIVE Steering-mounted controls gearbox to mode P. MODE control) In mode M or D, the steering-mounted control D. Gearbox status indicators (P, R, N, D) paddles can be used to change gear manually. Operation
They cannot be used to select neutral or to With the engine running, if it is necessary to engage or disengage reverse gear. press the brake pedal and/or the Unlock button
96 Driving in order to change mode, an alert message is ► Depress the brake pedal, then press the sound. It will stop when you close the driver's displayed in the instrument panel. Unlock button. door again. 6 Only appropriate attempted changes of mode ► While maintaining the presses, select are accepted. mode R. Special aspects of automatic mode Permanent manual mode With the engine running and the brakes The gearbox selects the gear that offers released, if R, D or M is selected, the Entering the mode: optimum performance, taking account of the vehicle moves off, even without pressing the With EAT8 without Full Park Assist button: outside temperature, the road profile, the vehicle accelerator pedal. ► With mode D initially selected. load and the driving style. ► Press button M; the green indicator lamp in For maximum acceleration, press the accelerator Never press the accelerator and brake the button comes on. fully down (kick-down). The gearbox changes pedals at the same time - risk of damage With EAT8 and Full Park Assist button: down automatically or holds the selected gear to the gearbox! ► Press the DRIVE MODE control. until the maximum engine speed is reached. In the event of a battery failure, you must ► Select "Manual" mode, which is displayed on Steering mounted controls allow the driver to place the chocks supplied with the vehicle the instrument panel. temporarily select a gear, if the vehicle speed tools against one of the wheels to immobilise Exiting the mode: and engine speed conditions permit. the vehicle. ► Push forwards once to return to D. or Special aspects of manual mode Unlocking the gearbox ► Press button M; the indicator lamp in the The gearbox only changes from one gear to button goes off. – From mode P: another if the vehicle speed and engine speed or ► Fully depress the brake pedal. conditions permit. ► Select another mode using the DRIVE MODE ► Press the Unlock button. control. ► While continuing to press the brake pedal Starting the vehicle and the Unlock button, select another mode. Switching off the ignition From mode P: ► Fully depress the brake pedal. – From neutral N, at a speed below 3 mph To switch off the ignition, the vehicle must be ► Start the engine. (5 km/h): stationary. ► Fully depress the brake pedal. ► Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, Changing to free-wheeling ► While continuing to depress the brake press the Unlock button. pedal, select another mode. For more information on Changing to free- ► Push once or twice rearwards to select wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. the automatic mode D, or forwards to engage Engaging reverse gear reverse R. If you open the driver's door while mode ► Slow down until you come to a stop. From neutral N: N is engaged, an audible signal will ► Fully depress the brake pedal.
97 Driving
► Start the engine. Gearbox malfunction Drive selector (Electric) ► Maintaining pressure on the brake pedal, This warning lamp comes on, push rearwards to select the automatic mode , The drive selector is a pulse selector with a D accompanied by an audible signal and the or forwards, while pressing the button to regenerative braking function. Unlock display of a message. engage reverse . The drive selector provides traction control R Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Then, from or : based on the driving style, the road profile and D R Do not drive faster than 62 mph (100 km/h), ► Release the brake pedal. the vehicle load. keeping to the speed limit. ► Accelerate gradually to automatically release With regenerative braking activated, it also The gearbox switches to back-up mode: mode D the electric parking brake. manages engine braking when the accelerator is locked in third gear, the steering-mounted The vehicle moves off immediately. pedal is released. control paddles are inoperative, mode is no M P. Park With an automatic gearbox, never try to longer available. You may feel a significant jolt For parking the vehicle: the front wheels start the engine by pushing the vehicle. on engaging reverse gear. This will not damage are blocked. the gearbox. R. Reverse gear Stopping the vehicle N. Neutral Selector malfunction For moving the vehicle with the ignition off Whatever the state of the gearbox, when the Minor malfunction and allowing it to free-wheel. ignition is switched off, mode P is engaged For more information on Changing to automatically and immediately. This warning lamp comes on, free-wheeling, refer to the corresponding However, in mode N, mode P will be engaged accompanied by the display of a message section. after a delay of 5 seconds (allowing for the and an audible signal. D/B. Automatic forward drive (D) or automatic process of putting the vehicle into free-wheeling Drive cautiously and visit a PEUGEOT dealer or forward drive with regenerative braking (B) mode). a qualified workshop. Check that mode P has been engaged and In certain cases, the selector indicator lamps that the electric parking brake was applied may no longer come on, but the gearbox state is Information displayed on automatically; if not, apply it manually. still displayed on the instrument panel. the instrument panel The corresponding indicator lamps in the Major malfunction When the ignition is switched on, the drive selector and the electric parking brake This warning lamp comes on, selector status is displayed on the instrument control lever must be on, as well as those in the accompanied by the display of a panel: instrument panel. message. P : Park. : Reverse. Stop as soon as it is safe to do so, away R : Neutral. from traffic, and call a PEUGEOT dealer N : Automatic forward drive. or a qualified workshop. D
98 Driving
B : Automatic forward drive with regenerative For example, to change from P to R, either Driving modes braking activated. push forwards twice without passing the point of 6 resistance or push just once, passing the point The number and type of driving modes available Operation of resistance: depend on the vehicle’s engine and equipment. – In the first case, the selector goes from P to N, Driving modes are selected using the following control:
then from N to R. – In the second case, the selector goes directly from P to R.
Regenerative braking The regenerative braking function emulates engine braking, slowing the vehicle with no need to depress the brake pedal. The vehicle slows more quickly when the driver releases the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is released,
mechanical energy is recovered and used to Pressing the control displays the modes on the partially recharge the battery.
instrument panel. ► While in mode D/B, pushing the pulse With an electric motor, you cannot select a mode A. Button P selector backwards activates/deactivates the if the READY lamp is off. To put the gearbox into Park mode. function. When the message disappears, the selected B. Unlock button The D on the instrument panel is replaced with mode is activated and remains indicated on the To unlock the selector and come out of P or a B. instrument panel (except NORMAL mode). change to R, with the foot on the brake pedal. The state of the function is not saved when the Whenever the ignition is switched on, NORMAL Press and hold this button before pushing the ignition is switched off. selector. mode is selected by default. C. Selector state indicators (R, N, D/B) If the battery is almost fully charged, the ECO braking effect when the accelerator pedal This mode reduces fuel consumption, but ► Move the selector by pushing it forwards (N is released may be limited. or R) or backwards (N or D/B) once or twice, restricts the performance of the heating and passing the point of resistance if necessary. air conditioning systems, without however The push selector returns to its initial position deactivating them. when released. Free-wheeling in ECO mode: depending on version, with the EAT8 gearbox, moving into
99 Driving
"free-wheeling" is encouraged to slow the vehicle – the driver’s door is closed. – provided you are in mode D or M with an down without using engine braking. You can automatic gearbox. Do not leave the vehicle while it is being save fuel by anticipating the need to slow down – provided you are in mode D or B with a drive held temporarily by hill start assist. and lifting your foot fully off the accelerator pedal. selector.
If someone needs to get out of the vehicle COMFORT with the engine running, apply the parking Allows more comfortable driving and softer brake manually. After that, ensure that the suspension. parking brake indicator lamp and the indicator NORMAL lamp P in the electric parking brake control lever are on fixed. Restores the vehicle’s original settings.
SPORT The hill start assist function cannot be Enables more dynamic driving, acting on the deactivated. However, use of the parking
power steering, accelerator and gear changes brake to immobilise the vehicle interrupts its with an automatic gearbox and the possibility of operation. On a descending slope, with the vehicle displaying the vehicle’s dynamic settings on the stationary and reverse gear engaged, the instrument panel. vehicle is held for a short time when you Operation release the brake pedal. MANUAL Permanent "Manual" mode with an automatic Malfunction gearbox and Full Park Assist. These warning lamps come on in Enables manual gear changing using the the event of a malfunction. steering-mounted paddles. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. Hill start assist This system keeps your vehicle briefly stationary Gear efficiency indicator
(for approximately 2 seconds) when making a hill This system helps reduce fuel consumption by start, while you transfer your foot from the brake On an ascending slope, with the vehicle recommending the most appropriate gear. pedal to the accelerator pedal. stationary, the vehicle is held for a short time This system is only active when: when you release the brake pedal: – the vehicle is completely stationary, with your – provided you are in first gear or neutral with a foot on the brake pedal, manual gearbox. – certain slope conditions are met,
100 Driving
Operation queues, etc.). The engine restarts automatically any risk of injury caused by the engine - START mode - as soon as the driver wishes to restarting automatically. 6 Depending on the driving situation and the move off again. vehicle's equipment, the system may advise Primarily designed for urban use, the function skipping one or more gears. is intended to reduce fuel consumption and Gear engagement recommendations are only exhaust emissions as well as the noise level optional. In fact, the configuration of the road, when stationary. the traffic density and safety remain determining The function does not affect the functionalities of Driving on flooded roads factors when choosing the best gear. Therefore, the vehicle, in particular the braking. Before entering into a flooded area, it is the driver remains responsible for deciding strongly recommended that you deactivate whether or not to follow the system’s advice. Deactivation/Reactivation the Stop & Start system. This function cannot be deactivated. The function is activated by default when the For more information on Driving With an automatic gearbox, the system is ignition is switched on. recommendations, particularly on flooded only active in manual operation. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle roads, refer to the corresponding section. touch screen menu. The information appears in the instrument A message in the instrument panel confirms the panel in the form of an arrow and the change of status. Operation recommended gear. When the function is deactivated, if the engine Main conditions for operation The system adapts its gear shift was in standby, it restarts immediately. – The driver’s door must be closed. recommendation according to the driving Associated indicator lamps – The driver's seat belt must be fastened. conditions (slope, load, etc.) and the driver’s Function activated. – The state of charge of the battery must be requirements (power, acceleration, braking, sufficient. etc.). Function deactivated or malfunction. – The temperature of the engine must be within The system never suggests: its nominal operating range. – engaging first gear, – The outside temperature must be between – engaging reverse. Opening the bonnet 0°C and 35°C. Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid Putting the engine into standby Stop & Start (STOP mode) The Stop & Start function puts the engine The engine automatically goes into standby temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during as soon as the driver indicates the intention of phases when the vehicle is stopped (red lights, stopping.
101 Driving
– With a manual gearbox: with the gear lever in Engine restarting (START mode) The vehicle stalls in STOP mode neutral and the clutch pedal released. The engine automatically restarts as soon as the All of the instrument panel warning lamps come – With an automatic gearbox: with the brake driver indicates the intention of moving off again. on if there is a fault. pedal depressed until the vehicle stops or the ► With a manual gearbox: with the clutch ► Switch off the ignition then start the engine gear selector in position N, with the vehicle pedal fully depressed. again with the key or the "START/STOP" button. stopped. ► With an automatic gearbox: The Stop & Start system requires a 12 V Time counter • With the selector in position D or M: with the battery of specific technology and brake pedal released. A time counter adds up the time spent in standby specification. • With the selector in position N and the brake during a journey. It resets to zero every time the All work concerning the battery must be pedal released: with the selector at D or M. ignition is switched on. carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a • With the selector in position P and the brake qualified workshop. Special cases: pedal depressed: with the selector at R, N, The engine will not go into standby if all of the D or M. conditions for operation are not met and in the • Reverse gear engaged. Under-inflation detection following cases. Special cases – Steep slope (ascending or descending). This system automatically checks the pressures – Vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph (10 km/h) The engine restarts automatically if all the of the tyres while driving. since the last engine start (with the key or the operating conditions are met again and in the It compares the information given by the wheel following cases. “START/STOP” button). speed sensors with reference values, which – Needed to maintain a comfortable temperature – With a manual gearbox: vehicle speed must be reinitialised every time the tyre in the passenger compartment. exceeds 2.5 mph (4 km/h), pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. – Demisting active. – With an automatic gearbox, in mode N, vehicle The system triggers an alert as soon as it In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes speed exceeds 0.6 mph (1 km/h). detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one or for a few seconds, then goes off. In these cases, this indicator lamp flashes more tyres. for a few seconds, then goes off. After the engine has restarted, STOP Under-inflation detection does not mode is not available until the vehicle Malfunctions replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. has reached a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h). In the event of a malfunction, this warning This system does not avoid the need to lamp flashes for a few moments, then regularly check the tyre pressures (including During parking manoeuvres, STOP mode remains on, accompanied by an onscreen the spare wheel) as well as before a long is not available for a few seconds after message. journey. coming out of reverse gear or turning the Have the vehicle checked by a PEUGEOT steering wheel. dealer or a qualified workshop.
102 Driving
Driving with under-inflated tyres, particularly audible signal and, depending on equipment, the vehicle and conform to the values written on in adverse conditions (heavy load, high display of a message. the tyre pressure label. 6 speed, long journey): ► Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive Check the pressures of the four tyres before – worsens road-holding. steering movements and avoid sudden braking. performing the reinitialisation. – lengthens braking distances. ► Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do The system does not advise if a pressure is – causes premature wear of the tyres. so. incorrect at the time of reinitialisation. – increases fuel consumption. The loss of pressure detected does not With the vehicle stationary, the always cause visible bulging of the tyre. system is reinitialised via The inflation pressures defined for the Do not rely on just a visual check. the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu.. vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure label. ► Using a compressor, such as the one in Malfunction For more information on the Identification the temporary puncture repair kit, check the These warning lamps come on in markings, refer to the corresponding section. pressures of the four tyres when cold. the event of a malfunction. ► If it is not possible to make this check A message appears, accompanied by an audible immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed. Checking tyre pressures signal. This check should be done when the ► In the event of a puncture, use the In this case, the tyre under-inflation monitoring tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel function is no longer performed. after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) at (depending on equipment). Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT moderate speeds). The alert is kept active until the system is dealer or a qualified workshop. Otherwise, add 0.3 bar to the pressures reinitialised. shown on the label. Driving and manoeuvring Snow chains Reinitialisation aids - General The system does not have to be Reinitialise the system after adjusting one or reinitialised after fitting or removing snow more tyre pressures and after changing one or recommendations chains. more wheels. Driving and manoeuvring aids cannot, in Before reinitialising the system, make any circumstances, replace the need for Under-inflation alert sure that the pressures of the four tyres vigilance on the part of the driver. are correct for the conditions of use of the This is signalled by the fixed illumination The driver must comply with the Highway of this warning lamp, accompanied by an Code, must remain in control of the vehicle in all circumstances and must be able to retake control of it at all times. The driver must adapt
103 Driving
the speed to climactic conditions, traffic and certain types of paint could interfere with the Other cameras the state of the road. operation of the radar. The images from the camera(s)
It is the driver's responsibility to constantly displayed on the touch screen or on the check the traffic, to assess the relative instrument panel may be distorted by the distances and speeds of other vehicles and to relief. anticipate their movements before indicating In the presence of areas in shade, or in
and changing lane. conditions of bright sunlight or inadequate The systems cannot exceed the limits of the lighting, the image may be darkened and with laws of physics. Driving aids camera lower contrast. This camera and its associated functions Obstacles may appear further away than they may be impaired or not work if the windscreen Driving aids actually are. area in front of the camera is dirty, misty, You should hold the steering wheel frosty, covered with snow, damaged or with both hands, always use the interior and Sensors masked by a sticker. exterior rear view mirrors, always keep the The operation of the sensors as well as On versions with camera alone, this message feet close to the pedals and take a break the associated functions may be disturbed indicates to you that the camera is obstructed: every two hours. by sound interference such as that emitted "Driving aids camera: visibility limited, see by noisy vehicles and machinery (e.g. lorries, user guide". pneumatic drills), by the accumulation of Manoeuvring aids In humid and cold weather, demist the snow or dead leaves on the road or in the The driver must always check the windscreen regularly. event of damaged bumpers and mirrors. surroundings of the vehicle before and during Poor visibility (inadequate street lighting, When reverse gear is engaged, an audible the whole manoeuvre, in particular using the heavy rain, thick fog, snowfall), dazzle signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors mirrors. (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, low sun, may be dirty. reflections on a damp road, leaving a tunnel, A front or rear impact to the vehicle can Radar alternating shade and light) can also impair upset the sensors’ settings, which is not The operation of the radar as well as the detection performance. always detected by the system: distance associated functions may be impaired through In the event of a windscreen replacement, measurements may be distorted. the accumulation of dirt (mud, frost, etc.), in contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The sensors do not systematically detect certain difficult weather conditions (very heavy workshop to recalibrate the camera; obstacles that are too low (pavements, studs) rain, snow) or if the bumper is damaged. otherwise, the operation of the associated or too thin (trees, posts, wire fences). If the front bumper is to be repainted, contact driving aids may be disrupted. Certain obstacles located in the sensors’ blind a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop; spots may not be detected or may no longer be detected during the manoeuvre.
104 Driving
Certain materials (fabrics) absorb sound Speed Limit Recognition waves: pedestrians may not be detected. Sign detected Suggested speed 6 and Recommendation (calculated) Maintenance Refer to the General recommendations on the Entry into an Without PEUGEOT Clean the bumpers and door mirrors and use of driving and manoeuvring aids. intersection area Connect Nav the field of vision of the cameras regularly. Example: 10 mph or 20 km/h
When washing your vehicle at high pressure, (depending on direct the spray from at least 30 cm away the units of the
from the radar, sensors and cameras. instrument panel) With PEUGEOT Connect Nav Mats Display of the The use of mats not approved by speed in force in the PEUGEOT may interfere with the operation of country in which you the speed limiter or cruise control. This system displays the maximum authorised are driving. To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: speed in the instrument panel, according to ► ensure that the mat is secured correctly, – Certain qualifier plates are detected by the the speed limits in the country in which you are ► never fit one mat on top of another. camera: driving, using: – Speed limit signs detected by the camera. Qualifier plate Display of the Units of speed – Speed limit details from the navigation system detected speed associated Ensure that the units of speed displayed mapping. with the qualifier on the instrument panel (mph or km/h) are plate those for the country you are driving in. You should update your navigation If this is not the case, when the vehicle is mapping regularly in order to receive Speed limit in rain If the wiper control stationary, set the display to the required accurate speed limit information from the Examples: stalk is in the
units of speed so that it complies with what is system. "intermittent wipe" authorised locally. or "automatic wipe" – Signs indicating an intersection area detected In case of doubt, contact a PEUGEOT dealer position (in order by the camera: or a qualified workshop. to activate the rain sensor): 68 mph (110 km/h) (for example)
105 Driving
The automatic reading of road signs is a Qualifier plate Display of the Qualifier plate Display of the driving aid system and does not always detected speed associated detected speed associated display speed limits correctly. with the qualifier with the qualifier The speed limit signs present on the road plate plate always take priority over the display by the Speed limit if If an approved towing Speed limit in snow If the exterior system. towing device is fixed to the Example: temperature is below The system is designed to detect signs that vehicle: 3 °C: conform to the Vienna Convention on road 56 mph (90 km/h) 19 mph (30 km/h) signs. (for example) (for example) with a "snowflake" Speed limit 43 mph (70 km/h) Specific speed limits, such as those for symbol applicable over a (for example) heavy goods vehicles, are not displayed. certain distance Speed limit at 19 mph (30 km/h) The display of the speed limit in the Example: certain times (for example) instrument panel is updated as you pass Example: with a "clock" symbol a speed limit sign intended for cars (light vehicles).
Speed limit for 56 mph (90 km/h) Activation / Deactivation vehicles whose (for example) The units for the speed limit (mph or By default, the system is automatically activated gross vehicle km/h) depend on the country you are at every engine start. weight or gross driving in. It is set via the / train weight is less Driving Vehicle This should be taken into account so that you touch screen menu. than 3.5 tonnes observe the speed limit. For the system to operate correctly when
you change country, the units for speed in the instrument panel must be those for the country you are driving in.
106 Driving
Information displayed on Recommendation 6 the instrument panel
In the case of suggested maximum speeds, the first time the vehicle exceeds the suggested
speed by more than 3 mph (5 km/h) (e.g. 59 In addition to Speed Limit Recognition and mph (95 km/h)), the speed is displayed flashing Recommendation, the driver can select the for 10 seconds. speed displayed as a speed setting for the speed limiter or cruise control using the speed limiter or Operating limits cruise control memorisation button. The system does not take account of reduced If rain is detected, the system will propose to the speed limits, especially those imposed in the driver a speed setting lower than the speed read/
following cases: obtained from the mapping in order to adapt to 1. Detected speed limit indication – Atmospheric pollution. the weather conditions (example: on a motorway, or – Towing. the proposed speed will be 68 mph (110 km/h) 2. End of speed limit indication – Driving with a space-saver type spare wheel instead of 81 mph (130 km/h).
or snow chains fitted. – Tyre repaired using the temporary puncture For more information on the Speed repair kit. limiter, Cruise control or Adaptive – Young drivers. cruise control, refer to the corresponding sections.
The system may not display the speed limit if it The system is active but is not detecting speed does not detect a speed limit sign within a preset limit information. period and in the following situations: Steering mounted controls – Road signs that are obstructed, non-standard, damaged or bent. – Obsolete or incorrect maps.
On detecting speed limit information, the system displays the value.
1. Speed limiter/cruise control mode selection
107 Driving
2. Memorise the speed setting Depending on the road conditions, several The actual road signs always take priority speeds may be displayed. over the display from the system. ► Press button 2once to save the suggested The signs must comply with the Vienna Information displayed on the speed value. Convention on road signs. instrument panel A message is displayed to confirm the request.
► Press button 2again to confirm and save the Activation / Deactivation new speed setting. The display then reverts to its previous state. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu. 3. Speed limit indication 4. Speed memorisation prompt Extended Traffic Sign 5. Current speed setting Recognition Speed limiter Refer to the General recommendations on the Refer to the General recommendations on the Memorising the speed use of driving and manoeuvring aids. use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
This system prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver (speed setting). The speed limiter is switched on manually.
The minimum speed setting is 19 mph (30 km/h). This additional system recognises these road The speed setting remains in the system ► Switch on the speed limiter/cruise control. signs and displays them in the instrument panel memory when the ignition is switched off. The speed limiter/cruise control information is if the appropriate display mode is selected. displayed. One-way street: if you start driving the wrong Upon detecting a sign suggesting a new speed way down a one-way street, an alert message, setting, the system displays the value and including the sign's symbol, is displayed in the "MEM" flashes for a few seconds, prompting you instrument panel (request to check the traffic to save it as the new speed setting. direction). If there is a difference of less than 6 mph Other signs: when approaching one of these (9 km/h) between the speed setting and signs, the sign’s symbol is displayed in the the speed displayed by the Speed Limit instrument panel. Recognition and Recommendation, the "MEM" symbol is not displayed.
108 Driving
Steering-mounted control Information displayed on Adjusting the limit speed 6 the instrument panel setting You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in
order to set the speed.
To modify the limit speed setting based on the vehicle’s current speed: ► Briefly press button 2 or 3 to change the value in steps of + or - 1 mph (1.6 km/h). ► Press and hold button 2 or 3 to change the
value in steps of + or - 5 mph (8 km/h). 6. Speed limiter on/pause To modify the cruise speed setting based on the 7. Speed limiter mode selected speed suggested by the Speed Limit Recognition 8. Programmed speed value and Recommendation, as shown on the 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit instrument panel: recognition and recommendation system ► Press button once; a message is displayed 5 (depending on version) 1. ON (LIMIT position) / OFF to confirm the memorisation request. 2. Reduce the speed setting ► Press button 5 again to save the suggested 3. Increase the speed setting Switching on/pausing speed. The speed is immediately shown on the 4. Pause / resume speed limiter with the speed ► Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "LIMIT" position to instrument panel as the new speed setting. setting previously stored select the speed limiter; the function is paused. 5. Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit ► If you are satisfied with the limit speed setting Recognition and Recommendation (MEM (most recent speed setting programmed in the Temporarily exceeding the display) system), press button 4 to switch the speed speed setting limiter on. ► Press the accelerator pedal down fully.
For more information on the Speed Limit ► Pressing button again temporarily pauses Recognition and Recommendation, refer to 4 the corresponding section. the function. An audible warning will sound if the vehicle's speed exceeds the speed
setting for an extended period. The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and the displayed speed setting flashes.
109 Driving
► Release the accelerator pedal to return to Malfunction Exceeding the programmed speed below the programmed speed. setting When the limit speed is exceeded but this is not The speed setting can be exceeded due to action by the driver (in case of a steep temporarily by pressing the accelerator slope, for example), an audible signal triggers pedal (the programmed speed flashes).
immediately. To return to the speed setting, release the accelerator pedal (when this speed is On a steep descent or in the event of Dashes are displayed (flashing, initially, then reached again, the display of the speed stops sharp acceleration, the speed limiter will fixed) in the event of a speed limiter malfunction. flashing). not be able to prevent the vehicle from Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT exceeding the speed setting. dealer or a qualified workshop. Brake if necessary to control the speed of Operating limits your vehicle. Never use the system in the following Cruise control - particular situations: recommendations – In an urban area with the risk of pedestrians crossing the road. For the safety of everyone, only use the – In heavy traffic (except versions with the cruise control where the driving Stop & Go function).
conditions allow running at a constant speed – On winding or steep roads. Once the speed of the vehicle returns to the and keeping an adequate safety distance. – On slippery or flooded roads. programmed setting, the speed limiter functions Remain vigilant when the cruise control is – In poor weather conditions. again: the display of the speed setting becomes activated. If you hold one of the speed setting – Driving on a speed circuit. fixed again. modification buttons, a very rapid change in – Driving on a rolling road. the speed of your vehicle may occur. – When using snow chains, non-slip covers Switching off When descending a steep hill, the cruise or studded tyres. ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 to the "OFF" position: control system cannot prevent the vehicle the display of information on the speed limiter from exceeding the set speed. Brake if disappears. necessary to control the speed of your Cruise control vehicle. On steep climbs or when towing, the set Refer to the General recommendations on the speed may not be reached or maintained. use of driving and manoeuvring aids and to Cruise control - particular recommendations. This system automatically keeps the vehicle’s speed at the cruise value
110 Driving programmed by the driver (speed setting), 2. Activate cruise control at the current speed / Switching on/pausing without using the accelerator pedal. 6 decrease speed setting ► Turn thumbwheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position Cruise control is manually. switched on 3. Activate cruise control at the current speed / to select cruise control mode; the function is It requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph increase speed setting paused. (40 km/h). 4. Pause / resume cruise control with the speed ► Press button 2 or 3 to activate cruise control With a manual gearbox, third gear or higher must setting previously saved and save a speed setting when the vehicle has be engaged. 5. Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit reached the desired speed; the vehicle’s current With an automatic gearbox, mode or second D Recognition and Recommendation (MEM speed is saved as the speed setting. gear or higher in mode must be engaged. M display) ► Release the accelerator pedal. With a drive selector, mode D or B must be ► Pressing button 4 temporarily pauses the engaged. For more information on the Speed Limit Recognition and Recommendation, refer to function. Cruise control remains active after the corresponding section. ► Pressing button 4 again restores operation of changing gear, regardless of the gearbox the cruise control (ON). type, on engines fitted with Stop & Start. Information displayed on Operation of the cruise control can also the instrument panel be paused temporarily: Switching off the ignition cancels any – by pressing the brake pedal. speed setting. – automatically, if the electronic stability control (ESC) system is triggered. Steering mounted control Modifying the cruise speed setting
Cruise control must be active. 6. Cruise control pause/resume To modify the cruise speed setting, based on the 7. Cruise control mode selection current speed of the vehicle: 8. Speed setting value ► Briefly press button 2 or 3 to change the 9. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit value in steps of + or - 1 mph (km/h). recognition and recommendation system ► Press and hold button 2 or 3 to change the (depending on version) value in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h). 1. ON (CRUISE position) / OFF
111 Driving
Pressing and holding button 2 or Dashes are displayed (flashing, initially, then Adaptive Cruise Control 3 results in a rapid change in the speed fixed) in the event of a cruise control system of the vehicle. malfunction. Refer to the General recommendations on the Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT use of driving and manoeuvring aids and to Cruise control - particular recommendations. As a precaution, we recommend setting dealer or a qualified workshop. This system automatically maintains the speed a cruise speed fairly close to the current of your vehicle at a value which you set (speed speed of your vehicle, to avoid any sudden Drive Assist Plus setting), while keeping a safe distance from the acceleration or deceleration of the vehicle. Only available on versions with the EAT8 vehicle in front (target vehicle), and which has To modify the cruise speed setting using the automatic gearbox and gear selector. been set beforehand by the driver. The system speed suggested by the Speed Limit Recognition This system automatically adjusts the speed and automatically manages the acceleration and and Recommendation shown on the instrument corrects the trajectory, using the Adaptive Cruise deceleration of the vehicle. panel: Control with Stop & Go function in conjunction With the Stop & Go function, the system ► Press button 5 once; a message is displayed with the Lane Positioning Assist. manages the braking until the vehicle comes to a to confirm the memorisation request. These two functions must be activated and in complete stop and the restarting of the vehicle.
► Press button 5 again to save the suggested operation. speed. This system is especially suitable for driving on The speed is immediately shown on the motorways and main roads.
instrument panel as the new speed setting. For more information on Adaptive Cruise Control and Lane Positioning Assist, refer to To do so, it has a camera located at the top of Switching off the corresponding sections. the windscreen and, depending on version, a ► Turn the thumbwheel to the " " position: 1 OFF The system assists the driver by acting radar located in the front bumper. the cruise control information disappears from on the steering, acceleration and braking, the screen. Primarily designed for driving on main within the limits of the laws of physics and the roads and motorways, this system only Malfunction capabilities of the vehicle. Certain road works with moving vehicles driving in the infrastructure elements or vehicles present on same direction as your vehicle. the road may not be properly seen or may be poorly interpreted by the camera and radar, If the driver operates a direction indicator resulting in an unexpected change in to overtake a slower vehicle, the cruise direction, a lack of steering correction and/or control allows the vehicle to temporarily inappropriate management of acceleration or approach the vehicle in front to assist the braking.
112 Driving
overtaking manoeuvre, without ever 5. Use the speed suggested by the Speed Limit Pausing / resumption of cruise control exceeding the speed setting. 6 Recognition and Recommendation ((MEM ► Press 4 or depress the brake pedal. To display) pause cruise control, it is also possible to: Some vehicles present on the road may 6. Display and adjustment of the distance • shift from mode D to N; not be properly seen or may be poorly setting to the vehicle in front • depress the clutch pedal for more than 10 interpreted by the camera and/or radar (e.g. a seconds; lorry), which may lead to a poor assessment Use • press the electric parking brake control. of the distances and lead to the vehicle ► Press 4 to restart cruise control. Cruise inappropriately accelerating or braking. Activating the system (pause) control may have been paused automatically: ► With the engine running, turn the thumbwheel • when the speed of the vehicle goes below 19 1 downwards to the CRUISE position. Cruise mph (30 km/h) with a manual gearbox. Steering mounted control control is ready to operate (grey display). • when the speed of the engine goes below Switching on cruise control and setting 1100 rpm with a manual gearbox. the speed • by triggering of the ESC system. With an EAT8 gearbox or a drive selector, With a manual gearbox, your speed must be following braking that has brought the vehicle to between 19 and 112 mph (30 and 180 km/h). a complete stop, if the traffic conditions do not With an EAT8 automatic gearbox or a drive allow the vehicle to begin moving again within selector, your speed must be between 0 and 3 seconds of stopping, press button 4 or the 112 mph (0 and 180 km/h). accelerator pedal to move off. ► Press button or : the current speed 2 3 If the driver takes no action after the vehicle becomes the speed setting (minimum 19 mph 1. ON (CRUISE position) / OFF has been stopped, the electric parking brake is (30 km/h)) and cruise control is immediately 2. Activation of cruise control at the current applied automatically after about 5 minutes. activated (green display). speed / decrease speed setting ► Press 3 to increase or 2 to decrease the Cruise control remains active after 3. Activation of cruise control at the current speed setting (steps of 5 mph (km/h) if held changing gear, regardless of the gearbox speed / increase speed setting pressed). type. 4. Pausing / resumption of cruise control with the speed setting previously stored Pressing and holding button 2 or When the driver attempts to reactivate Confirmation of the restarting of the vehicle 3 results in a rapid change in the speed cruise control, after the function has been after automatic stop (versions with Stop & Go of the vehicle. function) paused, the message "Activation not possible, unsuitable conditions" is briefly displayed if
113 Driving
reactivation is not possible (safety conditions Information displayed on "Cruise control paused" or "Cruise control not met). suspended" following a brief acceleration the instrument panel by the driver.
Modifying the programmed speed setting "Cruise control active", no vehicle with the Speed Limit Recognition and detected. Recommendation function "Cruise control paused", vehicle detected. ► Press 5 to accept the speed suggested by the function on the instrument panel, then press "Cruise control active", vehicle detected. again to confirm. "Take back control" (orange). To prevent sudden acceleration or
deceleration of the vehicle, select a ► Brake or accelerate, depending on the 7. Vehicle detected by the system (full symbol) speed setting relatively close to the vehicle's context. 8. Cruise control active (colour not grey) current speed. "Take back control" (red). 9. Speed setting value 10. Speed suggested by the Speed Limit Changing the inter-vehicle distance ► Take back control of the vehicle Recognition and Recommendation ► Press 6 to display the distance setting immediately: the system cannot manage the 11. Vehicle held stationary (versions with thresholds ("Distant", "Normal" or "Close"), then current driving situation. automatic gearbox or drive selector) press again to select a threshold. "Activation not possible, conditions
After a few seconds, the option is accepted and unsuitable". The system refuses to will be memorised when the ignition is switched activate cruise control, as the necessary off. conditions are not fulfilled.
Temporarily exceeding the speed setting Stop & Go function ► Fully depress the accelerator pedal. Distance 12. Inter-vehicle distance setting "To move off again, press the monitoring and cruise control are deactivated 13. Position of the vehicle detected by the accelerator pedal or press while acceleration is maintained. "Cruise control system the II button” (button 4). suspended" is displayed. The system has brought the vehicle to a Deactivating the system Messages and alerts complete stop. Within 3 seconds, the vehicle gradually and ► Turn the thumbwheel 1 upwards to the OFF The display of these messages or alerts automatically begins moving again. position. is not sequential. After 3 seconds, the driver must accelerate or press button 4 to move off again.
114 Driving
While the vehicle is immobilised, the Pay particular attention: following recommendations apply: – When motorcycles are present and 6 – Do not open doors. when there are vehicles staggered across the – Do not drop off or pick up passengers. traffic lane. – Do not engage reverse gear. – When entering a tunnel or crossing a bridge.
When moving off again, watch out for cyclists, pedestrians and animals, as – Vehicles in a tight bend. If any of the following malfunctions – When approaching a roundabout.
they may not be detected properly. occurs, do not use the system: – Following an impact on the windscreen close to the camera or on the front bumper Operating limits (versions with radar). Cruise control operates by day and night, in fog – Brake lamps not working. or moderate rainfall.
Certain situations cannot be managed by the If the vehicle has undergone any of the system and require driver intervention. – When following a narrow vehicle. following modifications, do not use the Elements not detected by the system: Reactivate cruise control when conditions permit. system: – Pedestrians, some cyclists, animals. Situations in which the driver is prompted to – Carrying long objects on roof bars. – Stationary vehicles (traffic jam, breakdown, immediately resume control: – Towing. etc.). – Excessively sharp deceleration by the vehicle
– Front end of the vehicle modified (for in front of you.
example by adding long-range headlamps or painting the front bumper).
Active Lane Keeping
– Vehicles crossing your lane. Assist – Vehicles driving in the opposite direction. – When a vehicle cuts in sharply between your Refer to the General recommendations on the Situations in which the driver must pause the vehicle and the one in front. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. cruise control system:
115 Driving
► With the Adaptive Cruise Control with Stop & This position is not necessarily the centre of the Go function activated, press this button. lane. The action is confirmed by: The driver can feel movements in the steering – The indicator lamp in the button lighting up wheel. green. The driver can change the position of the vehicle
– The following symbol being displayed on the at any time, by turning the steering wheel. Using a camera located at the top of the instrument panel. When the driver feels that the vehicle’s position windscreen, the system identifies lane markings The colour of the symbol on the instrument panel is appropriate, whilst keeping hands on the and steers the vehicle inside this lane to keep it depends on the operating status of the system: steering wheel, they must release the pressure in the lateral position chosen by the driver. (grey colour) to let the system resume control of the steering, This function is primarily suitable for driving on One or more operating conditions is not but the vehicle will not be automatically centred motorways and main roads. met; the system is paused. within the lane. Conditions for operation (green colour) All operating conditions are met; the Pausing/Suspending the – Adaptive Cruise Control active. system is active. – Traffic lane marked out by lines on both sides. system (orange colour) – ESC system operational. System malfunction. The driver must act promptly if they – ASR system activated. If the driver no longer wishes to use the system believe that the traffic conditions or the – No trailer detected. for a while, they can deactivate it by pressing the state of the road surface require their – No 'space-saver' spare wheel in use. button again. intervention, by moving the steering wheel to – Vehicle not subject to strong lateral g-forces. The indicator lamp in the button goes off and the temporarily suspend system operation. Any – Direction indicators not activated. symbol disappears from the instrument panel. action on the brake pedal that results in cruise control being paused will also cause the Activation/Deactivation The system status is saved when the
system to be paused. ignition is switched off.
If the system detects that the driver is not
Cruise control holding the wheel firmly enough, it
The driver must hold the steering wheel properly. triggers a series of gradual alerts and then When cruise control is activated, the symbol is deactivates itself if there is no response from displayed in green: by small steering actions, the driver. the system directs the vehicle and keeps it in the
position chosen by the driver, in the traffic lane.
116 Driving
If the function is suspended due to the – Prolonged failure to detect one of the lane limit – Travelling outside the lane limits. prolonged release of the force holding markings. In this case, the active lane departure – Too tight a grip on the steering wheel or 6 the steering wheel, you must reactivate it by warning function can take over, and the system dynamic action on the steering wheel. pressing the button again. will reactivate itself once the operating conditions – Action on the brake pedal (resulting in a pause are again met. until cruise control is reactivated) or accelerator Automatic pause In response to action by the driver: pedal (suspension for as long as the pedal is – Triggering of the ESC. suspension depressed). – Pausing of the cruise control. – Activation of the direction indicators. – Deactivation of the ASR. Driving situations and related alerts The tables below describe the displays associated with the main driving situations. The display of these alerts is not sequential.
Button indicator lamp Cruise control Symbols Display Comments thumbwheel
Off CRUISE Cruise control paused; lane positioning assist not active.
(grey) (grey)
Off CRUISE Cruise control active; lane positioning assist not active.
(green) (grey)
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus active, operates normally (correction is executed at the steering
wheel). (green) (green)
Green CRUISE 70 Drive Assist Plus paused.
(grey) (grey)
117 Driving
Button indicator lamp Cruise control Symbols Display Comments thumbwheel
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus active; not all conditions required for lane positioning assist have
been met. (green)/(grey) (grey)
Green OFF or LIMIT Cruise control not active; not all conditions required for lane positioning assist have
been met. (grey) (grey)
Green CRUISE Drive Assist Plus suspended: cruise control and lane positioning assist are suspended.
(green)/(grey) (grey)
Messages Driving situations "Activate cruise control to use the lane positioning assist system" Activation of lane positioning assist while cruise control is not active. "Unsuitable conditions, Activation on stand-by" Activation of lane positioning assist while not all conditions are met. "Keep your hands on the steering wheel" Prolonged driving without holding the steering wheel, holding it improperly or without applying any force. "Hold the steering wheel" Actual or imminent loss of lane positioning assist. "Retake control" Simultaneous loss of cruise control and lane positioning assist.
Operating limits road surface even if the driver is holding the – Poor visibility (insufficient road lighting, steering wheel properly. snowfall, rain, fog). The Lane Keeping Assist system may – Dazzle (headlamps of an oncoming vehicle, The system may fail to operate or may produce issue an alert when the vehicle is low sun, reflections on a wet road surface, unsuitable corrections to the steering in the travelling in a long straight lane on a smooth leaving a tunnel, alternating light and shade). following situations:
118 Driving
– Windscreen area in front of the camera being Active Lane Keeping does not manage the safe driving distance, dirty, misted up, frost-covered, snow-covered, vehicle speed or brakes. 6 damaged or masked by a sticker. Assistance The driver must hold the steering wheel with – Lane markings eroded, partially hidden (snow, Refer to the General recommendations on the both hands in a way that allows control to mud) or multiple (roadworks, surface joints). use of driving and manoeuvring aids. be maintained in circumstances where the – Travelling in a tight bend. Using a camera located at the top of the system is not able to intervene (for example, if – Winding roads. windscreen to identify lane markings on the road the central dividing line disappears). – Presence of a tarmac joint on the road. and at the edges of the road (depending on The system must not be activated in the version), the system corrects the trajectory of the Operation vehicle while alerting the driver if it detects a risk following situations: Once the system identifies a risk of the vehicle of unintentionally crossing a line or hard shoulder – Driving with a "space-saver" type spare involuntarily crossing one of the lane markings (depending on version). wheel. detected or a lane limit (e.g. grass border), it This system is particularly useful on motorways – When towing, especially with an makes the necessary trajectory correction to and main roads. unconnected or unapproved trailer. return the vehicle to its initial path. – Poor weather conditions. The driver will notice a turning movement of the – Driving on slippery road surfaces (risk of steering wheel. aquaplaning, snow, ice). This warning lamp flashes during – Driving on racing circuits. trajectory correction. – Driving on a rolling road. The driver can prevent the correction by Conditions for operation keeping a firm grip on the wheel (during Malfunction – Vehicle speed between 40 and 112 mph (65 an avoiding manoeuvre, for example). A system malfunction is indicated and 180 km/h). The correction is interrupted immediately if by the Service warning lamp – Road marked with a central dividing line. the direction indicators are operated.
coming on and this (orange) symbol, – Steering wheel held in both hands. accompanied by an alert message and an – Direction indicators not activated. audible signal. – ESC system activated and operational.
The system helps the driver only if there is a risk of the vehicle unintentionally wandering from the lane it is being driven in. It
119 Driving
system considers that any change of trajectory is For more information on the Blind Spot intentional and no correction is triggered during Monitoring System, refer to the corresponding this period. section. However, with the Blind Spot Monitoring System If the system detects that the driver is not system activated, if the driver starts changing holding the wheel firmly enough during lanes and another vehicle is detected in the an automatic correction of trajectory, it vehicle's blind spot, the system will correct the interrupts the correction. An alert is triggered trajectory even though the direction indicators to encourage the driver to take back control of are on. While the direction indicators are on and for the vehicle. a few seconds after switching them off, the
Driving situations and related alerts The table below describes the alerts and messages displayed in different driving situations. These alerts are not displayed sequentially.
Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments message
OFF Function deactivated.
(grey)
ON System active, conditions not met: – speed below 40 mph (65 km/h),
– no lane marking recognised, (grey) – ASR/DSC systems deactivated or operation of ESC system triggered, – "sport" driving.
120 Driving
Function status Indicator lamp Display and/or associated Comments 6 message
ON Automatic deactivation/standby of the function (for example, due to detection of a trailer or use of the "space-
saver" spare wheel provided with the vehicle). (grey)
ON Lane marking detection. Speed above 40 mph (65 km/h).
(green)
ON The system corrects the trajectory on the side where the risk of unintentional crossing is detected (orange line).
(orange)/(green)
ON – If, while correcting the trajectory, the system determines that the correction will not be enough and that a solid line
will be crossed (orange line): the driver is warned that they (orange)/(green) must provide additional trajectory adjustment.
"Hold the wheel" – If the steering wheel is not held properly, an audible warning sounds, accompanied by a message, until the trajectory correction is completed or the driver has grasped the steering wheel correctly. The duration of audible warnings will increase if multiple corrections are performed in quick succession. The warning will become continuous, persisting until the driver responds.
Operating limits – ESC deactivated or operation triggered, – electrical connection of a trailer, – speed below 40 mph (65 km/h) or greater than The system goes into standby automatically in 112 mph (180 km/h), the following cases:
121 Driving
– use of the "space-saver" spare wheel detected Deactivation / Activation (as detection is not immediate, deactivation of the system is recommended), – dynamic driving style detected, pressure on
the brake or accelerator pedal,
– driving where there are no lane markings, – activation of the direction indicators, – crossing the inside line on a bend, – driving in a tight corner, This system includes sensors, placed on the
– inactivity by the driver detected during sides of the bumpers, and warns the driver of correction. ► Press this button to deactivate / reactivate the the potentially dangerous presence of another system at any time. The following situations may interfere vehicle (car, truck, motorcycle) in the blind spot Deactivation is signalled by the lighting of with the operation of the system or areas of their vehicle (areas hidden from the the indicator lamp in the button and this prevent it from working: driver's field of vision).
warning lamp in the instrument panel. – insufficient contrast between the road The system is every surface and the shoulders (e.g. shade), automatically reactivated time the ignition is switched on. – lane markings worn, hidden (snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks, etc.), – running close to the vehicle in front (the Malfunction lane markings may not be detected), In the event of a system – roads that are narrow, winding, etc. malfunction, these warning lamps
come on on the instrument panel, accompanied by an onscreen message and an audible signal. The warning is given by a fixed warning lamp Risk of undesirable operation Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT that appears in the door mirror on the side in We recommend deactivating the system in the dealer or a qualified workshop. question: following driving situations: – immediately, when being overtaken; – driving on damaged, unstable or very slippery – after a delay of about one second, when (ice) road surfaces, Blind Spot Monitoring overtaking a vehicle slowly. – unfavourable weather conditions, System – driving on a speed circuit, Activation / Deactivation Refer to the General recommendations on the – driving on a rolling road. It is set via the touch use of driving and manoeuvring aids. Driving / Vehicle screen menu.
122 Driving
When starting the vehicle, the warning lamp Operating limits – In the presence of non-moving objects (parked comes on in each mirror to indicate that the vehicles, barriers, street lamps, road signs, etc.). 6 system is activated. – Oncoming traffic. The state of the system stays in the memory – Driving on a winding road or a sharp corner. when switching off the ignition. – When overtaking or being overtaken by a very long vehicle (lorry, bus, etc.) that is detected The system is automatically deactivated in the rear blind spot but is also present in the when towing with a towing device driver’s front field of vision. approved by PEUGEOT. – When overtaking quickly. – In very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in Conditions for operation front and behind are confused with a lorry or a – All vehicles are moving in the same direction stationary object. and in adjacent lanes. – If the Park Assist or Full Park Assist function – The speed of your vehicle must be between is activated. 7 and 87 mph (12 and 140 km/h) (versions without Park Assist or Full Park Assist) or Malfunction
between 19 and 87 mph (30 and 140 km/h) If the event of malfunction, this warning (versions with Park Assist or Full Park Assist). lamp comes on in the instrument panel, – When overtaking a vehicle, the speed accompanied by the display of a message. difference is less than 6 mph (10 km/h). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified – When overtaken by a vehicle, the speed workshop to have the system checked. difference is less than 16 mph (25 km/h). The system may suffer temporary – Traffic is flowing normally. interference in certain weather conditions – Overtaking a vehicle over a certain period of (rain, hail, etc.). time and the vehicle being overtaken remains in In particular, driving on a wet surface or the blind spot. moving from a dry area to a wet area can – You are driving on a straight or slightly curved cause false alerts (for example, the presence road. of a fog of water droplets in the blind spot – Your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a caravan, angle is interpreted as a vehicle). etc.
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the No alert is triggered in the following conditions: sensors are not covered by mud, ice or snow.
123 Driving
Take care not to cover the warning zone in Active Safety Brake the door mirrors or the detection zones on the front and rear bumpers with adhesive labels with Distance Alert and or other objects; they may hamper correct Intelligent emergency operation of the system. braking assistance Refer to the General recommendations on the Active Blind Spot use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
Monitoring System The vehicle has a multifunctional camera located In addition to the fixed warning lamp in the door at the top of the windscreen and, depending on mirror on the side in question, a correction of version, a radar located in the front bumper. trajectory will be felt if you attempt to cross This system: a lane marking with the direction indicator – warns the driver that their vehicle is at risk of This system does not avoid the need for activated, to help you avoid a collision. collision with the vehicle in front, a pedestrian or, vigilance on the part of the driver. This system is the combination of the Active depending on version, a cyclist. This system is designed to assist the driver Lane Keeping Assistance and Blind Spot – reduces the vehicle's speed to avoid a and improve road safety. Monitoring System. collision or limit its severity. It is the driver's responsibility to continuously These two functions must be activated and in monitor the state of the traffic, observing the The system also takes motorcyclists and operation. driving regulations. animals into account; however, animals The speed of the vehicle must be between 40 below 0.5 m tall and objects on the road are and 87 mph (65 and 140 km/h). not necessarily detected. As soon as the system detects a These functions are especially suitable for potential obstacle, it prepares the braking driving on motorways and main roads. This system is comprised of three functions: circuit in case automatic braking is needed. For more information on the Active Lane – Distance Alert. This may cause a slight noise and a slight Keeping Assistance and Blind Spot – Intelligent emergency braking assistance. sensation of deceleration. Monitoring System, refer to the corresponding – Active Safety Brake (automatic emergency sections. braking). Deactivation / Activation By default, the system is automatically activated at every engine start. It is set via the Driving / Vehicle touch screen menu.
124 Driving
Deactivation of the system is signalled by It is possible that warnings are not given, Operation the illumination of this warning lamp, are given too late or seem unjustified. Depending on the degree of risk of collision 6 accompanied by the display of a message. The driver must always stay in control of the detected by the system and the alert trigger vehicle and be prepared to react at any time threshold chosen by the driver, several different Operating conditions and to avoid an accident. levels of alert may be triggered and displayed in limits the instrument panel. ESC system in working order. After an impact, the function The system takes account of the vehicle ASR system activated. automatically stops operating. Contact a dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and the one Seat belts fastened for all passengers. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to in front, the environmental conditions and the Stabilised speed on unwinding roads. have the system checked. operation of the vehicle (actions on the pedals, In the following cases, deactivating the system the steering wheel, etc.) to trigger the alert at the via the vehicle's configuration menu is advised: Distance Alert best moment. – Towing a trailer. Level 1 (orange): visual alert only, This function warns the driver that their vehicle is – Carrying long objects on roof bars. indicating that the vehicle in front is very at risk of a collision with the vehicle in front, or a – Vehicles with snow chains fitted. close. pedestrian or cyclist present in their traffic lane. – Before using an automatic car wash, with the The message "Vehicle close" is displayed. Level 2 (red): visual and audible alert, engine running. Modifying the alert trigger threshold – Before placing the vehicle on a rolling road in indicating that a collision is imminent. This trigger threshold determines the sensitivity a workshop. The message "Brake!" is displayed. with which the function warns of the risk of – Towed vehicle, engine running. Level 3: in some cases, a vibration alert in the collision. – Following impact to the windscreen close to form of micro-braking can be given, confirming The threshold is set via the the detection camera. the risk of collision. Driving / Vehicle touch screen The system is automatically deactivated menu. Where the speed of your vehicle is too after the use of certain "space-saver" ► Select one of the three pre-defined high approaching another vehicle, the type spare wheels is detected (smaller thresholds: first level of alert may not be displayed: the diameter). – "Distant". level 2 alert may be displayed directly. The system is automatically deactivated – “Normal". Important: the level 1 alert is not displayed after detection of a fault with the brake pedal – “Close". when there is a stationary obstacle or when switch or with at least two brake lamps. The last threshold selected is memorised when the "Close" trigger threshold has been the ignition is switched off. selected.
125 Driving
Intelligent emergency Operation The brake pedal may vibrate slightly braking assistance The system operates subject to the following while the function is operating. conditions: If the vehicle comes to a complete stop, If the driver brakes, but not sufficiently to avoid a – The vehicle's speed does not exceed 37 mph automatic braking is maintained for 1 to 2 collision, this system will supplement the braking, (60 km/h) when a pedestrian is detected. seconds. within the limits of the laws of physics. – The vehicle's speed does not exceed 50 mph This assistance will only be provided if the driver (80 km/h) when a stationary vehicle or a cyclist presses the brake pedal. Malfunction is detected. In the event of a system malfunction, this – The vehicle's speed is between 6 mph and Active Safety Brake warning lamp comes on on the instrument
53 mph (10 km/h and 85 km/h) (versions with panel, accompanied by an onscreen message camera only) or 87 mph (140 km/h) (versions and an audible signal. with camera and radar) when a moving vehicle Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified is detected. workshop to have the system checked. This warning lamp immediately flashes If these warning lamps come on (for approximately 10 seconds) when the after the engine has been switched function acts on the vehicle’s braking. off and then restarted, contact a PEUGEOT With an automatic gearbox or drive selector, in dealer or a qualified workshop to have the the event of automatic emergency braking until system checked. the vehicle comes to a complete stop, keep the brake pedal pressed down to prevent the vehicle from moving off again. Distraction detection With a manual gearbox, in the event of automatic Refer to the General recommendations on the emergency braking until the vehicle comes to a use of driving and manoeuvring aids. complete stop, the engine may stall. Take a break in case of feeling tired or at least The driver can maintain control of the every 2 hours.
vehicle at any time by firmly turning the The function comprises the "Driver Attention This function, also called automatic emergency steering wheel and/or firmly depressing the Alert" system combined with the "Driver Attention braking, intervenes following the alerts if the accelerator pedal. Alert by camera" system. driver does not react quickly enough and does not operate the vehicle's brakes. It aims to reduce the speed of impact or avoid a collision where the driver fails to react.
126 Driving
These systems are in no way designed As soon as the speed of the vehicle driving: take a break", accompanied by a more to keep the driver awake or to prevent drops below 40 mph (65 km/h), the pronounced audible signal. 6 the driver from falling asleep at the wheel. system goes into standby. In certain driving conditions (poor road It is the driver’s responsibility to stop if feeling The driving time is counted again once the surface or strong winds), the system may tired. speed is above 40 mph (65 km/h). give alerts independent of the driver's level of vigilance. Activation / Deactivation Driver Attention Alert by It is set via the Driving / Vehicle camera The following situations may interfere touch screen menu. with the operation of the system or The state of the system stays in the memory prevent it from working: when the ignition is switched off. – lane markings absent, worn, hidden (snow, mud) or multiple (roadworks); Driver Attention Alert – close to the vehicle ahead (lane markings The system triggers an alert as soon as it not detected); detects that the driver has not taken a – roads that are narrow, winding, etc. break after two hours of driving at a speed above 40 mph (65 km/h). This alert is issued via the display of a message Parking sensors encouraging the driver to take a break,
Refer to the General recommendations on the accompanied by an audible signal. Using a camera placed at the top of the use of driving and manoeuvring aids. If the driver does not follow this advice, the alert windscreen, the system assesses the is repeated hourly until the vehicle is stopped. driver's level of vigilance, fatigue or distraction by The system resets itself if one of the following identifying variations in trajectory compared to conditions is met: the lane markings. – With the engine running, the vehicle has been This system is particularly suited to fast roads stationary for more than 15 minutes. (speed higher than 40 mph (65 km/h)). – The ignition has been switched off for a few At a first-level alert, the driver is warned by the minutes. “ ” message, accompanied by an – The driver's seat belt is unfastened and their Take care! Using sensors located in the bumper, this audible signal. door is opened. system signals the proximity of obstacles After three first-level alerts, the system triggers (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, barrier) present in a further alert with the message " Dangerous their field of detection.
127 Driving
Rear parking sensors this button opens the window for adjusting the Side parking sensors volume of the audible signal. The system is switched on by engaging reverse gear, as confirmed by an audible signal. The system is switched off when you come out Visual assistance of reverse gear.
Audible assistance
Using four additional sensors located on the sides of the bumpers, the system records the position of obstacles during the manoeuvre and
This supplements the audible signal by indicates them when they are located alongside displaying bars on the screen that represent the the vehicle.
distance between the obstacle and the vehicle The system signals the presence of obstacles Only fixed obstacles are indicated (white: more distant, orange: close, red: very within the sensors’ detection zone. correctly. Moving obstacles detected at close). The proximity information is given by an the beginning of the manoeuvre may be When the obstacle is very close, the "Danger" intermittent audible signal, the frequency of indicated mistakenly, while moving obstacles symbol is displayed on the screen. which increases as the vehicle approaches the that appear alongside the vehicle but were not previously recorded will not be indicated. obstacle. Front parking sensors When the distance between the vehicle and Supplementing the rear parking sensors, the the obstacle becomes less than about thirty Objects memorised during the front parking sensors are triggered when an centimetres, the audible signal becomes manoeuvre will no longer be stored after obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the continuous. switching off the ignition. vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h). The sound emitted by the speaker (right or Front parking sensor operation is suspended if left) indicates the side on which the obstacle is the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in located. Deactivation / Activation forward gear, if an obstacle is no longer detected It is set via the Driving / Vehicle Adjusting the audible signal or the vehicle speed exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h). touch screen menu. With PEUGEOT Connect Radio or The state of the system stays in the memory The sound emitted by the speaker (front PEUGEOT Connect Nav, pressing when the ignition is switched off.
or rear) locates the obstacle relative to the vehicle, in front or behind it.
128 Driving
Malfunction 6 In the event of a malfunction when shifting to reverse, one of these
warning lamps comes on on the instrument panel, accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal (short beep).
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified The rear parking sensors system will be workshop to have the system checked. deactivated automatically if a trailer or bicycle carrier is connected to a towing device installed in accordance with the Visiopark 1 manufacturer's recommendations. Refer to the General recommendations on the In this case, the outline of a trailer is displayed use of driving and manoeuvring aids.
at the rear of the image of the vehicle. The screen is divided into two parts with a The parking sensors are deactivated while the contextual view and a view from above the Park Assist and Full Park Assist functions are vehicle in its close surroundings. measuring a space. The parking sensors supplement the information For more information on the Park Assist or the on the view from above the vehicle. Full Park Assist, refer to the corresponding Various contextual views may be displayed: section. – Standard view. When the vehicle is started, the visual – 180° view.
and audible aids will be available after – Zoom view. the touch screen has started up. As soon as reverse gear is engaged with the AUTO mode is activated by default. engine running, this system displays views of In this mode, the system chooses to display the your vehicle’s close surroundings on the touch best view (standard or zoom). Operating limits screen using a camera located at the rear of the You can change the type of view at any time If the boot is heavily loaded, the vehicle may tilt, vehicle. during a manoeuvre. affecting distance measurements. The state of the function is not saved when the ignition is switched off.
129 Driving
Principle of operation Rear vision AUTO mode
Using the rear camera, the vehicle's close
surroundings are recorded during manoeuvres To activate the camera, located on the tailgate, This mode is activated by default. at low speed. engage reverse and keep the speed of the Using sensors in the rear bumper, the automatic An image from above your vehicle in its close vehicle below 6 mph (10 km/h). view changes from the rear view (standard) to surroundings is reconstructed (represented The system is deactivated: the view from above (zoom) as an obstacle is between the brackets) in real time and as the – Automatically, at speeds above approximately approached at the level of the red line (less than manoeuvre progresses. 12 mph (20 km/h), 30 cm) during a manoeuvre. It facilitates the alignment of your vehicle when – Automatically, if the tailgate is opened. parking and allows obstacles close to the vehicle – When changing out of reverse gear. Standard view to be seen. It is automatically deleted if the – By pressing the white arrow in the upper-left vehicle remains stationary for too long. corner of the touch screen.
The area behind the vehicle is displayed on the screen.
130 Driving
The blue lines 1 represent the width of your Obstacles may appear further away than This view is only available via the view selection vehicle, with the mirrors unfolded; their direction they actually are. menu. 6 changes according to the position of the steering It is important to monitor the sides of the wheel. vehicle during the manoeuvre, using the The red line 2 represents a distance of 30 cm mirrors. Park Assist from the rear bumper; the two blue lines 3 and 4 Parking sensors also provide additional Refer to the General recommendations on the represent 1 m and 2 m, respectively. information about the area around the vehicle. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. This view is available with AUTO mode or in the This system provides active parking assistance: view selection menu. it detects a parking space and then steers in the 180° view appropriate direction to park in the space while
Zoom view the driver controls the driving direction, gear changes, acceleration and braking. To help the driver monitor the manoeuvre, the system automatically triggers the display of Visiopark 1 and activates the parking sensors. The system measures the available parking spaces and calculates the distances to obstacles using ultrasonic sensors built into the front and rear bumpers of the vehicle.
The camera records the vehicle's surroundings during the manoeuvre in order to create a view from above the rear of the vehicle in its near surroundings, allowing the vehicle to be
The 180° view facilitates reversing out of a manoeuvred around nearby obstacles. parking space, making it possible to see the This view is available with AUTO mode or in the The system assists with the following approach of vehicles, pedestrians and cyclists. view selection menu. manoeuvres: This view is not recommended for carrying out a A. Entering a "parallel" parking space complete manoeuvre. B. Leaving a "parallel" parking space It features 3 areas: left A, centre B and right C. C. Entering a "bay" parking space
131 Driving
Operation A manoeuvre selection page is displayed on the touch screen: by default, the "Entry" page if the ► When approaching a parking area, reduce vehicle has been running since the ignition was the speed of your vehicle to 19 mph (30 km/h) switched on, otherwise, the "Exit" page. or less. ► Select the type and side of the manoeuvre to Activating the function activate the parking space search. The selected manoeuvre can be changed at The function is activated in the Vehicle / any time, even while searching for an available Driving touch screen menu. space. Select "Park Assist". This indicator lamp comes on to confirm Activating the function deactivates the the selection.
Blind Spot Monitoring System. Parking space search When the system finds an available space, "OK" You can deactivate the function at any ► You should drive at a distance of between is displayed on the parking view, accompanied time until the parking space entry or exit 0.50 m and 1.50 m from the row of parked by an audible signal. manoeuvre begins, by pressing the arrow vehicles, without ever exceeding 19 mph Preparing for the manoeuvre located in the top left-hand corner of the (30 km/h), until the system finds an available display page. space. ► Move very slowly until the request to stop The parking space search stops over this limit. the vehicle is displayed: "Stop the vehicle“, The function automatically deactivates once the accompanied by the “STOP” sign and an audible Selecting the type of manoeuvre vehicle speed exceeds 31 mph (50 km/h). signal. Once the vehicle has stopped, an instructions For ''parallel'' parking, the space must at page is displayed on the screen. a minimum be equal to the length of your ► To prepare for the manoeuvre, follow the vehicle plus 0.60 m. instructions. For ''bay'' parking, the width of the space The start of the manoeuvre is indicated by the must be equal to the width of your vehicle "Manoeuvre under way" onscreen message plus 0.70 m. and an accompanying audible signal. Reversing is indicated by this message: If the parking sensors function has been “Release the steering wheel, reverse”. deactivated in the Driving/Vehicle menu The Visiopark 1 and the parking sensors are of the touch screen, it will be automatically automatically activated to help you monitor
reactivated when the system is activated.
132 Driving the area immediately surrounding your vehicle manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarf, tie, etc.). – system malfunction. during the manoeuvre. Risk of injury! – after 10 manoeuvres to enter or exit a parallel 6 It is the driver's responsibility to constantly parking space and after 7 manoeuvres to enter a During the manoeuvre monitor the traffic, especially vehicles coming parking bay. The system controls the vehicle’s steering. It towards you. Interrupting the manoeuvre automatically gives instructions on the manoeuvring direction The driver should check that no objects or deactivates the function. when starting "parallel" entry and exit parking people are obstructing the vehicle’s path. The manoeuvre symbol is displayed in red, manoeuvres, and for all "bay" entry manoeuvres. accompanied by the "Manoeuvre cancelled" There instructions are displayed as a symbol The images from the camera(s) message on the touch screen. accompanied by a message: displayed on the touch screen may be A message prompts the driver to take back "Reverse". distorted by the terrain. control of the vehicle. In shady areas, or in inadequate sunlight The function is deactivated after a few “Go forwards". or lighting conditions, the image may be seconds; this warning lamp goes off and darkened and with lower contrast the function returns to the initial display. The manoeuvring status is indicated by these symbols: The manoeuvre can be permanently interrupted End of the parking space entry or exit Manoeuvre in progress (green). at any time, either by the driver or automatically manoeuvre by the system. The vehicle stops as soon as the manoeuvre is Manoeuvre cancelled or finished (red) Interruption by the driver: completed. (the arrows indicate that the driver must – taking over control of the steering. The manoeuvring symbol is displayed in red resume control of the vehicle). – activating the direction indicator lamps on the accompanied by the message “Manoeuvre The maximum speeds during manoeuvres are opposite side to that of the manoeuvre. completed” on the touch screen. indicated by these symbols: – unfastening the driver's seat belt. Deactivation of the function is confirmed 5 mph or 7 km/h, for parking space entry. – switching off the ignition. by this indicator lamp going off, 7 Interruption by the system: accompanied by an audible signal. 3 mph or 5 km/h, for parking space exit. – vehicle exceeding the speed limit of If entering a parking space, the driver may be 5 5 mph (7 km/h) during parking space entry required to complete the manoeuvre. manoeuvres, or 3 mph (5 km/h) during parking During manoeuvring phases, the steering space exit manoeuvres. wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold Operating limits – activation of anti-slip regulation on a slippery the steering wheel or put your hands between – The system may suggest an inappropriate road. the spokes of the steering wheel. Watch out parking space (parking prohibited, work in – opening of a door or the boot. for any objects that could interfere with the progress with damaged road surface, location – engine stall. alongside a ditch, etc.).
133 Driving
– The system may indicate that a space has If the vehicle has undergone any of the In the event of a power steering been found but will not offer it because of a fixed following modifications, do not use the malfunction, this warning lamp is obstacle on the opposite side of the manoeuvre, function: displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied which would not allow the vehicle to follow a – When carrying an object extending beyond by a warning message. trajectory required for parking. the dimensions of the vehicle (ladder on the You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. – The system may indicate that a space has roof bars, bicycle carrier on the tailgate, etc.). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified been found but the manoeuvre will not be – With a non-approved towball in place. workshop. triggered, because the width of the lane is – With snow chains fitted. insufficient. – When driving on a small-diameter or – The system is not designed for performing the "space-saver" type spare wheel. Full Park Assist parking manoeuvre on a sharp bend. – When the wheels fitted are a different size Refer to the General recommendations on the – The system does not detect spaces that from the original ones. use of driving and manoeuvring aids. are much larger than the vehicle itself or that – After modifying one or both bumpers This system provides active parking assistance are delimited by obstacles that are too low (added protection). for vehicles fitted with the EAT8 automatic (pavements, studs, etc.) or too thin (trees, posts, – If the sensors have been repainted other gearbox or a gear selector: it detects a free wire fences, etc.). than by the PEUGEOT dealer network. "parallel" or "bay" parking space and then – If the boot is heavily loaded, the tilt of the – With sensors not approved for the vehicle. operates the vehicle, parking it with no need for vehicle towards the rear may interfere with the driver intervention. It also allows you to drive out distance measurements. of a "parallel parking" space automatically. Malfunctions The system controls the steering, direction, Do not use the function under the When the function is not activated, the acceleration and braking. The system measures following exterior conditions: temporary flashing of this indicator lamp the available parking spaces and calculates – Alongside a soft shoulder (e.g. ditch) or and an audible signal indicate a system the distances to obstacles using 12 ultrasonic quay or on the edge of a drop. malfunction. sensors built into the front and rear bumpers of – When the road surface is slippery (e.g. ice). If the malfunction occurs while the system is in the vehicle. use, the indicator lamp goes off. To help the driver monitor the successful If any of the following malfunctions If the parking sensor malfunction completion of the manoeuvre, the system occurs, do not use the system: occurs during use, indicated by automatically displays the Visiopark 1 and – If a tyre is under-inflated. one of these warning lamps coming on, it causes activates the parking sensors. – If one of the bumpers is damaged. the function to deactivate. – If one of the cameras is faulty. In the event of a malfunction, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
134 Driving
Sequence the function proposes the entry to or exit from a parking space on the touch screen. 6 Once the system is activated, the following steps will be performed successively: ► Select the type and side of the manoeuvre to – Select the type of manoeuvre via the touch activate the parking space search. screen. Illumination of this lamp confirms – Search for an available space. activation. – Prepare for the manoeuvre. It is possible to change the type of manoeuvre – Perform the manoeuvre. at any time, including during the available space – Finalise the manoeuvre. search phase. ► Drive at a distance of 0.50 to 1.50 m from the It is possible to deactivate the system at row of parked vehicles, not exceeding 19 mph To initiate parking assistance when any time until the start of the manoeuvre, (30 km/h), until the system finds an available approaching a parking area: by pressing the red arrow in the upper left space (indicated by OK on the display and an ► Reduce the speed of the vehicle to a corner of the screen. audible signal). maximum of 19 mph (30 km/h). For "parallel" parking, the space must at Full Park Assist is not always able to least equal to the length of your vehicle react automatically and appropriately due plus 1 m. to the performance limits inherent to the For "bay" parking, the space must at least system. equal to the width of your vehicle plus 0.70 m. The manoeuvre remains the responsibility of the driver, who must not leave the driving position and must never try to lock the system Preparing for the control button. The driver's seat belt must remain fastened manoeuvre during the manoeuvre. ► Move very slowly until the request to stop ► Press the button on the gear selector or, on the vehicle and the "STOP" sign are displayed, the touch screen, select Driving / Vehicle > Full accompanied by an audible signal. Park Assist. Choice of the type of Once the vehicle has stopped, an instructions page is displayed on the screen. Activating the system deactivates Blind manoeuvre and search for ► To prepare for the manoeuvre, you must fulfil Spot Monitoring System. space all of these instructions. Depending on whether the vehicle has been driven or not since the ignition was switched on,
135 Driving
This symbol will be displayed Manoeuvre interrupted. an obstacle is detected, or by driver action. If the automatically when the instruction has driver notices a hazard, they may also interrupt been applied. Manoeuvre completed or abandoned the manoeuvre permanently. When all instructions have been validated, a (white arrows indicate that the driver must To suspend the manoeuvre, the driver can: new screen is displayed, indicating that you can take back control of their vehicle). – Release the function control button. undertake the manoeuvre. The direction of the manoeuvre is indicated by – Depress the brake pedal. ► To undertake the manoeuvre, press these symbols: – Resume control of the steering. this button. Forward gear. – Change the gearbox status (except changing ► While holding down the button, gradually to P). release the brake pedal. Reverse gear. The vehicle is immediately immobilised if the manoeuvre is suspended. The button must be held down The central arrow is green whilst the vehicle This is confirmed by the display of this throughout the manoeuvre. is moving, or white to indicate the next symbol, accompanied by the message The start of the manoeuvre is indicated by manoeuvring direction. "Manoeuvre suspended". Resuming the manoeuvre after resolving the the display of a screen with the message Throughout the whole manoeuvre, conditions for suspending it: "Manoeuvre under way", accompanied by an indicated by the green "AUTO" symbol, ► Release all controls (brake pedal, function audible signal. the driver must hold the selector button down. Visiopark 1 and the parking sensors are control button, steering wheel, etc.). automatically activated to help you monitor the ► Press the function control button again. During manoeuvring phases, the steering immediate area around your vehicle during the Permanent interruption after suspending the wheel performs rapid turns: do not hold manoeuvre. manoeuvre: the steering wheel or put your hands between ► Depress the brake pedal and engage a gear. the spokes of the steering wheel. Watch out Performing the manoeuvre Abandoning the manoeuvre for any objects that could interfere with the As soon as the driver releases the brake manoeuvre (loose clothing, scarf, tie, etc.). The manoeuvre is abandoned in the following pedal, the system automatically takes control Risk of injury! situations: of choosing the travel direction, forwards or – No action by the driver within 30 seconds of reverse, acceleration, braking and the steering If the vehicle slows down significantly, the manoeuvre being suspended. direction. the brake lamps may come on. – Intentional application of the parking brake. The manoeuvring status is indicated by these – Gearbox mode P engaged by the driver. symbols: Pausing/resuming the manoeuvre – Driver's seat belt unfastened. Manoeuvre in progress. – Opening of a door or the boot. The manoeuvre can be interrupted temporarily at any time, either automatically by the system if
136 Driving
– Activation of the direction indicator lamps on End of manoeuvre – The system may indicate that a space has the opposite side to that of the manoeuvre. been found but the manoeuvre will not be 6 The vehicle stops as soon as the manoeuvre is – In certain cases, when a wheel of the vehicle triggered because the width of the lane is completed. hits a pavement or a low obstacle. insufficient. This symbol is displayed, accompanied by – Triggering of anti-slip regulation on a slippery – The system is not designed to perform parking the message "Manoeuvre completed" on road. manoeuvres on a steep slope or on a sharp the touch screen. – Engine stalling. curve. When the function is deactivated, this – Sudden appearance in the field of the – The system does not detect spaces that indicator lamp on the instrument panel manoeuvre of an obstacle not detected by the are much larger than the vehicle itself or that goes off and the original display is restored. system before the manoeuvre was started, are delimited by obstacles that are too low – If entering a parking space, the driver may with the obstacle remaining for more than 30 (pavements, studs, etc.) or too thin (trees, posts, be required to complete the manoeuvre. seconds. wire fences, etc.). The gearbox changes to P 4 seconds after – After 10 manoeuvres to enter or exit a – The system may be impaired by incorrect completion of the manoeuvre. "parallel" parking space and after 7 manoeuvres inflation of the vehicle’s tyres. – When exiting a parking space, the gearbox to enter a "bay" parking space, – The tilting of the vehicle if the boot is heavily changes to N when the manoeuvre is complete. – System malfunction during the manoeuvre. loaded can affect the distance measurements. A message and symbols prompt the driver to Abandoning the manoeuvre immediately take back control of the vehicle. Do not use the function under the triggers the vehicle’s brakes and automatically The gearbox automatically changes to mode following exterior conditions: deactivates the function. P if no action is taken by the driver within 30 – Alongside a soft shoulder (ditch) or quay or This symbol is displayed, accompanied by secondss. on the edge of a drop. the message "Manoeuvre abandoned" – When the road surface is slippery (ice). on the touch screen. Operating limits A message prompts the driver to take back – The system may suggest an inappropriate control of the vehicle. Do not use the function in the presence parking space (parking prohibited, work in The function is deactivated after a few of one of the following malfunctions: progress with damaged road surface, location seconds; this indicator lamp goes off on – If a tyre is under-inflated. alongside a ditch, etc.). the instrument panel and the initial display is – If one of the bumpers is damaged. – The system may indicate that a space has resumed. – If one of the cameras is faulty. been found but will not offer it because of a fixed The system automatically engages gearbox – If the brake lamps are not working. obstacle on the opposite side of the manoeuvre, mode P after 4 seconds. which does not allow the vehicle to follow the trajectory required for parking.
137 Driving
Do not use the function if the vehicle has In the event of a power steering been subject to one of the following malfunction, this warning lamp is modifications: displayed on the instrument panel, accompanied – When carrying an object extending beyond by a message. the dimensions of the vehicle (ladder on the You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. roof bars, bicycle carrier on the tailgate, etc.). Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified – With a non-approved towball in place. workshop. – With snow chains fitted. – When driving on a small-diameter or "space-saver" type spare wheel. – When the wheels fitted are a different size from the original ones. – After modifying one or both bumpers (added protection). – If the sensors have been repainted outside the PEUGEOT dealer network. – With sensors not approved for the vehicle.
Malfunctions When the function is not activated, the temporary flashing of this warning lamp and an audible signal indicate a Full Park Assist malfunction. If the malfunction occurs while the system is in use, the warning lamp goes off. If a parking sensor malfunction, indicated by one of these warning lamps coming on, occurs during Full Park Assist use, the function is deactivated. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
138
PEUGEOT & TOTAL PARTNERS IN PERFORMANCE!
For over 20 years, the PEUGEOT TOTAL partnership has set new performance standards in achieving success in the toughest conditions, with victories in the Le Mans 24 Hours, the World Rally Championship and the Dakar Rally. To obtain these exceptional results, the Peugeot Sport teams chose TOTAL QUARTZ, a high-tech lubricant that protects the engine in the most extreme conditions. TOTAL QUARTZ protects your engine against the effects of time. TOTAL QUARTZ INEO FIRST is a very high-performance lubricant developed jointly by the Peugeot and Total R&D teams. Specially formulated for the engines in Peugeot vehicles, its innovative technology significantly reduces
CO2 emissions and keeps your engine clean.
Practical information
Compatibility of fuels fuels could prevent the engine from operating and audible signal are repeated with increasing
correctly. In these temperature conditions, use frequency as the fuel level drops towards 0.
winter-type Diesel fuel and keep the fuel tank You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid more than 50 % full. running out of fuel. Petrol fuels conforming to the EN228 standard At temperatures below -15 °C (+5 °F) to avoid For more information on Running out of fuel containing up to 5% and 10% ethanol problems starting, it is best to park the vehicle (Diesel), refer to the corresponding section. respectively. under shelter (heated garage). Stop & Start
Travelling abroad Never refuel with the engine in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition. Diesel fuels conforming to the EN590, EN16734 Certain fuels could damage your vehicle’s and EN16709 standards and containing up to engine. 7%, 10%, 20% and 30% fatty acid methyl ester In certain countries, the use of a particular Refuelling respectively. The use of B20 or B30 fuels, even fuel may be required (specific octane rating, Additions of fuel must be of at least 5 litres, in occasionally, imposes special maintenance specific trade name, etc.) to ensure correct order to be registered by the fuel gauge. conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions". operation of the engine. Opening the filler cap may create a noise caused For all additional information, consult a dealer. by an inrush of air. This vacuum is entirely normal, resulting from the sealing of the fuel Paraffinic Diesel fuel conforming to the EN15940 Refuelling system. standard. To refuel in complete safety: Fuel tank capacity: approximately 40 or 44 ► You must switch off the engine. The use of any other type of (bio) fuel litres (petrol) or 41 litres (Diesel). (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, Reserve level: approximately 5 litres. domestic fuel, etc.) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage to the engine and fuel system). Low fuel level When the low fuel level is reached, this The only fuel additives authorised for use warning lamp comes on on the instrument are those that meet the B715001 (petrol) panel, accompanied by an onscreen message or B715000 (Diesel) standards. and an audible signal. When it first comes on, about 5 litres of fuel remain. Until sufficient fuel is added, this warning lamp Diesel at low temperature appears every time the ignition is switched on, At temperatures below 0 °C (+32 °F), the accompanied by an onscreen message and formation of paraffins in summer-type Diesel an audible signal. When driving, this message
140 Practical information
drained and filled with the correct fuel before It remains possible to use a fuel jerrycan starting the engine. to fill the tank. 7
The vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, a Travelling abroad device which helps to reduce the level of harmful As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be emissions in the exhaust gases. different in other countries, the presence For petrol engines, you must use unleaded of the misfuel prevention device may make fuel. refuelling impossible. The filler neck is narrower, admitting unleaded Before travelling abroad, it is advisable to petrol nozzles only. check with a PEUGEOT dealer if the vehicle Misfuel prevention (Diesel) is suitable for the distribution equipment of the countries visited. (Depending on country of sale.) ► With the vehicle unlocked, press the rear- This mechanical device prevents filling the tank central part of the filler flap to open it. of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. ► Take care to select the pump that delivers the Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention Charging system correct fuel type for the vehicle's engine (see a device appears when the filler cap is removed. (Electric) reminder label on the inside of the filler flap). ► Turn the filler cap to the left. Operation ► Remove the filler cap and hang it on its 400 V electrical system carrier (on the filler flap). The electrical system, which operates at a ► Introduce the filler nozzle and push it in as voltage of approximately 400 V, is identified by far as possible before starting to refuel (risk of orange cables, and its components are marked with this symbol:
blowback). ► Fill the tank. Do not continue past the third cut-off of the nozzle, as this may cause malfunctions. ► Refit the filler cap. When a petrol filler nozzle is inserted into the ► Turn it to the right. fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes into ► Push the filler flap to close it. contact with the flap. The system remains closed and prevents filling. If you have put in the wrong fuel for the Do not persist but introduce a Diesel type vehicle, you must have the fuel tank filler nozzle.
141 Practical information
This label is intended solely for use by High-pressure washing In the event of damage to the traction firefighters responding to an incident To avoid damaging electrical battery involving the vehicle and for maintenance components, it is expressly prohibited to use It is strictly prohibited to work on the vehicle technicians. high-pressure washing to clean the front yourself. compartment or the vehicle underbody. Do not touch liquids coming from the battery, In the event of an accident or impact Do not use a pressure greater than 80 bar and in the event of skin contact with these The electrical system or the traction when washing the bodywork. products, wash abundantly with water and battery may be seriously damaged in the contact a doctor as soon as possible. event of an accident or impact involving the Never allow water or dust to enter the Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
vehicle underbody. connector or charging nozzle - risk of workshop to have the system checked. Stop as soon as it is safe to do so and switch electrocution or fire! An electric vehicle’s power train can off the ignition. Never connect / disconnect the charging become hot during use and after Charging connectors and Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified nozzle or cable with wet hands - risk of switching off the ignition. workshop without delay. electrocution! indicator lamps
Observe the warning messages shown on labels, particularly inside the flap. All work on or modifications to the vehicle’s In the event of exposure to a fire Traction battery Immediately exit and evacuate all electrical system (including the traction This battery stores the energy that powers passengers from the vehicle. Never attempt battery, connectors, orange cables and the electric motor and the thermal comfort to fight the fire yourself - risk of electrocution! other components visible from the interior or equipment in the passenger compartment. It is You must immediately contact the emergency exterior) is strictly prohibited - risk of severe discharged during use, and must therefore be services, informing them that the incident burns or potentially fatal electric shock (short- regularly recharged. There is no need to wait involves an electric vehicle. circuit / electrocution)! for the traction battery to fall to its reserve level In the event of a problem, always contact a before recharging. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. When washing Battery life may vary according to the type of Before washing the vehicle, always driving, the route, thermal comfort equipment check that the charging flap is closed usage and battery component ageing. correctly. Never wash the vehicle while the battery is The traction battery ageing process is 1. Charging connectors on charge. influenced by multiple factors, including 2. Deferred charge activation button climate conditions, the distance travelled and 3. Nozzle locking indicator lamp
how often it has been fast-charged. Red: nozzle positioned correctly and locked in the connector.
142 Practical information
In the event of damage to the traction 4. Charging indicator lamp Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
battery workshop for more information and to obtain 7 It is strictly prohibited to work on the vehicle suitable charging cables. yourself. Domestic socket Do not touch liquids coming from the battery, (Domestic charging - single-phase alternating and in the event of skin contact with these current (AC))
products, wash abundantly with water and
contact a doctor as soon as possible. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified State of charging Meaning workshop to have the system checked. indicator lamp Fixed white Welcome lighting when flap is opened. Charging connectors and Mode 2 with a standard socket A: 8 A Fixed blue Deferred charge. maximum charging current. indicator lamps Flashing green Charging. Fixed green Charging finished. Fixed red Malfunction.
In case of impact, even light, against the Mode 2 with a Green’Up socket B: 16 A charging flap, do not use it. maximum charging current. Do not remove or modify the charging "Mode 2 (AC)" cable with integrated connector - risk of fire! control unit
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Charging cables 1. Charging connectors The charging cable supplied with the vehicle is 2. Deferred charge activation button suitable for electrical systems in the country of 3. Nozzle locking indicator lamp sale. If you travel abroad, refer to the following Red: nozzle positioned correctly and locked table to check your charging cable’s compatibility
in the connector. with local electrical systems.
143 Practical information
Charging cable with integrated control Refer to the charging unit user manual for Control unit – If the circuit breaker has tripped, contact a unit operating instructions. professional to check that your electrical system Avoiding damage to the cable is essential. is suitable and carry out any necessary repairs. In the event of damage, do not use the cable Public fast charging station – If the circuit-breaker has not tripped, avoid and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (Fast charging - direct current (DC)) using the charging cable and contact a
workshop for a replacement. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Recommendations on the control unit label Accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) (Accelerated charging - single-phase or three- phase alternating current (AC))
POWER
Green: electrical connection established; "Mode 4 (DC)" cable charging can begin. (integrated in the public fast charging station) CHARGE 1. Refer to the handbook before use.
Depending on version, in mode 3 with a Flashing green: charging in progress or 2. Incorrect use of this charging cable may Wallbox accelerated charging unit: 32 A programmed heating activated. result in fire, property damage and serious maximum charging current. Fixed green: charging complete. injury or death by electrocution! FAULT "Mode 3 (AC)" cable 3. Always use a correctly earthed power Red: anomaly; charging not permitted socket, protected by a 30 mA residual or must be stopped immediately. Check that current device. everything is connected correctly and that the
4. Always use an electrical socket protected electrical system is not faulty. by a circuit-breaker appropriate for the If the indicator lamp does not go off, contact a electrical circuit’s current rating. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. 5. The weight of the control unit must not be Upon plugging the charging cable into a borne by the electrical socket, plug and domestic socket, all of the indicator lamps come cables. on briefly. 6. Never use this charging cable if it is Accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) If no indicator lamps come on, check the defective or in any way damaged. Do not remove or modify the charging domestic socket's circuit-breaker. unit. Risk of electrocution and/or fire!
144 Practical information
– If the circuit breaker has tripped, contact a 7. Never attempt to repair or open this For a full charge, follow the desired charging professional to check that your electrical system procedure without pausing it, until it ends 7 charging cable. It contains no repairable is suitable and carry out any necessary repairs. parts - replace the charging cable if it is automatically. Charging may be performed either – If the circuit-breaker has not tripped, avoid damaged. immediately or deferred. using the charging cable and contact a 8. Never immerse this charging cable in water. You can stop charging at any time by unlocking PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. 9. Never use this charging cable with an the vehicle and removing the nozzle. Recommendations on the control unit label extension cable, a multi-plug socket, a Depending on version, the deferred conversion adaptor or on a damaged charge function is configured via either electrical socket. the touch screen or the MyPeugeot application. 10. Do not unplug the plug from the wall as a For more information on the deferred charge means of stopping charging. function, refer to the corresponding section. 11. Do not force the connector if it is locked into It is also possible to monitor the charging the vehicle. process using the MyPeugeot 12. Immediately stop charging, by locking and application. then unlocking the vehicle using the remote For more information on Remotely operable control key, if the charging cable or wall features, refer to the corresponding section. 1. Refer to the handbook before use. socket feel burning hot to the touch. Incorrect use of this charging cable may 2. 13. This charging cable includes components As a safety measure, the engine will not result in fire, property damage and serious liable to cause electrical arcing or sparks. start if the charging cable is plugged into injury or death by electrocution! Do not expose to flammable vapours. Always use a correctly earthed power the connector on the vehicle. A warning is 3. 14. Only use this charging cable with PEUGEOT displayed on the instrument panel. socket, protected by a 30 mA residual vehicles. current device. 15. Never plug the cable into the wall socket (or 4. Always use an electrical socket protected unplug it) with wet hands. Vehicle unused for an extended period by a circuit-breaker appropriate for the Fully recharge the traction battery every electrical circuit’s current rating. three months. Follow the domestic charging 5. The weight of the control unit must not be Charging the traction procedure. borne by the electrical socket, plug and Before carrying out the charging operation, cables. battery (Electric) check that the accessory battery is not 6. Never use this charging cable if it is To recharge, connect the vehicle to a domestic disconnected or discharged. If it is, refer to defective or in any way damaged. electrical system (for domestic or accelerated the corresponding section for information on charging) or a fast charging station (for fast reconnecting or recharging it. charging).
145 Practical information
Precautions ► Have a professional electrician install (During charging) a dedicated domestic power socket or Do not remain in or near the vehicle. Electric vehicles were developed in accordance accelerated charging unit (Wallbox) While charging is in progress, opening the with the guidelines on maximum electromagnetic compatible with the vehicle. driver's door will interrupt charging. fields issued by the International Commission Use the charging cable supplied with the on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP - vehicle. 1998 Guidelines). After charging Wearers of pacemakers or equivalent Check that the charging flap is closed. devices should consult a doctor to enquire (During charging) about any applicable precautionary measures, or Never work under the bonnet: Connection contact the manufacturer of their implanted – Some areas remain very hot, even an hour ► Before charging, check that the drive selector electronic medical device to check that it is after charging ends - risk of burns! is in mode and the ignition is off, otherwise guaranteed to operate in an environment – The fan may start at any time - risk of cuts P charging is not possible. compliant with the ICNIRP guidelines. or strangulation! ► Open the charging flap by pressing the If in doubt push-button, and check that there are no foreign After charging Domestic or accelerated charging: do bodies on the charging connector. Check that the charging flap is closed. not remain inside or near the vehicle, or near Do not leave the cable connected to the Domestic charging
the charging cable or charging unit, even for domestic power socket - risk of short-circuit a short time. or electrocution in the event of contact with or Fast charging: do not use the system immersion in water! yourself and avoid approaching public fast charging points. Leave the area and ask a third party to recharge the vehicle. For fast charging
Before charging For domestic or accelerated charging Check that the fast public charger and its charging cable are compatible with your Before charging vehicle. Depending on the context: If the exterior temperature is below : ► Have a professional check that the – -25°C, charging may not be possible. electrical system to be used complies with – 0°C, charging times may be extended. applicable standards and is compatible with ► Connect the charging cable from the control the vehicle. unit to the domestic socket.
146 Practical information
When the connection is made, all of the indicator The start of charging is confirmed when the Disconnection lamps on the control unit light up, then only the charging indicator lamp in the flap flashes green. 7 POWER indicator lamp remains on in green. If this is not the case, charging has not started; ► Remove the protective cover from the restart the procedure, ensuring that the nozzle is charging nozzle. inserted correctly. ► Insert the nozzle into the charging connector. The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to The start of charging is confirmed by the flashing indicate that the nozzle is locked. Before disconnecting the nozzle from the in green of the CHARGE indicator lamps in the Fast charging charging connector: flap, then on the control unit. If this is not the case, charging has not ► If the vehicle is unlocked, lock it and then started; restart the procedure, ensuring that all unlock it. connections are properly established. ► If the vehicle is locked, unlock it. The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to The red indicator lamp in the flap goes out to indicate that the nozzle is locked. confirm that the charging nozzle is unlocked. ► Within 30 seconds, remove the charging
If charging has finished but the cable is nozzle. still connected, opening the driver's door ► Depending on version, remove the protective Domestic charging restarts charging for around 20 seconds. cover from the base. ► Connect the charging cable to the vehicle Accelerated charging connector, following the instructions for use of
the fast public charger. The start of charging is confirmed when the charging indicator lamp in the flap flashes green. If this is not the case, charging has not started;
restart the procedure, ensuring that the connection is correct.
The red indicator lamp in the flap comes on to ► Follow the instructions for use of the indicate that the nozzle is locked. accelerated charging unit (Wallbox). ► Remove the protective cover from the charging nozzle.
► Insert the nozzle into the charging connector.
147 Practical information
axle, and the nose weight approaches the Electric motor 8. Label to note the key references
maximum permitted without exceeding it. Electric vehicles must never be equipped Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing with towing devices. engine performance. The maximum towable load It is therefore not possible to tow a trailer or must be reduced by 10% per 1,000 metres of caravan.
altitude. When charging is complete, the green CHARGE indicator lamp on the control unit comes on fixed. Use genuine towing devices and their ► Replace the protective cover on the charging wiring harnesses approved by Towing device with quickly nozzle and close the charging flap. PEUGEOT. We recommend having them detachable towball ► Disconnect the control unit end of the fitted by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified charging cable from the domestic socket. workshop. If not fitted by a PEUGEOT dealer, they must Presentation
Accelerated charging still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle This genuine towing device can be fitted and The end of charging is indicated by the charging removed with no need for tools. A. Locked position (the green marks are
manufacturer's instructions. control unit and by the fixed lighting of the green opposite each other); the wheel is in contact Certain driving or manoeuvring aid functions indicator lamp in the flap. with the towball (no gap). are automatically deactivated while an ► Hang up the nozzle on the charging unit and B. Unlocked position (red mark opposite approved towing system is in use. close the charging flap. the green mark); the wheel is no longer Fast charging in contact with the towball (gap of around Comply with the maximum authorised 5 mm). The end of charging is indicated by the charger towable weight, as indicated on your and by the fixed lighting of the green indicator vehicle's registration certificate, on the Trailers with LED lamps are not lamp in the flap. manufacturer's label and in the Technical compatible with the wiring harness of this ► Hang up the nozzle on the charging station. data section of this guide. device. ► Depending on version, replace the protective Complying with the maximum authorised
cover on the base and close the charging flap. nose weight (towball weight) also includes To ensure complete safety while driving the use of accessories (bicycle carriers, 1. Carrier with a Towing device, refer to the tow boxes, etc.). 2. Protective plug corresponding section. Towing device 3. Connection socket Load distribution Observe the legislation in force in the 4. Safety eye ► Distribute the load in the trailer so that the Before each use country where you are driving. 5. Detachable towball heaviest items are as close as possible to the 6. Locking/unlocking wheel Verify that the towball is correctly fitted, 7. Security key lock checking the follow points:
148 Practical information
8. Label to note the key references – the green mark on the wheel is aligned with After use
the green mark on the towball, When travelling without a trailer or 7 – the wheel is in contact with the towball load carrier, remove the towball and fit the (position A), protective plug into the carrier, to provide – the security key lock is closed and the clear visibility of the number plate and/or its key removed; the wheel can no longer be lighting. operated, – the towball must not be able to move in its carrier; test by attempting to shake it with your Fitting the towball
hand. If the towball is not locked, the trailer can become detached - risk of an accident!
A. Locked position (the green marks are During use opposite each other); the wheel is in contact Never release the locking system with a with the towball (no gap). trailer or load carrier on the towball. B. Unlocked position (red mark opposite Never exceed the maximum authorised the green mark); the wheel is no longer weight for the vehicle - the Gross Train in contact with the towball (gap of around Weight or GTW.
5 mm). Always comply with the maximum authorised load on the towing device: if it is exceeded, ► Below the rear bumper, remove the protective Trailers with LED lamps are not this device may become detached from the plug 2 from the carrier 1. compatible with the wiring harness of this vehicle - risk of an accident! ► Insert the end of the towball 5 into the carrier device. Before driving, check the headlamp height 1 and push it upwards; it will lock into position adjustment and check that the lamps on the automatically.
To ensure complete safety while driving trailer operate correctly. with a Towing device, refer to the For more information on Headlamp height corresponding section. adjustment, refer to the corresponding section. Before each use Verify that the towball is correctly fitted, checking the follow points:
149 Practical information
► The wheel 6 rotates a quarter turn anti- ► Remove the protective cover from the ► Insert the key into the lock 7. ► Refit the protective plug 2 to the carrier 1. clockwise; take care to keep your hands clear! towball. ► Open the lock using the key. ► Stow the towball in its bag away from knocks ► Attach the trailer to the towball. and dirt. ► Attach the cable on the trailer to the safety eye 4 on the carrier. Maintenance ► Insert the trailer plug and rotate it by a Correct operation is only possible if the towball quarter turn to connect it to the connection and its carrier are kept clean. socket 3 on the carrier. Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure jet wash, the towball must be removed and the Removing the towball protective plug fitted to the carrier. ► Grasp the trailer plug, perform a quarter turn Affix the enclosed label in a clearly visible and pull to disconnect it from the connection location, close to the carrier or in the
socket 3 on the carrier. boot. ► Detach the cable on the trailer from the safety ► Check that the mechanism has correctly ► Hold the towball 5 firmly in one hand; using Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified eye 4 on the carrier. locked into place (position A). the other hand, pull and turn the wheel 6 fully in workshop for any work on the towball system. ► Close the lock 7 using the key. ► Detach the trailer from the towball. a clockwise direction; do not release the wheel. ► Remove the key. The key cannot be removed ► Refit the protective cover to the towball. ► Extract the towball from the bottom of its while the lock is open. ► Remove the cap from the lock and press it carrier 1. ► Clip the cap onto the lock. onto the head of the key. ► Release the wheel; it automatically stops in
the unlocked position (position B).
150 Practical information
Roof bars Regularly check the security and tight fastening of the roof bars, at least before each 7 As a safety measure and to avoid trip. damaging the roof, it is essential to use Remove the roof bars once they are no longer the transverse bars approved for the vehicle. needed. Observe the instructions on fitting and use contained in the guide supplied with the roof Fitting directly to the roof
bars.
Maximum load distributed over the roof ► Refit the protective plug 2 to the carrier 1. bars, for a loading height not exceeding ► Stow the towball in its bag away from knocks 40 cm: 70 kg. and dirt. As this value may change, please verify the maximum load quoted in the guide supplied Maintenance with the roof bars. Correct operation is only possible if the towball If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed and its carrier are kept clean. of the vehicle to the profile of the road to Before cleaning the vehicle with a high-pressure avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings jet wash, the towball must be removed and the on the vehicle. You must only attach the transverse bars to protective plug fitted to the carrier. Be sure to refer to national legislation in order to comply with the regulations for transporting the four fixing points located on the roof frame. Affix the enclosed label in a clearly visible objects that are longer than the vehicle. These points are concealed by the vehicle doors location, close to the carrier or in the when the doors are closed. boot. Recommendations The roof bar fixings have a stud which must be Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Distribute the load uniformly, taking care inserted into the opening of each fixing point. workshop for any work on the towball system. to avoid overloading one of the sides. Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close Snow chains as possible to the roof. In wintry conditions, snow chains improve Secure the load securely. traction as well as the behaviour of the Drive gently: the vehicle will be more vehicle when braking. susceptible to the effects of side winds and its stability may be affected.
151 Practical information
The snow chains must be fitted only to It is strongly recommended that before Exiting the mode Bonnet the front wheels. They must never be you leave, you practise fitting the snow These functions are automatically reactivated the fitted to "space-saver" type spare wheels. chains on a level and dry surface. next time the vehicle is used. Stop & Start To restore the use of these functions Before doing anything under the bonnet, Observe the legislation in force in your Avoid driving with snow chains on roads immediately, start the engine and let it run: you must switch off the ignition to avoid any country on the use of snow chains and that have been cleared of snow to avoid – For less than 10 minutes, to use the risk of injury resulting from an automatic the maximum authorised speed. damaging the vehicle's tyres and the road equipment for approximately 5 minutes. change to START mode. surface. If the vehicle is fitted with alloy – For more than 10 minutes, to use the Use only chains designed to be fitted to the type wheels, check that no part of the chain or its equipment for approximately 30 minutes. of wheel fitted to the vehicle: fixings is in contact with the wheel rim. Let the engine run for the specified duration to Original tyre size Maximum link size ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. 185/65 R15 9 mm To recharge the battery, avoid repeatedly or Energy economy mode continuously restarting the engine. The location of the interior bonnet 195/55 R16 9 mm release lever prevents opening the This system manages the duration of use of A flat battery prevents the engine from bonnet when the left-hand front door is 205/45 R17 Not suitable for certain functions, in order to conserve a sufficient starting. closed. chains level of charge in the battery with the ignition off. For more information on the 12 V battery, After switching off the engine, you can still refer to the corresponding section. For more information on snow chains, contact a When the engine is hot, handle the use functions such as the audio and telematic PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. exterior safety catch and the bonnet stay system, the wipers and the dipped beam with care (risk of burns), using the protected headlamps or courtesy lamps, for a combined Installation tips Load reduction mode area. duration of approximately 40 minutes. ► To fit the chains during a journey, stop the This system manages the use of certain When the bonnet is open, take care not to vehicle on a flat surface on the side of the road. Selecting the mode functions according to the level of charge damage the safety catch. ► Apply the parking brake and position any remaining in the battery. Do not open the bonnet under very windy A confirmation message is displayed when wheel chocks under the wheels to prevent When the vehicle is being driven, the load conditions. energy economy mode is entered, and the active movement of the vehicle. reduction function temporarily deactivates certain ► Fit the chains following the instructions functions are placed on standby. functions, such as the air conditioning and the Cooling of the engine when stopped provided by the manufacturer. If a telephone call is in progress at the heated rear screen. The engine cooling fan may start after ► Move off gently and drive for a few moments, time, it will be maintained for around 10 The deactivated functions are reactivated the engine has been switched off. without exceeding 31 mph (50 km/h). minutes via the audio system’s hands-free automatically as soon as conditions permit. Take care with objects or clothing that ► Stop the vehicle and check that the snow system. could be caught in the blades of the fan! chains are correctly tightened.
152 Practical information Bonnet Opening Closing 7 ► Open the left-hand front door. ► Hold the bonnet and pull out the stay from the Stop & Start support slot. Before doing anything under the bonnet, ► Clip the stay in its housing. you must switch off the ignition to avoid any ► Lower the bonnet and release it near the end
risk of injury resulting from an automatic of its travel. change to START mode. ► Pull on the bonnet to check that it is locked correctly.
Because of the presence of electrical equipment under the bonnet, it is strongly
recommended that exposure to water (rain, The location of the interior bonnet ► Pull the interior release lever, located at the washing, etc.) be limited. release lever prevents opening the bottom of the door frame, towards you.
bonnet when the left-hand front door is closed. Engine compartment The engine shown here is an example for When the engine is hot, handle the illustrative purposes only. exterior safety catch and the bonnet stay The locations of the following elements may with care (risk of burns), using the protected vary: area. – Air filter. When the bonnet is open, take care not to – Engine oil dipstick. damage the safety catch. – Engine oil filler cap. Do not open the bonnet under very windy – Priming pump.
conditions. Petrol engine ► Lift the exterior safety catch and raise the
Cooling of the engine when stopped bonnet. The engine cooling fan may start after ► Unclip the stay from its housing and place it the engine has been switched off. in the support slot to hold the bonnet open. Take care with objects or clothing that could be caught in the blades of the fan!
153 Practical information
Diesel engine Electric motor The fluids must comply with the ignition is switched on (for vehicles equipped
manufacturer's requirements and with with an electric gauge), or using the dipstick. the vehicle's engine. It is normal to top up the oil level between two services (or oil changes). It is recommended Take care when working under the that you check the level, and top up if necessary, bonnet, as certain areas of the engine every 3,000 miles (5,000 km). may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the In order to maintain the reliability of the
cooling fan could start at any time (even with engine and emissions control system, the ignition off). never use additives in the engine oil. 1. Screenwash fluid reservoir 1. Screenwash fluid reservoir 2. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Engine coolant reservoir Used products Checking using the dipstick 3. Brake fluid reservoir 3. Brake fluid reservoir For the location of the dipstick, please refer 4. Battery / Fuses 4. Battery / Fuses Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or to the illustration of the corresponding engine 5. Remote earth point (-) 5. Remote earth point (-) fluids with the skin. compartment. 6. Fusebox 6. Fusebox Most of these fluids are harmful to health and ► Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and pull 7. Air filter 7. 400 V electrical system very corrosive. it out completely. 8. Engine oil filler cap 8. Emergency circuit-breaker for firefighters and ► Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean, 9. Engine oil dipstick maintenance technicians Do not discard used oil or fluids into non-fluffy cloth. 10. Priming pump* sewers or onto the ground. For more information on the Charging system ► Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then Empty used oil into the containers reserved The Diesel fuel system operates under (Electric), refer to the corresponding section. pull it out again to make the visual check: the for this purpose at a PEUGEOT dealer or a very high pressure. correct level is between marks A and B. qualified workshop. All work on this circuit must be carried out Checking levels only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Check all of the following levels regularly in Engine oil accordance with the manufacturer's service The level is checked, with the engine schedule. Top them up if required, unless having been switched off for at least 30 otherwise indicated. minutes and on level ground, either using the oil If a level drops significantly, have the level indicator in the instrument panel when the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT A = MAX dealer or a qualified workshop. B = MIN Do not start the engine if the level is: * Depending on engine.
154 Practical information ignition is switched on (for vehicles equipped – above mark A: contact a PEUGEOT dealer or To know how often the brake fluid should be with an electric gauge), or using the dipstick. a qualified workshop. replaced, refer to the manufacturer's servicing 7 It is normal to top up the oil level between two – below mark B: top up the engine oil schedule. services (or oil changes). It is recommended immediately. Clean the cap before removing it to refill. that you check the level, and top up if necessary, Oil grade Use only DOT4 brake fluid from a sealed every 3,000 miles (5,000 km). Before topping up the oil or changing container. In order to maintain the reliability of the the oil, check that the oil is the correct engine and emissions control system, grade for your engine and conforms to the never use additives in the engine oil. manufacturer's recommendations. Engine coolant It is normal to top up this fluid between two services. Checking using the dipstick Topping up the engine oil level The check and top-up must only be done with For the location of the dipstick, please refer For the location of the engine oil filler cap, please the engine cold. to the illustration of the corresponding engine refer to the corresponding under-bonnet engine A low level presents a risk of serious damage to compartment. compartment illustration. the engine. ► Take the dipstick by its coloured grip and pull ► Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any spills The level of this fluid should be close to the it out completely. on engine components (risk of fire). "MAX" mark but should never exceed it. ► Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean, ► Wait a few minutes before checking the level If the level is close to or below the "MIN” mark, it non-fluffy cloth. again using the dipstick. is essential to top up. ► Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then ► Top up the level if necessary. When the engine is hot, the temperature of this pull it out again to make the visual check: the ► After checking the level, carefully screw the fluid is regulated by the fan. correct level is between marks A and B. oil filler cap back on and replace the dipstick in As the cooling system is pressurised, wait at
its tube. least one hour after switching off the engine before carrying out any work. Within 30 minutes of adding oil, the oil In order to avoid the risk of scalding if you need level indication in the instrument panel to top up in an emergency, wrap a cloth around when the ignition is switched on is not valid. the cap and unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. Once the pressure has dropped, remove the cap A = MAX Brake fluid and top up to the required level. B = MIN The level of this fluid should be close to Do not start the engine if the level is: the "MAX" mark. If not, check the brake pad wear.
155 Practical information
Screenwash fluid Checks Versions equipped with Stop & Start are warning lamp comes on temporarily, fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of accompanied by a message warning of the risk Top up to the required level when Unless otherwise indicated, check these specific technology and specification. of filter clogging. necessary. components in accordance with the Its replacement should be carried out only by As soon as the traffic conditions permit, manufacturer's service schedule and according Fluid specification a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at to your engine. least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp The fluid must be topped up with a ready-to-use Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT goes off. mixture. dealer or a qualified workshop. Passenger compartment In winter (temperatures below zero), a liquid If the warning lamp stays on, this containing an agent to prevent freezing must Only use products recommended by filter indicates a low Diesel additive level. be used which is appropriate for the prevailing PEUGEOT or products of equivalent Depending on the environment and the For more information on Checking levels, conditions, in order to protect the elements of the quality and specification. use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere, refer to the corresponding section. system (pump, tank, ducts, jets, etc.). In order to optimise the operation of city driving), change it twice as often, if components as important as those in the necessary. Following prolonged operation of the Filling with pure water is prohibited under braking system, PEUGEOT selects and offers A clogged passenger compartment filter vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you all circumstances (risk of freezing, very specific products. limestone deposits, etc.). can adversely affect air conditioning may, in exceptional circumstances, notice the system performance and generate emission of water vapour at the exhaust while 12 V battery undesirable odours. accelerating. This has no impact on the AdBlue (BlueHDi) The battery does not require any vehicle’s behaviour or the environment. An alert is triggered when the reserve level is maintenance. Air filter reached. However, check regularly that the terminals New vehicle Depending on the environment and the For more information on Indicators and in are correctly tightened (versions without quick During the first few particle filter use of the vehicle (e.g. dusty atmosphere, particular the AdBlue range indicators, refer to release terminals) and that the connections are regeneration operations, you may notice a city driving), change it twice as often, if the corresponding section. clean. "burning" smell. This is perfectly normal. To avoid the vehicle being immobilised in necessary. accordance with regulations, you must top up the For more information on the precautions AdBlue tank. to take before any work on the 12 V Oil filter Manual gearbox For more information on AdBlue® (BlueHDi), battery, refer to the corresponding section. Change the oil filter each time the engine The gearbox does not require any and in particular on the supply of AdBlue, refer to oil is changed. maintenance (no oil change). the corresponding section. Particle filter (Diesel) Automatic gearbox When the particle filter is The gearbox does not require any approaching saturation, this maintenance (no oil change).
156 Practical information
warning lamp comes on temporarily, Manual parking brake be reduced. Gently dab the brakes to dry and accompanied by a message warning of the risk defrost them. 7 If you notice excessive brake lever travel of filter clogging. or decreased effectiveness, the parking As soon as the traffic conditions permit, brake must be adjusted, even between two regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at Brake disc/drum wear services. least 37 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp For any information on checking brake This system must be checked by a PEUGEOT goes off. disc/drum wear, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. dealer or a qualified workshop. If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a low Diesel additive level. Electric parking brake Wheels and tyres For more information on , This system does not require any routine Checking levels The inflation pressure of all tyres, refer to the corresponding section. servicing. However, in the event of a including the spare wheel, must be problem, do not hesitate to have the system checked on "cold” tyres. checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Following prolonged operation of the The pressures indicated on the tyre pressure workshop. vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you label are valid for "cold" tyres. If you have driven may, in exceptional circumstances, notice the For more information on the Electric for more than 10 minutes or more than 6 miles emission of water vapour at the exhaust while parking brake, refer to the (10 kilometres) at over 31 mph (50 km/h), add accelerating. This has no impact on the corresponding section. 0.3 bar (30 kPa) to the values indicated on the vehicle’s behaviour or the environment. label.
Under-inflation increases fuel New vehicle Brake pads consumption. Non-compliant tyre During the first few particle filter Brake wear depends on the style of pressure causes premature wear on tyres and regeneration operations, you may notice a driving, particularly in the case of vehicles has an adverse effect on the vehicle's road "burning" smell. This is perfectly normal. used in town, over short distances. It may be holding - risk of an accident! necessary to have the condition of the brakes checked, even between vehicle services. Manual gearbox Driving with worn or damaged tyres reduces the Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the braking and road holding performance of the The gearbox does not require any brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads vehicle. It is recommended to regularly check the maintenance (no oil change). are worn. condition of the tyres (tread and sidewalls) and Automatic gearbox After washing the vehicle, moisture, or in wheel rims as well as the presence of the valves. wintry conditions, ice can form on the When the wear indicators no longer appear set The gearbox does not require any brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may back from the tread, the depth of the grooves is maintenance (no oil change).
157 Practical information
less than 1.6 mm; it is imperative to replace the AdBlue® (BlueHDi) An alert system is triggered once the reserve Supply of AdBlue®
tyres. level is reached: it is then possible to drive for a It is recommended that the AdBlue® be topped Using different size wheels and tyres from those further 1,500 miles (2,400 km) before the tank is up as soon as the first alert is issued indicating specified can affect the lifetime of tyres, wheel empty and the vehicle blocked. that the reserve level has been reached. rotation, ground clearance, the speedometer For more information on the Warning reading and have an adverse effect on road In order to ensure that the SCR system and indicator lamps and the associated holding. operates correctly: alerts, or the Indicators, please refer to the Fitting different tyres on the front and rear axles – Use only AdBlue® fluid that meets the ISO corresponding sections. can cause the ESC to mistime. 22241 standard. – Never transfer AdBlue® to another ® Shock absorbers Once the AdBlue tank is empty, a container: it would lose its purity.
system required by legislation prevents ® It is not easy for drivers to detect when – Never dilute AdBlue with water. To respect the environment and ensure starting of the engine. shock absorbers are worn. Nevertheless, compliance with the Euro 6 standard, without If the SCR system is faulty, the level of AdBlue® can be obtained from a PEUGEOT the shock absorbers have a major impact on adversely affecting the performance or fuel emissions from the vehicle will no longer meet dealer or a qualified workshop. road-holding and braking performance. consumption of its Diesel engines, PEUGEOT the Euro 6 standard: the vehicle becomes For your safety and driving comfort, it is has taken the decision to equip its vehicles polluting. Storage recommendations important to have them regularly checked by a with a system that associates SCR (Selective In the event of a confirmed SCR system AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C and deteriorates PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Catalytic Reduction) with a Diesel Particle Filter malfunction, it is essential to visit a above +25°C. Containers should be stored in a Timing and accessory kits (DPF) for the treatment of exhaust gases. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. cool area and protected from direct sunlight. After 680 miles (1,100 km), a device is Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept for Timing and accessory kits are used from SCR System SCR automatically activated to prevent the engine at least a year. the time the engine is started until it is Using a liquid called AdBlue® that contains from starting. If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it has switched off. It is normal for them to wear over urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of In both cases, a range indicator indicates completely thawed out in the ambient air. time. the nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and the distance that can be travelled before the ® A faulty timing or accessory kit can damage Never store AdBlue containers in your water, which are harmless to health and the vehicle is stopped. the engine, rendering it unusable. Observe the vehicle. environment. recommended replacement frequency, stated in The AdBlue® is contained in ® distance travelled or time elapsed, whichever is a special Freezing of the AdBlue holding about 15 litres. ® Precautions for use reached first. tank AdBlue freezes at temperatures below Its capacity allows a driving range of around -11°C. AdBlue® is a urea-based solution. This fluid is approximately 5,600 miles (9,000 km), which The SCR system includes a heater for the non-flammable, colourless and odourless (when may vary considerably depending on your AdBlue® tank, allowing you to continue driving kept in a cool place). driving style. in very cold conditions.
158 Practical information
Supply of AdBlue® In the event of contact with the skin, wash the immediately with cold water or wipe with a ® affected area with soap and running water. In the damp cloth. 7 It is recommended that the AdBlue be topped event of contact with the eyes, immediately rinse If the fluid has crystallised, clean it off using a up as soon as the first alert is issued indicating the eyes with large amounts of water or with an sponge and hot water. that the reserve level has been reached. eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. Seek In order to ensure that the SCR system medical attention if you feel a persistent burning Important: in the event of a top-up after operates correctly: sensation or irritation. a breakdown because of a lack of ® – Use only AdBlue fluid that meets the ISO If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth AdBlue, it is essential to wait around 5 22241 standard. with clean water and then drink plenty of water. minutes before switching on the ignition, ® – Never transfer AdBlue to another In certain conditions (high temperature, for without opening the driver’s door, container: it would lose its purity. example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot unlocking the vehicle, introducing the key ® – Never dilute AdBlue with water. be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia into the ignition switch, or introducing the vapours have an irritant effect on mucous AdBlue® can be obtained from a PEUGEOT key of the “Keyless Entry and Starting” membranes (eyes, nose and throat). . dealer or a qualified workshop. system into the passenger compartment Store AdBlue® out of the reach of Switch on the ignition, then wait for 10 Storage recommendations children, in its original container. seconds before starting the engine. ® AdBlue freezes at about -11°C and deteriorates ► Switch off the ignition and remove the key above +25°C. Containers should be stored in a Procedure from the switch to switch off the engine. cool area and protected from direct sunlight. Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure that or Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept for the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface. ► With Keyless Entry and Starting, press the at least a year. "START/STOP" button to switch off the engine.
In wintry conditions, ensure that the temperature If the fluid has frozen, it can be used once it has of the vehicle is above -11 °C. Otherwise the completely thawed out in the ambient air. AdBlue® may be frozen and so cannot be poured Never store AdBlue® containers in your into its tank. Park the vehicle in a warmer area vehicle. for a few hours to allow the top-up to be carried out.
Precautions for use Never put the AdBlue® into the Diesel AdBlue® is a urea-based solution. This fluid is fuel tank. non-flammable, colourless and odourless (when ® kept in a cool place). If any AdBlue is splashed, or if there are any spillages on the bodywork, rinse
159 Practical information
► Turn the blue cap of the AdBlue® tank a 6th of With manual or EAT6 Release procedure ► While depressing the brake pedal, press the a turn anti-clockwise and remove it. ► With the vehicle stationary and the engine control lever to release the parking brake. ® automatic gearbox and ► With a container of AdBlue : after checking running, select mode N and switch off the ► Release the brake pedal, switch off the the expiry date, read the instructions on the electric parking brake ignition. ignition. label carefully before pouring the contents of the If the 5-second time limit is exceeded, the / Within 5 seconds: container into the vehicle's AdBlue tank. ► Switch on the ignition again. gearbox engages mode P; it is then necessary to ® ► With an AdBlue pump: introduce the nozzle ► While depressing the brake pedal, move the restart the procedure. Release procedure and fill the tank until the nozzle automatically push selector forwards or backwards to confirm Reverting to normal operation cuts out. ► With the engine running and while depressing mode N. ► While depressing the brake pedal, restart the the brake pedal, move the gear selector to the In order not to overfill the AdBlue® tank: ► Switch off the ignition. engine. neutral position. – Add between 10 and 13 litres using If the 5-second time limit is exceeded, the ► While depressing the brake pedal, switch off Keyless Entry and Starting AdBlue® containers. gearbox engages mode P; it is then necessary to the ignition. You must not depress the brake pedal – Stop after the nozzle’s first automatic cut- restart the procedure. ► Release the brake pedal, then switch on the while switching the ignition on or off. If you do, out, if you are refilling at a service station. Reverting to normal operation ignition again. the engine will start, requiring you to restart The system only registers AdBlue® top-ups of ► While depressing the brake pedal, press the ► Press button P on the selector. the procedure. 5 litres or more. control lever to release the parking brake. ► Release the brake pedal, then switch off the With EAT8 automatic ® If the AdBlue tank is completely empty ignition. – which is confirmed by the message gearbox or drive selector Advice on care and Reverting to normal operation "Top up AdBlue: Starting impossible" – it is and electric parking brake maintenance essential to add at least 5 litres. ► While depressing the brake pedal, start the
/ engine. General recommendations Free-wheeling With EAT8 automatic Release procedure Observe the following recommendations to avoid gearbox and manual parking ► With the vehicle stationary and the engine damaging your vehicle. In certain situations, you must allow the vehicle running, select mode N and switch off the Exterior to free-wheel (while being towed, on a rolling brake ignition. road, in an automatic car wash, or being Never use a high-pressure jet wash in / Within 5 seconds: transported by rail or sea freight, etc.). ► Switch on the ignition again. the engine compartment, due to the risk The procedure varies according to the type of ► While depressing the brake pedal, move the of damaging electrical components. gearbox and parking brake. push selector forwards or backwards to confirm Do not wash the vehicle in strong sunshine or mode N. extremely cold conditions.
160 Practical information
► While depressing the brake pedal, press the When washing the vehicle at an controls in the dashboard and centre console. control lever to release the parking brake. automatic roller-brush car wash, be sure Take care! 7 ► Release the brake pedal, switch off the to lock the doors and, depending on version, ignition. remove the electronic key. If the 5-second time limit is exceeded, the When using a pressure washer, hold the Bodywork gearbox engages mode P; it is then necessary to lance at least 30 cm from the vehicle High-gloss paint restart the procedure. (particularly when cleaning areas containing Do not use abrasive products or Reverting to normal operation chipped paint, sensors or seals). Promptly clean up any stains containing solvents, petrol or oil to clean the ► While depressing the brake pedal, restart the chemicals liable to damage the vehicle's paint bodywork. engine. (including tree resin, bird droppings, insect Never use an abrasive sponge to clean Keyless Entry and Starting secretions, pollen and tar). stubborn stains. Risk of scratching the You must not depress the brake pedal If justified by the environment, clean the paintwork! while switching the ignition on or off. If you do, vehicle more frequently to remove salty Do not apply polish in strong sunshine, or to the engine will start, requiring you to restart deposits (in coastal areas), soot (in industrial plastic or rubber parts. the procedure. estates) and mud (in wet or cold areas). These substances can be highly corrosive. Use a soft sponge and soapy water or a Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified pH neutral product. Advice on care and workshop if you require advice on removing Gently wipe the bodywork with a clean stubborn stains requiring special products microfibre cloth. maintenance (such as tar or insect removers). Apply polish with the vehicle clean and dry. Preferably, have paint touch-ups performed Comply with the instructions for use stated on General recommendations by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified the product. Observe the following recommendations to avoid workshop. damaging your vehicle. Decals Interior Exterior (Depending on version) When washing the vehicle, never use a Do not use a high pressure washer to Never use a high-pressure jet wash in water hose or high-pressure washer to clean the vehicle. Risk of damaging or the engine compartment, due to the risk clean the interior. detaching the decals! of damaging electrical components. Liquids carried in cups or other open Do not wash the vehicle in strong sunshine or containers can spill, presenting a risk of extremely cold conditions. damage if they come into contact with the
161 Practical information
Use a high-flow hose at a temperature between 25°C and 40°C. Sweep the jet of water across the surface to be cleaned, perpendicular to it. Rinse the vehicle with demineralised water.
Leather Leather is a natural product. Appropriate regular care is essential for its durability. It must be protected and nourished using a specific leather product, to keep it supple and preserve its original appearance.
Do not clean leather using unsuitable cleaning agents such as solvents, detergents, petrol or pure alcohol. When cleaning items partly made from leather, take care not to damage the other materials with the specific leather product.
Before cleaning greasy stains or liquids, quickly mop up any surplus. Before cleaning, wipe off any residues liable to scuff the leather, using a cloth that has been dampened with demineralised water and thoroughly wrung out. Clean leather using a soft cloth moistened with soapy water or a pH-neutral product. Dry with a soft, dry cloth.
162 In the event of a breakdown Warning triangle Running out of fuel 1.6 HDi engines 8 ► Open the bonnet and then, if necessary, As a safety precaution, before leaving your (Diesel) unclip the cover to access the priming pump. vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch With Diesel engines, the fuel system must be ► Operate the priming pump repeatedly on the hazard warning lamps and put on your primed if you run out of fuel. until resistance is felt (resistance may be high visibility vest. Before starting to prime the system, it is felt at the first press). Assembling and placing the essential to put at least 5 litres of Diesel into the ► Operate the starter motor to start the engine fuel tank. (if the engine does not start at the first attempt, triangle wait around 15 seconds before trying again). For more information on Refuelling and ► If the engine does not start after a few on Misfuel prevention (Diesel), please attempts, operate the priming pump again, then refer to the corresponding section. the starter motor. For non-BlueHDi versions, the fuel system ► Put the cover back in place and clip it in, then components are located in the engine close the bonnet. compartment, possibly under the removable cover. Tool kit For more information on the Engine Set of tools supplied with the vehicle. compartment, in particular the location Its content depends on your vehicle's equipment: of these components under the bonnet, – Temporary puncture repair kit. please refer to the corresponding section. – Spare wheel. For versions supplied with a triangle as original equipment, refer to the illustration above. 1.5 BlueHDi engines Access to the tools For other versions, refer to the assembly ► Switch on the ignition (without starting the Depending on version, the tool kit is stored in a instructions provided with the triangle. engine). bag on the boot carpet or in a storage box under ► Put the triangle in place behind the vehicle, ► Wait around 1 minute and switch off the the boot carpet. as required by local legislation. ignition. ► Operate the starter motor to start the engine. If the engine does not start at the first attempt, do not keep trying, but restart the procedure.
163 In the event of a breakdown
With spare wheel List of tools 4. 12 V compressor with a cartridge of sealant
and a speed limit sticker For temporary repair of a tyre and to adjust the tyre pressure. For more information about the Temporary puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding section.
On the boot carpet With spare wheel
1. Chock to immobilise the vehicle (depending These tools are specific to the vehicle on equipment) and may vary according to the level of 2. Socket for the wheel security bolts (located in equipment. the glove box) (depending on equipment) Do not use them for any other purpose. For adapting the wheelbrace to the special ‘security’ bolts. The jack must only be used to change a 3. Removable towing eye wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre. For more information on Towing the vehicle
Do not use any jack other than the one Under the boot carpet and using the removable towing eye, refer to the supplied with the vehicle. ► Raise the boot carpet by pulling the strap to corresponding section. If the vehicle does not have its original jack, access the tools.
contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified With temporary puncture repair kit
With temporary puncture repair kit workshop to obtain the one that was intended 5. Wheelbrace by the manufacturer. For removing the wheel trim and the wheel The jack meets European standards, as bolts. defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/ 6. Jack with integrated handle CE. To raise the vehicle. The jack does not require any maintenance. 7. Wheel bolt cap remover (depending on equipment) For removing the wheel bolt head finishers on
alloy wheels.
164 In the event of a breakdown
4. 12 V compressor with a cartridge of sealant For more information on the Spare wheel, refer ► Follow the safety instructions (hazard to the corresponding section. warning lamps, warning triangle, high visibility 8 and a speed limit sticker For temporary repair of a tyre and to adjust vest, etc.) according to the legislation in force in the tyre pressure. the country of driving. Temporary puncture ► Switch off the ignition. For more information about the Temporary repair kit ► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor. puncture repair kit, refer to the corresponding section. Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view explanatory videos. With spare wheel Made up of a compressor and a sealant cartridge, it allows you to carry out a temporary repair of the tyre so that you can drive to the nearest garage. It is designed to repair most punctures located on the tyre tread.
The vehicle's electric system allows the connection of the compressor to the 2 V ► Connect the pipe from the compressor to the power supply for long enough to repair a tyre bottle of sealant. after a puncture.
For more information on the Tool kit, 5. Wheelbrace refer to the corresponding section. For removing the wheel trim and the wheel bolts. 6. Jack with integrated handle Repair procedure To raise the vehicle. Do not remove any foreign bodies (e.g. 7. Wheel bolt cap remover (depending on nail, screw) which have penetrated into equipment)
the tyre. For removing the wheel bolt head finishers on ► Turn the bottle of sealant over and secure it alloy wheels. ► Park the vehicle without obstructing traffic in the notch provided on the compressor. and apply the parking brake.
165 In the event of a breakdown
► Remove the valve cap from the tyre to be The tyre inflation pressures are given on The sealant product is harmful if (80 km/h) and do not drive more than repaired, and place it in a clean area. this label. swallowed and causes irritation to the 125 miles (200 km).
eyes. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Keep this product out of the reach of children. workshop to have the tyre changed. The use-by date of the fluid is marked on the
bottle. ► Switch on the ignition. After use, do not discard the bottle in Checking / adjusting tyre
standard waste, take it to a PEUGEOT dealer pressures or an authorised waste disposal site. The compressor can be used, without Do not forget to obtain a new bottle of injecting sealant, to check and, if necessary, sealant, available from a PEUGEOT dealer or adjust the tyre pressures. a qualified workshop. ► Remove the valve cap from the tyre and keep
it in a clean place. ► Connect the hose from the bottle of sealant ► Switch on the compressor by moving the ► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor. to the valve of the tyre to be repaired and tighten switch to position "I" until the tyre pressure ► Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten firmly. reaches 2 bar. The sealant product is injected firmly. ► Check that the compressor switch is in under pressure into the tyre; do not disconnect ► Check that the compressor switch is in position "O". the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk position "O". ► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under of blowback). ► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under the compressor. the compressor. If after approximately 7 minutes, the ► Connect the compressor's electric plug to the ► Connect the compressor's electric plug to the pressure of 2 bar is not reached, this vehicle's 12 V socket. vehicle's 12 V socket. ► Drive immediately for approximately 3 miles indicates that the tyre is not repairable; ► Switch on the ignition. ► Affix the speed limit sticker. contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified (5 kilometres) at reduced speed (between workshop for assistance. 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)) to plug the The tyre inflation pressures are given on puncture. this label. ► Move the switch to position "O". ► Stop to check the repair and the tyre ► Disconnect the compressor's electric plug pressure using the kit. The speed limit sticker must be secured from the vehicle's 12 V socket. With a tyre repaired using this type of kit, to the interior of the vehicle in the area ► Refit the cap on the valve. close to the driver, to remind the driver that a ► Remove the kit. do not exceed a speed of 50 mph ► Start the compressor by placing the switch at wheel is in temporary use. ► Remove and store the bottle of sealant. position "I" and adjust the pressure to the value shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure label. To
166 In the event of a breakdown
(80 km/h) and do not drive more than deflate: press the black button located on the Access to the spare wheel 125 miles (200 km). compressor pipe, near the valve connection. 8 Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified If after 7 minutes the pressure of 2 bar is workshop to have the tyre changed. not reached, the tyre is damaged; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Checking / adjusting tyre workshop for assistance. pressures ► Once the correct pressure is reached, put the The compressor can be used, without switch in position "O".
injecting sealant, to check and, if necessary, ► Remove the kit and stow it. adjust the tyre pressures. Should the pressure of one or more tyres The spare wheel is stored under the boot carpet. ► Remove the valve cap from the tyre and keep be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise If you need access to the spare wheel, first refer it in a clean place. the under-inflation detection system. to the Tool kit section. ► Uncoil the pipe stowed under the compressor. For more information on Tyre under-inflation ► Screw the pipe onto the valve and tighten Depending on version, the spare wheel detection, refer to the corresponding section. firmly. may be a standard steel or 'space-saver' ► Check that the compressor switch is in wheel. position "O". ► Fully uncoil the electric cable stowed under Spare wheel Removing the spare wheel the compressor. Scan the QR Code on page 3 to view ► Connect the compressor's electric plug to the explanatory videos. vehicle's 12 V socket. ► Switch on the ignition. For more information on the Tool kit, The tyre inflation pressures are given on refer to the corresponding section. this label.
► Slacken the central nut. ► Start the compressor by placing the switch at ► Remove the fastening device (nut and bolt). position "I" and adjust the pressure to the value ► Lift the spare wheel towards you from the shown on the vehicle's tyre pressure label. To rear.
167 In the event of a breakdown
► Take the wheel out of the boot. With a manual gearbox, engage first gear to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake, Putting the spare wheel back in place unless it is programmed to be in automatic mode, and switch off the ignition. The punctured wheel cannot be placed in With an automatic gearbox, select mode P the boot under the floor. to lock the wheels, apply the parking brake, unless it is programmed to be in automatic mode, and switch off the ignition. Check for the fixed illumination of the parking brake warning lamps in the instrument panel.
The occupants must get out of the vehicle and wait where they are safe.
If necessary, place a chock under the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to be changed. ► To remove the wheel bolt cover on each of
Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a the bolts, use tool 7 (alloy wheels). ► Put the spare wheel back in place in its jack; use an axle stand. ► Fit security socket 2 on wheelbrace 5 to housing. slacken the security bolt. ► Slacken the nut on the bolt by a few turns. Wheel with wheel trim ► Slacken the other bolts using the ► Position the fastening device (nut and bolt) in When removing the wheel, first remove wheelbrace 5 only.
the middle of the wheel. the wheel trim by pulling at the valve aperture ► Tighten the central nut sufficiently to retain using the wheelbrace. the wheel correctly. When refitting the wheel, refit the wheel ► Depending on version, put the tool box back trim, starting by placing its aperture in line in place in the middle of the wheel and clip it in with the valve and then pushing it into place place. all round its edge with the palm of your hand. Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle ► Place the foot of jack 6 on the ground and Immobilise the vehicle where it does ensure that it is directly below the front A or not obstruct traffic: the ground must be level, rear B jacking point on the underbody, whichever stable and non-slippery. is closest to the wheel to be changed.
168 In the event of a breakdown 8
► Remove the bolts and store them in a clean ► Extend jack 6 until its head comes into place. ► Fit the wheel on the hub. contact with jacking point A or B; contact area A ► Remove the wheel. ► Screw in the bolts by hand as far as possible. or B on the vehicle must be properly inserted ► Pre-tighten the security bolt using the into the central part of the head of the jack. Fitting a wheel wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2. ► Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient ► Pre-tighten the other bolts using the space between the wheel and the ground to wheelbrace 5 only. admit the spare (not punctured) wheel easily.
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the ground is slippery or loose, the jack may
slip or collapse - risk of injury! Take care to position the jack strictly at Fitting a steel or "space-saver" type one of the jacking points A or B under the spare wheel vehicle, ensuring that the head of the jack is If the vehicle is equipped with alloy wheels, centred under the contact area of the vehicle. the washers do not make contact with the Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the steel or "space-saver" type spare wheel. The vehicle and/or of the jack collapsing - risk of wheel is secured by the conical contact of injury! ► Lower the vehicle again fully. each bolt. ► Fold jack and remove it.
6
169 In the event of a breakdown
Driving with more than one “space-saver” their edges for too long, so as not to damage – Number plate lamps. type spare wheel is prohibited. their protective coating and seals. If you need to replace this type of bulb, you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or Visit a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified Changing a bulb must only be done with a qualified workshop. workshop as soon as possible to have the ignition off and after the headlamp / Do not touch LED or Full LED technology the tightness of the bolts and the pressure of lamp has been switched off for several headlamps - risk of electrocution! the spare wheel checked. minutes - risk of serious burns! Have the punctured tyre examined. After Do not touch the bulb directly with your inspection, the technician will advise you on fingers; use a lint-free cloth. Front lamps whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must It is essential only to use anti-ultraviolet ► Tighten the security bolt using the be replaced. (UV) type bulbs, so as not to damage the Model with Full wheelbrace 5 equipped with a security socket 2. headlamp. LED technology headlamps
► Tighten the other bolts using the Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb wheelbrace 5 only. of the same type and specification. To avoid ► Refit the bolt covers to each of the bolts Changing a bulb lighting imbalance, replace the bulbs in pairs. (depending on equipment). In some weather conditions (e.g. low ► Store the tools. temperature or humidity), misting on the Refitting the lamp units After changing a wheel internal surface of the glass of the headlamps Perform the operations in the reverse and rear lamps is normal, and will disappear order to dismantling. after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.
Light-emitting diode (LED) 1. Dipped beam headlamps / Main beam The headlamps have polycarbonate headlamps and lamps headlamps lenses with a protective coating: Depending on version, the affected types of 2. Direction indicators – Do not clean them with a dry or abrasive headlamps / lamps are: 3. Sidelamps With a "space-saver" type spare wheel cloth, nor with detergent or solvent – "LED" technology headlamps. 4. Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps Deactivate certain driving aid functions products. – Full LED technology headlamps. (Active Safety Brake, Adaptive cruise control, – Use a sponge and soapy water or a pH – Offset daytime running lamps. etc.). neutral product. – Direction indicator side repeaters. Do not exceed the maximum authorised – When using a high-pressure washer on – Side spotlamps. speed of 50 mph (80 km/h). persistent marks, do not keep the lance – 3D rear lamps. directed towards the headlamps, lamps or – Third brake lamp.
170 In the event of a breakdown
– Number plate lamps. Model with Opening the bonnet / Accessing the bulbs 8 If you need to replace this type of bulb, LED technology headlamps With the engine warm, proceed with caution - you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or risk of burns! a qualified workshop. Take care with objects or clothing that could Do not touch LED or Full LED technology be caught in the blades of the cooling fan - headlamps - risk of electrocution! risk of strangulation! Front lamps
Model with Full LED technology headlamps
1. Main beam headlamps (LED) Halogen bulbs (Hx) 2. Dipped beam headlamps (LED) To ensure good quality lighting, check 3. Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps (LED) that the bulb is correctly positioned in its 4. Direction indicators (PY21W amber). housing.
Model with halogen headlamps Main / Dipped beam headlamps
1. Dipped beam headlamps / Main beam headlamps 2. Direction indicators
3. Sidelamps 4. Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps
1. Main beam headlamps (H9) 2. Dipped beam headlamps (H18) 3. Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps (W21/5W) 4. Direction indicators (PY21W amber).
171 In the event of a breakdown
Direction indicators Rear lamps 3. Reversing lamps (W16W)
Rapid flashing of a direction indicator Model with Full LED lamps Brake lamps / sidelamps / reversing lamp (left or right) indicates that one of lamps and direction indicators the bulbs on the corresponding side has failed. Rapid flashing of a direction indicator
lamp (left or right) indicates that one of ► Remove the protective cover by pulling the the bulbs on the corresponding side has tab. failed. ► Pull the bulb holder backwards to remove it. ► Pull the bulb to remove it. Amber coloured bulbs, such as the ► Replace the bulb. direction indicators, must be replaced by When refitting the bulb holder in its housing, bulbs with identical colour and specifications. press until you hear a click which means it is
locked in place. ► Remove the protective cover by pulling the These bulbs are changed from inside the boot. 1. Sidelamps / Daytime running lamps tab. ► Open the boot. Daytime running lamps / Sidelamps 2. Brake lamps
► Turn the bulb holder anti-clockwise. 3. Reversing lamps ► Pull the bulb and bulb holder assembly 4. Direction indicators backwards. ► Replace the bulb. Model with halogen headlamps
Amber coloured bulbs must be replaced by bulbs with identical specifications and colour.
► Remove the protective cover by pulling the ► Remove the access flap on the tab. corresponding side trim, so that the lamp unit ► Pull the bulb holder backwards to remove it. fixing can be accessed. ► Pull the bulb to remove it. ► Slacken the fixing nut with a socket wrench. ► Replace the bulb.
► Finish slackening it by hand to recover the When refitting the bulb holder in its housing, nut, . press until you hear a click which means it is 1. Brake lamps / Sidelamps (P21/5W LL) making sure that it does not fall ► Push the retaining clip outwards and remove locked in place. 2. Direction indicators (PY21W amber). the lamp unit from the back.
172 In the event of a breakdown
3. Reversing lamps (W16W) Foglamp (P21W)
8 Brake lamps / sidelamps / reversing lamps and direction indicators
Rapid flashing of a direction indicator lamp (left or right) indicates that one of the bulbs on the corresponding side has failed.
► Unclip the four fixings around the bulb holder. Amber coloured bulbs, such as the ► Remove the bulb holder. direction indicators, must be replaced by Once the lamp unit and the bulb holder are
bulbs with identical colour and specifications. removed: For access, pass your hand under the bumper 1. Brake lamps/sidelamps These bulbs are changed from inside the boot. on the left-hand side. 2. Direction indicators ► Open the boot. ► Turn the bulb holder a quarter turn to the left 3. Reversing lamps and pull it out. ► Turn the bulb 1 or 2 a quarter turn to the left ► Turn the bulb a quarter turn to the left and and remove it. pull it out. ► Pull the bulb 3 to remove it. ► Change the bulb. ► Replace the bulb. Engage the lamp unit in its guides while Changing a fuse keeping it in line with the centreline of the vehicle. Accessing the tools Tighten without forcing to guarantee correct ► Remove the access flap on the The extraction tweezers are located behind the sealing and to avoid damaging the lamp unit. corresponding side trim, so that the lamp unit fusebox cover. Depending on version:
fixing can be accessed. ► Slacken the fixing nut with a socket wrench. ► Finish slackening it by hand to recover the nut, making sure that it does not fall. ► Push the retaining clip outwards and remove the lamp unit from the back.
173 In the event of a breakdown
► Immobilise the vehicle and switch the ignition Fuse tables off. Lower fusebox ► Identify the defective fuse using the current
allocation tables and diagrams. Tweezers To replace a fuse, it is essential to: ► Use the special tweezers to extract the fuse Installing electrical accessories from its housing and check the condition of its Your vehicle's electrical system is filament. designed to operate with standard or optional ► Always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of equipment. the same rating (same colour); use of a different Before installing other electrical equipment ► Unclip the cover by pulling at the top left, then rating may cause malfunctions - risk of fire! or accessories on your vehicle, contact a right. If the fault recurs after replacing a fuse, have PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. ► Remove the cover completely. the electrical system checked by a PEUGEOT ► Take the tweezers from their housing. dealer or a qualified workshop. PEUGEOT accepts no responsibility for The fuse allocation tables and the the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle Fuse N° Rating Functions corresponding diagrams are available or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from (Amps) from a PEUGEOT dealer or from a qualified the installation of accessories not supplied F1 10 A Electrochrome interior rear view mirror workshop. and not recommended by PEUGEOT and not installed in accordance with specifications, in F3 5 A Wireless smartphone charger. particular when the combined power The replacement of a fuse not shown in F4 15 A Horn. the allocation tables may cause a serious consumption of all of the additional equipment connected exceeds 10 milliamperes. F5 20 A Screenwash pump.
malfunction of your vehicle. Contact a Screenwash pump. ► Open the glove box. PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. F6 20 A ► Press on the central handle of the fusebox F7 5 A Rear USB sockets. Fuses in the dashboard cover. The fusebox is located in the lower dashboard F8 20 A Rear wiper. ► Lower the cover completely. (left-hand side). F10 30 A Locking / Unlocking. ► Take the tweezers from their housing. To access the fuses, follow the same procedure as described for accessing the fuse replacement F11 30 A Locking / Unlocking.
Changing a fuse tools. F14 5 A Emergency and assistance calls - Alarm. Before changing a fuse: Good Failed ► Identify the cause of the fault and fix it. F24 5 A 7-inch touch screen. ► Stop all power consumption.
174 In the event of a breakdown Fuse tables 8 Lower fusebox
Fuse N° Rating Functions (Amps) F1 10 A Electrochrome interior rear view mirror F3 5 A Wireless smartphone charger. F4 15 A Horn. F5 20 A Screenwash pump. F6 20 A Screenwash pump. F7 5 A Rear USB sockets. F8 20 A Rear wiper. F10 30 A Locking / Unlocking. F11 30 A Locking / Unlocking. F14 5 A Emergency and assistance calls - Alarm. F24 5 A 7-inch touch screen.
175 In the event of a breakdown
Accessing the fuses
Fuse N° Rating Functions (Amps) F27 5 A Alarm (retrofit). F29 20 A 10-inch touch screen. F31 or F32 15 A Cigarette lighter / 12 V accessory socket.
Upper fusebox
Fuse table
Fuse N° Rating Functions (Amps) F1 40 A Heated rear screen. F2 10 A Heated door mirrors. F3 30 A Front one-touch electric windows. F4 20 A Door mirrors adjustment - Folding door mirrors.
F5 30 A Rear one-touch electric windows. Fuse N° Rating Functions F10 30 A Front heated seats. (Amps) F16 20 A Heated windscreen. Engine compartment fuses F18 10 A Right-hand main beam halogen headlamp. The fusebox is placed in the engine compartment near the battery. F19 10 A Left-hand main beam halogen headlamp.
176 In the event of a breakdown
Accessing the fuses ► Release the two latches A. ► Remove the cover. 8 ► Replace the fuse. ► When you have finished, close the cover carefully, then engage the two latches A to ensure that the fusebox is properly sealed.
Fuse table
Fuse N° Rating Functions (Amps) F16 20 A Heated windscreen. F18 10 A Right-hand main beam halogen headlamp. F19 10 A Left-hand main beam halogen headlamp.
177 In the event of a breakdown
Fuse N° Rating Functions (Amps) F29 40 A Windscreen wipers.
12 V battery / Accessory Electric motor battery Flat accessory battery It is not possible to start the motor or Procedure for starting the engine using another recharge the traction battery. battery or charging a discharged battery. Lead-acid starter batteries Precautions before working on the
accessory battery These batteries contain harmful Select mode P, switch off the ignition, check For access to the (+) terminal: substances (sulphuric acid and lead). that the instrument panel is off and that the ► Release the bonnet by pulling the internal They must be disposed of in accordance vehicle is not plugged in. release lever, then the external safety catch. with regulations and must never under any ► Raise the bonnet. circumstances be discarded with household Recharging the accessory battery (+) Positive terminal. waste. Do not recharge the battery without first This terminal has a quick-release clamp. Take used remote control batteries and disconnecting the terminals and removing the (-) Negative terminal. vehicle batteries to a special collection point. battery from the motor compartment. As the battery's negative terminal is not Do not disconnect the battery terminals while accessible, a remote earth point is located facing Protect your eyes and face before the READY lamp is lit, or while the vehicle is the battery. handling the battery. charging. All operations on the battery must be carried Starting using another out in a well ventilated area and away from battery naked flames and sources of sparks, to avoid Access to the battery If your vehicle's battery is flat, the engine can be any risk of explosion or fire. The battery is located under the bonnet. started using a backup battery (either external or Wash your hands afterwards. from another vehicle) and jump leads or using a battery booster.
178 In the event of a breakdown
Never start the engine by connecting a ► Connect one end of the green or black cable In some circumstances, it may be necessary to battery charger. to the (-) terminal of the backup battery B or of charge the battery: 8 Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster. the booster (or to an earth point on the assisting – using the vehicle mainly for short journeys; Check beforehand that the backup battery vehicle). – if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity ► Connect the other end of the green or black several weeks. at least equal to that of the discharged cable to the earth point C. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified battery. ► Start the engine on the assisting vehicle and workshop. The two vehicles must not be in contact with leave it running for a few minutes. To charge the vehicle's battery yourself, each other. ► Operate the starter on the broken down use only a charger compatible with Switch off all electricity-consuming equipment vehicle and let the engine run. lead-acid batteries with a nominal voltage of on both vehicles (audio system, wipers, If the engine does not start immediately, switch 12 V. lighting, etc.). off the ignition and wait a few moments before Make sure that the jump leads are well away trying again. from the engine’s moving parts (fan, belt, ► Wait for it to return to idle. Follow the instructions provided by the etc.). ► Disconnect the jump leads in reverse order. manufacturer of the charger. Do not disconnect the (+) terminal while the ► Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if Never reverse polarities. engine is running. the vehicle has one. It is not necessary to disconnect the
► Allow the engine to run for at least 30 minutes, with the vehicle stationary, so that battery. the battery reaches an adequate state of charge. ► Switch off the ignition. Drive cautiously during the first 30 ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio minutes after starting the engine. system, lighting, wipers, etc.).
With an automatic gearbox, never try to start the engine by pushing the vehicle.
► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the vehicle has one. Charging the battery using a ► Connect the red cable to the (+) terminal of battery charger flat battery A (at the metal elbow), then to the For optimum service life of the battery, it is (+) terminal of the backup battery B or of the essential to maintain an adequate state of booster. charge.
179 In the event of a breakdown
► Switch off charger B before connecting has not cracked, which would mean a risk of ► Depending on equipment, lift the plastic cover If minor problems nevertheless persist following the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any toxic and corrosive acid leaking. on the (+) terminal. this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a dangerous sparks. ► Raise lever A fully to release clamp B. qualified workshop. ► Ensure that the charger cables are in good Disconnecting the battery ► Remove clamp B by lifting it off. Referring to the relevant section, reset certain condition. Reconnecting the (+) terminal equipment: In order to maintain an adequate state of charge ► Lift the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if the – Remote control key or electronic key vehicle has one. for starting the engine, it is recommended that (depending on version). ► Connect the cables of charger B as follows: the battery be disconnected if the vehicle is – Electric windows. • the positive (+) red cable to the (+) terminal taken out of service for a long period. – Date and time. of battery A, Before disconnecting the battery: – Preset radio stations. • the negative (-) black cable to earth point C ► Close all openings (doors, boot, windows, The Stop & Start system may not be on the vehicle. roof). operational during the trip following the ► At the end of the charging operation, switch ► Switch off all electrical consumers (audio first engine start. off charger B before disconnecting the cables system, wipers, lighting, etc.). In this case, the system will only be available from battery A. ► Switch off the ignition and wait for 4 minutes. At the battery, it is only necessary to disconnect again after a continuous period with the vehicle immobilised, the duration of which the (+) terminal. depends on the exterior temperature and the ► Raise lever A fully. state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 Quick-release terminal clamp ► Refit the open clamp B on the (+) terminal. 24v 12v hours). Disconnecting the (+) terminal ► Push clamp B fully down.
► Lower lever A to lock clamp B. If this label is present, use only a 12 V ► Depending on equipment, lower the plastic charger to avoid causing irreversible cover on the (+) terminal. damage to the electrical components related Do not force the lever as locking will be to the Stop & Start system. Towing constraints impossible if the clamp is not positioned correctly; start the procedure again. Type of vehicle Font wheels on the Rear wheels on the Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground Never try to charge a frozen battery - risk (engine / gearbox)gearbox ground ground with towbar
of explosion! Internal combustion / After reconnection If the battery has frozen, have it checked by a Manual PEUGEOT dealer or by a qualified workshop After reconnecting the battery, turn on the
who will verify that the internal components ignition and wait 1 minute before starting the Internal combustion /
have not been damaged and that the case engine, to enable the electronic systems to Automatic initialise.
180 In the event of a breakdown
If minor problems nevertheless persist following Towing the vehicle – Not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a unlock the steering, or release the parking 8 qualified workshop. General recommendations brake. Referring to the relevant section, reset certain Observe the legislation in force in the – Not possible to tow a vehicle with an equipment: country where you are driving. automatic gearbox, with the engine running. – Remote control key or electronic key Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is – Towing with only two wheels on the ground. (depending on version). higher than that of the towed vehicle. – Four-wheel drive vehicle. – Electric windows. The driver must remain at the wheel of the – No approved towbar available. – Date and time. towed vehicle and must have a valid driving – Preset radio stations. licence. Before towing the vehicle, it is essential The Stop & Start system may not be When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on to put the vehicle in free-wheeling mode. operational during the trip following the the ground, always use an approved towing For more information on Changing to free- first engine start. arm; rope and straps are prohibited. wheeling, refer to the corresponding section. In this case, the system will only be available The towing vehicle must move off gently. again after a continuous period with the When the vehicle is towed with its engine Electric motor vehicle immobilised, the duration of which off, there is no longer braking and steering An electric vehicle must never be used depends on the exterior temperature and the assistance. for road transfers. state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 It may be used, for example, to exit a rut. hours). A professional towing service must be called if: – Broken down on a motorway or main road.
Towing constraints Type of vehicle Font wheels on the Rear wheels on the Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground (engine / gearbox)gearbox ground ground with towbar
Internal combustion / Manual
Internal combustion / Automatic
181 In the event of a breakdown
Towing constraints Type of vehicle Font wheels on the Rear wheels on the Flatbed 4 wheels on the ground (engine / gearbox)gearbox ground ground with towbar
Electric
In case of battery or electric parking brake failure, it is essential to call a professional using flatbed recovery vehicles (excluding manual gearbox).
Access to the tools ► Install the towbar. ► Put the gearbox into neutral. For more information on accessing the Tool kit, refer to the corresponding section. Failure to observe this instruction could result in damage to certain components Towing your vehicle (braking, transmission, etc.) and to the To access the front screw thread: absence of braking assistance the next time the engine is started.
Automatic gearbox: never tow the vehicle
with the driving wheels on the ground and the engine off. ► Unclip the cover by pressing at its left-hand section. ► Unlock the steering and release the parking ► Pull the cover downwards. brake. To tow: ► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both ► Screw the towing eye in fully. vehicles. ► Install the towbar. ► Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a
► Switch on the hazard warning lamps on both short distance. ► Unclip the cover by pressing at its top left- vehicles. hand corner. Towing another vehicle ► Move off gently, drive slowly and only for a To be towed: short distance. To access the rear screw thread:
► Screw the towing eye in fully.
182 Technical data
Engine technical data and When exterior temperatures are high, the vehicle performance may be limited in 9 towed loads order to protect the engine. When the exterior temperature is higher than 37°C, reduce the Engines towed weight. The engine characteristics are given in the vehicle's registration document, as well as in Towing even with a lightly loaded vehicle sales brochures. can adversely affect its road holding. Braking distances are increased when towing The maximum power corresponds to the a trailer. value type-approved on a test bed, under When using a vehicle to tow, never exceed conditions defined in European legislation a speed of 62 mph (100 km/h) (observe the (Directive 1999/99/EC). local legislation in force). For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Weights and towed loads The weights and towed loads relating to the vehicle are indicated on the registration document, as well as in sales brochures. These values are also indicated on the manufacturer's plate or label. For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The GTW (Gross Train Weight) values and the towable loads listed are valid for a maximum altitude of 1,000 metres. The towable load must be reduced by steps of 10% for each additional 1,000 metres. The maximum authorised nose weight corresponds to the weight permitted on the towball.
183 Technical data Engines and towed loads - Petrol
Engines 1.2 PureTech 75 1.2 PureTech 75 1.2 PureTech 1.2 PureTech 100 S&S S&S 100 Gearboxes BVM5 BVM5 BVM6 BVM6 EAT8 (Manual (Manual (Manual (Manual (Auto. 8-speed) 5-speed) 5-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed) Codes EB2FAMD MA EB2FAD MA EB2ADTMD EB2ADTD MB6 EB2ADTD ATN8 STT MB6 STT STT Model codes: HMGB HMHD HNKK HNKS UP... Cubic capacity (cc) 1199 1199 1199 1199 1199 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 55 55 73 73 73 Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 500 500 - 1200 1200 on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) 500 500 - 580 580 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 55 55 - 55 55
184 Technical data
Engines 1.2 PureTech 130 1.2 PureTech 130 S&S 1.2 PureTech 1.2 PureTech 9 155 155 S&S Gearboxes BVM6 EAT6 BVM6 EAT8 EAT8 EAT8 (Manual (Auto. (Manual (Auto. (Auto. (Auto. 6-speed) 6-speed) 6-speed) 8-speed) 8-speed) 8-speed) Codes EB2ADTSM EB2ADTSM EB2ADTS EB2ADTS EB2ADTXM EB2ADTX MB6 AT6III MB6 STT ATN8 STT ATN8 ATN8 STT Model codes: HNLJ HNLW HNSK HNSS HNJP HNNS UP... Cubic capacity (cc) 1199 1199 1199 1199 1199 1199 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 96 96 96 96 114 114 Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Unleaded Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) - 500 - 1200 - - on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) - 500 - 615 - - Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) - 55 - 55 - -
185 Technical data
Engines 1.5 VTi 115 1.5 VTi 115 Engines and towed loads - Diesel
Gearboxes EAT6 EAT6 Engines 1.5 BlueHDi 100 1.5 BlueHDi 130 1.6 HDi 90 (Auto. 6-speed) (Auto. 6-speed) S&S S&S Codes EC5M AT6III EC5F AT6III Gearboxes BVM6 EAT8 BVM5 Model codes: NFJW (Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 8-speed) (Manual 5-speed) UW... Codes DV5RD MB6 STT DV5RC ATN8 STT DV6D BE4 DV6DM BE4 Cubic capacity (cc) 1587 1587 Model codes: YHYJ YHZR 9HPA 9HPA Max. power: EC standard (kW) 84 84 UB... Fuel Unleaded Unleaded Cubic capacity (cc) 1499 1499 1560 1560 Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) - 500 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 73 96 68 68 on a 10% or 12% gradient Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Unbraked trailer (kg) - 500 Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1200 1200 - 500 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) - 55 on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) 580 620 - 500 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 55 55 - 55
186 Technical data Engines and towed loads - Diesel 9 Engines 1.5 BlueHDi 100 1.5 BlueHDi 130 1.6 HDi 90 S&S S&S Gearboxes BVM6 EAT8 BVM5 (Manual 6-speed) (Auto. 8-speed) (Manual 5-speed) Codes DV5RD MB6 STT DV5RC ATN8 STT DV6D BE4 DV6DM BE4 Model codes: YHYJ YHZR 9HPA 9HPA UB... Cubic capacity (cc) 1499 1499 1560 1560 Max. power: EC standard (kW) 73 96 68 68 Fuel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 1200 1200 - 500 on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) 580 620 - 500 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 55 55 - 55
187 Technical data Electric motor Dimensions (mm) These dimensions have been measured on an Model codes: ZKXZ unladen vehicle.
UH... Braked trailer (within the GTW limit) (kg) 0 on a 10% or 12% gradient Unbraked trailer (kg) 0 Maximum authorised nose weight (kg) 0
Electric motor Technology Synchronous with permanent magnets Max. power: EC standard (kW) 100 Traction battery
Technology Lithium-Ion
Installed capacity (kWh) 50 Domestic charging Alternating current voltage (Vac) 230 (single-phase) Rating (A) 8 or 16 Accelerated charging Alternating current voltage (Vac) 230 (single-phase or three-phase) Rating (A) 16 or 32 Fast charging Direct current voltage (Vdc) 400
188 Technical data
Dimensions (mm) – Manufacturer’s name. – European whole vehicle type approval 9 These dimensions have been measured on an number. unladen vehicle.
– Vehicle identification number (VIN). – Gross vehicle weight (GVW). – Gross train weight (GTW). – Maximum weight on the front axle. – Maximum weight on the rear axle.
D. Tyres / paint code label. Fixed at the driver-side door. Bears the following information about the tyres: Identification markings – tyre pressures, unladen and laden. Various visible markings for the identification and – tyre specification, made up of the dimensions research of your vehicle. and type as well as the load and speed indices.
– spare tyre inflation pressure. Also indicates the paint colour code.
The vehicle may be originally equipped with tyres with higher load and speed indices than those indicated on the label, without affecting tyre pressure (on cold tyres).
A. Vehicle identification number (VIN), under the bonnet. Stamped on the chassis. B. Vehicle identification number (VIN), on the dashboard. On a label, visible through the windscreen.
C. Manufacturer's label. Fixed at the right-hand door. Bears the following information:
189 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system
Touch screen – Changing the system settings and – FM/AM/DAB radio stations (depending on Short press: display the list of radio stations. configuration. equipment). Long press: update the list. BLUETOOTH audio – Telephone connected via Bluetooth and Media: system The system is protected in such a way Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). Short press: display the list of folders.
that it will only operate in the vehicle. – USB memory stick. Long press: display the available sorting options. The Energy Economy Mode message is – Media player connected via the auxiliary Short press: change audio source (radio; displayed when the system is about to enter socket (depending on equipment). USB; AUX if equipment connected; CD; streaming). the corresponding mode. In very hot conditions, the volume may Long press: display the call log. be limited to protect the system. It may go into standby (screen and sound off) for at Short press during an incoming call: accept the First steps least 5 minutes. call. The return to normal takes place when the With the engine running, a press mutes Short press during a call in progress: end the temperature in the passenger compartment the sound. call. has dropped. With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. Confirm a selection.
Increase or decrease the volume using the thumbwheel on the left-hand side. Increase volume. Multimedia audio system - To access the menus, press this button on Steering mounted controls Bluetooth® telephone the touch screen. Decrease volume. Press the back arrow to go back a level. Steering mounted controls - The functions and settings described To clean the screen, use a soft, Type 1 Mute/restore sound by simultaneously vary according to the vehicle version and non-abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) pressing the increase and decrease configuration. with no additional product. volume buttons. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Radio: For safety reasons and because they Do not touch the screen with wet hands. Steering mounted controls - Select the previous/next preset radio require sustained attention by the driver, Type 2
station. the following operations must be carried out Certain information is displayed permanently in Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list. with the vehicle stationary and the ignition the upper bar of the touch screen: on: – Air conditioning information (depending on Media: Select the previous/next track. Voice commands: – Pairing the smartphone with the system in version). Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list. This control is located on the steering Bluetooth mode. – Bluetooth connection. wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk – Using the smartphone. – Indication of location data sharing. Radio: Selection of the audio source: (depending on equipment).
190 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system
Short press: display the list of radio stations. Short press, smartphone voice commands via Menus Long press: update the list. the system. 10 Media: Increase volume. Short press: display the list of folders. Radio
Long press: display the available sorting options. Decrease volume. Short press: change audio source (radio; Mute by pressing the volume increase USB; AUX if equipment connected; CD; and decrease buttons simultaneously streaming). (depending on equipment). Long press: display the call log. Restore the sound by pressing one of the two volume buttons. Short press during an incoming call: accept the Change the multimedia source. call. Short press during a call in progress: end the Short press: display the calls log. call. Short press during an incoming call: Confirm a selection. accept the call. Select a radio station. Long press during an incoming call: reject the Increase volume. call. Short press during a call in progress: end the Media Decrease volume. call. Radio (rotate): previous/next preset Mute/restore sound by simultaneously station. pressing the increase and decrease Media (rotate): previous/next track, move in a volume buttons. list. Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing Steering mounted controls - selected, access to presets. Type 2 Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks.
Select an audio source. Voice commands: This control is located on the steering wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk (depending on equipment).
191 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system
Telephone Settings Radio Presetting a station Select a radio station or frequency. Choose the band Press the "Presets" button. Press the "Radio" menu. Make a long press on an empty line to preset the station. An audible signal confirms the presetting Press the "SOURCE" button. of the station. Choose the band: FM, AM or DAB, depending It is possible to preset up to 16 stations. on equipment. To replace a preset station by the Selecting a station currently playing station, make a long Press one of the buttons for an automatic press on the preset station. ® Connect a mobile phone via Bluetooth . Adjust the sound settings (balance, search for radio stations. ambience, etc.), the display (language, Or units, date, time, etc.) or configure the system Press on the displayed frequency. Driving (privacy). Activating/Deactivating RDS
Enter the FM and AM waveband values RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Air conditioning/Heating using the virtual keypad. listening to the same station by automatically
Or retuning to alternative frequencies. Press this button to display the list of In certain conditions, tracking may not be stations received and available on the assured throughout the entire country as waveband. radio stations do not cover 100% of the Radio reception may be affected by the territory. This explains the loss of reception of use of electrical equipment not approved the station during a journey. by the Brand, such as a USB charger Press the "Radio Settings" button. connected to the 12 V socket. Activate, deactivate or configure certain The exterior environment (hills, buildings, vehicle functions (depending on Activate/Deactivate "RDS options". tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may block equipment/version). Depending on equipment/Depending on version. reception, including in RDS mode. This Manage various temperature and air flow behaviour is normal in propagation of radio settings. Playing TA messages waves and does not indicate any failure of the The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives audio system. priority to TA alert messages.
192 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system
Presetting a station To operate, this function needs good reception DAB (Digital Audio of a radio station that transmits this type of 10 Select a radio station or frequency. message. While traffic information is being Broadcasting) radio Press the "Presets" button. broadcast, the current media is automatically Terrestrial Digital Radio interrupted so that the TA message can be Make a long press on an empty line to preset the heard. Normal play of the media previously station. An audible signal confirms the presetting playing is resumed at the end of the message. Choosing the DAB radio of the station. Press the " " button. Terrestrial digital radio (DAB) provides higher It is possible to preset up to 16 stations. Radio Settings quality reception. To replace a preset station by the Activate/Deactivate "Traffic The different "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a currently playing station, make a long announcement (TA)". choice of radio stations arranged in alphabetical press on the preset station. order. Audio settings Press the "Radio" menu. Press the "Radio Settings" button. Press the " " button. Activating/Deactivating RDS SOURCE In the list, select "Audio Settings". In the list of available sources, choose "DAB RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Activate/deactivate and configure the available Radio". listening to the same station by automatically options (sound balance, ambiances, etc.). retuning to alternative frequencies. Activating FM-DAB Tracking The sound balance/distribution is audio In certain conditions, tracking may not be "DAB" does not cover 100% of the territory. processing that allows the quality of the assured throughout the entire country as When the digital radio signal is poor, the sound to be adapted according to where the radio stations do not cover 100% of the "FM-DAB tracking" allows you to continue passengers are sitting in the vehicle. territory. This explains the loss of reception of listening to the same station, by automatically the station during a journey. switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue station (if there is one). Press the "Radio Settings" button. Press the "Radio Settings" button.
Activate/Deactivate "RDS options". Activate "DAB-FM".
Playing TA messages If "FM-DAB tracking" is activated, there may be a difference of a few seconds The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages.
193 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system
when the system switches to "FM" analogue Playlists are updated whenever a USB memory Once connected in Streaming mode, the The audio settings are the same as the radio with sometimes a variation in volume. stick is connected or the contents of a particular smartphone is considered to be a media audio settings for the radio. For more Once the digital signal quality is restored, the USB memory stick are changed. The lists source. information on the "Audio settings", refer to system automatically changes back to "DAB". are memorised: if they are not modified, the the corresponding section. subsequent loading time will be shorter. Connecting Apple® players If the "DAB" station being listened to is Connect the Apple® player to the USB socket Information and advice not available on "FM", or if the "FM-DAB Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket using a suitable cable (not supplied). The system supports USB mass storage tracking" is not activated, the sound will cut Depending on equipment Play starts automatically. devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players out while the digital signal is too weak. Connect a portable device (MP3 player, etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an Control is via the audio system. via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not supplied. audio cable (not supplied). The classifications available are those of Devices are managed using the audio system This source is only available if "Aux the portable device connected (artists/ Media controls. Amplification" has been selected in the audio albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ Other devices, not recognised on connection, settings. podcasts). It is also possible to use a Selecting the source must be connected to the auxiliary socket using First adjust the volume on the portable device classification structured in the form of a Press the " " menu. a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth Media (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the library. streaming, if compatible. audio system. The default classification used is by artist. To Press the " " button. SOURCE Controls are managed via the portable device. modify the classification used, return to the To protect the system, do not use a USB Select the source (USB, Bluetooth or AUX, first level of the menu then select the desired hub. depending on equipment). ® Bluetooth streaming classification (playlists for example) and Streaming allows you to listen to music from your confirm to go down through the menu to the The audio system will only play audio files with USB port smartphone. desired track. ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".mp3", ".mp4", ".m4a", Insert the USB memory stick into the USB The Bluetooth profile must be activated, first ".flac", ".ogg" file extensions and with a bit rate port or connect the USB device to the adjust the volume on the portable device (to a The version of software in the audio system may of between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps (300 Kbps USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). high level). not be compatible with the generation of the maximum for ".flac" files). Apple® player. It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. To protect the system, do not use a USB Then adjust the volume of the system. All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. hub. If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the Media settings The supported sampling rates are 11, 22, 44 and The system builds playlists (in temporary smartphone. Press the "Media Settings" button. 48 KHz. memory); this operation can take from a Control is from the portable device or by using To avoid reading and display problems, we few seconds to several minutes at the first the system's touch buttons. Activate/deactivate track playback options and recommend choosing file names less than 20 connection. access the audio settings. characters long that do not contain any special characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù).
194 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system
The audio settings are the same as the Use only USB memory sticks in FAT or FAT32 Procedure from the telephone audio settings for the radio. For more format (File Allocation Table). Select the name of the system in the list 10 information on the "Audio settings", refer to We recommend using the original USB of devices detected. the corresponding section. cable for the portable device. In the system, accept the connection request from the telephone.
Information and advice Procedure from the system The system supports USB mass storage Telephone Press the Home button to access the devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players menus. via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not ® Pairing a Bluetooth Select the "Telephone" menu. supplied. Devices are managed using the audio system telephone Press "Manage connections". controls. Up to 10 phones can be paired to the system. The list of telephones detected is displayed. Other devices, not recognised on connection, Activate the Bluetooth function on the telephone Select the name of the telephone in the list. must be connected to the auxiliary socket using beforehand and ensure that it is "visible to all" The system offers to connect the telephone with a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth (telephone configuration). two profiles: streaming, if compatible. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is – as " ": hands-free kit, telephone used (from the telephone or from the system), Telephone only. To protect the system, do not use a USB ensure that the code is the same in the system – as " ": wireless playing of audio files hub. and in the telephone. Streaming on the telephone. The audio system will only play audio files with The services available depend on the The system cannot be connected to ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".mp3", ".mp4", ".m4a", network, the SIM card and the multiple telephones with the same profile. ".flac", ".ogg" file extensions and with a bit rate compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. No more than 2 phones can be connected of between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps (300 Kbps Check for services availability in the phone's simultaneously ( ). maximum for ".flac" files). manual and with the operator. 1 per profile It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. The Bluetooth profiles chosen on the All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. The profiles compatible with the system phone have priority over the profiles The supported sampling rates are 11, 22, 44 and are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, DID, A2DP, selected on the system. 48 KHz. AVRCP, SPP and PAN. To avoid reading and display problems, we If the pairing procedure fails, it is recommended recommend choosing file names less than 20 Go to the Brand's website for more information that you deactivate and then reactivate the characters long that do not contain any special (compatibility, additional help, etc.). Bluetooth function on the telephone. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù).
195 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system
Depending on the type of telephone, the To accept the call: Or make a long press Settings option is given to accept or not accept Make a short press on the steering the transfer of contacts and the call log. mounted TEL button. on the steering mounted TEL button. To reject the call: Adjusting the brightness Make a long press Press "Contacts". Press "Settings". Automatic reconnection Select the desired contact from the list offered. On return to the vehicle, if the last telephone on the steering mounted TEL button. Select "Display". connected is present again, it is automatically Calling a recently used number Press the buttons to adjust the recognised and within about 30 seconds Or Press "Telephone". brightness of the screen and/or of of switching on the ignition, the pairing is Press "End call" on the touch screen. the instrument panel (depending on version). established automatically (Bluetooth activated). Press "Calls". Or Modifying system settings Managing paired telephones Making a call Make a long press Press "Settings". To connect or disconnect a paired telephone: Using the telephone is not recommended Select the "Telephone" menu. on the steering mounted TEL button. Press "System". while driving. Press "Privacy" to access the privacy Parking the vehicle. Press "Bluetooth" to display the list of Select the desired contact from the list offered. settings. paired devices. Make the call using the steering mounted Select "Units" to change the units of A call in progress remains active in the Press on the name of the telephone chosen in controls. distance, fuel consumption and vehicle for 10 minutes after switching off the list to disconnect it. temperature. the ignition. After that, the system switches off Press again to connect it. Press "Factory settings" to return to the Calling a new number and the call automatically redirects to the initial settings. Press "Telephone". telephone. Deleting a telephone Press "System Info" to check the system Press the "Bluetooth" button. version. Press the " " button. Keypad It is always possible to make a call Press "Manage connections". directly from the telephone; as a safety Privacy settings Enter the phone number using the digital In the displayed window select "Delete". measure, first park the vehicle. Three data privacy options are available: keypad. The list of paired devices is displayed. "No data sharing (data, vehicle Press "OK" to start the call. Press on the name of the telephone to delete. position)" "Only data sharing" Receiving a call Calling a contact An incoming call is announced by a ring and a “Data and vehicle position sharing" Press the "Telephone" menu. superimposed display in the screen.
196 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system
Settings When data and vehicle position sharing Frequently asked are enabled, this symbol is displayed in 10 the upper bar of the touch screen. questions Adjusting the brightness The following information groups together the Press " ". Settings Selecting the language answers to the most frequently asked questions Press "Settings". concerning the system. Select "Display". Press the buttons to adjust the Select "Languages" to change the Radio brightness of the screen and/or of language. The reception quality of the tuned radio the instrument panel (depending on version). station gradually deteriorates or the station Set date and time Modifying system settings presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz Press "Settings". is displayed, etc.). Press " ". Settings The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s Press "Date/Time". transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the Press " ". System geographical area. Press " " to access the privacy Privacy Setting the date: ► Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar settings. Press the arrows to set the day, month to enable the system to check whether there is Select " " to change the units of Units and year. a more powerful transmitter in the geographical distance, fuel consumption and Setting the time: area. temperature. Press these buttons to set hours and The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, Press " " to return to the Factory settings minutes. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, initial settings. Select or deselect the 24h format. including in RDS mode. Press " " to check the system System Info This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is version. In 12h format, choose "AM" or "PM". not indicative of an audio system malfunction. Privacy settings The aerial is missing or has been damaged (for example while entering a car wash or Three data privacy options are available: The system does not automatically underground car park). " manage the change between winter and No data sharing (data, vehicle ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. position)" summer time. I cannot find some radio stations in the list of "Only data sharing" Date format: received stations. Select the display format of the date. The name of the radio station changes. “ " Data and vehicle position sharing The station is no longer received or its name has changed in the list.
197 Touch screen BLUETOOTH audio system
Some radio stations send other information The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer Settings in place of their name (the title of the song for of this information. When the treble and bass settings are example). changed, the ambience is deselected. The system interprets these details as the station Telephone When the ambience is changed, the treble name. I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. and bass settings are reset. ► Press the " " button then Radio Settings The telephone's Bluetooth function may be Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and select "Update list". The radio reception is switched off or the telephone may not be visible. bass settings, and vice versa. cut off while searching for available stations ► Check that the telephone has Bluetooth ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience (approximately 30 seconds). switched on. settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. ► Check in the telephone settings that it is There is a difference in sound quality Media "visible to all". between audio sources. Playback of my USB memory stick starts only The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). the system. settings can be tailored to different audio Some files supplied with the memory stick may ► Check the compatibility of the telephone on sources, which can generate audible differences greatly slow down access to reading the memory the Brand's website (services). when changing source. stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing The volume of the telephone connected in ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate time). Bluetooth mode is inaudible. to the sources listened to. Adjust the sound ► Delete the files supplied with the memory The volume depends on both the system and the functions to the middle position. stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the telephone. When the engine is off, the system switches file structure on the memory stick. Ambient noise affects the quality of the off after several minutes of use. Some characters in information about the telephone call. When the engine is switched off, the system's currently playing media are not displayed ► Increase the volume of the audio system, to operating time depends on the state of charge of correctly. maximum if required, and increase the volume of the battery. The audio system is unable to process certain the telephone if necessary. The switch-off is normal: the system types of character. ► Reduce ambient noise (close windows, automatically goes into energy economy mode ► Use standard characters to name tracks and reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.). and switches off to maintain an adequate charge folders. The contacts are not listed in alphabetical in the battery. Playback of streaming files does not start. order. ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the The connected device does not automatically Some telephones offer display options. charge of the battery. launch playback. Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can ► Start playback from the device. be transferred in a specific order. Track names and playing times are not ► Modify the telephone directory display displayed on the audio streaming screen. settings.
198 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
PEUGEOT Connect applications interrupt their display while the At all times it is possible to display the rolling vehicle is moving). menus by pressing the screen briefly with three 11 Radio – Changing the system settings and fingers. configuration. All of the touch areas of the screen are white. For pages with multiple tabs at the bottom of the The system is protected in such a way screen, it is possible to switch between pages that it will only operate in the vehicle. either by tapping the tab for the desired page, or The Energy Economy Mode message is by using a finger, sliding the pages to the left or displayed when the system is about to enter to the right. the corresponding mode. Press in the grey zone to go back up a level or to confirm. Press the back arrow to go back a level or The system’s Open Source Software confirm. (OSS) source codes are available at the following addresses: The touch screen is of the "capacitive" Multimedia audio system - https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ type. Applications - Bluetooth® https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional telephone product. The functions and settings described First steps Do not use sharp objects on the screen. Do not touch the screen with wet hands. vary according to the vehicle version and With the engine running, a press mutes configuration. the sound. Certain information is displayed permanently in With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. the upper bar of the touch screen: For safety reasons and because they Increase or decrease the volume using – Air conditioning status information (depending require sustained attention by the driver, the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons on version), and direct access to the the following operations must be carried out (depending on the equipment). corresponding menu. with the vehicle stationary and the ignition Use the buttons on either side of or below the – Radio Media and Telephone menu status on: touch screen for access to the menus, then information. – Pairing the smartphone with the system in press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. – Privacy status information. Bluetooth mode. Depending on the model, use the "Source" or – Access to the touch screen and digital – Using the smartphone. "Menu" buttons on the left of the touch screen instrument panel settings. – Connection to the CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM for access to the menus, then press the virtual Audio source selection (depending on or Android Auto applications (certain buttons in the touch screen. equipment):
199 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
– FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on Steering mounted controls Steering mounted controls - Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing equipment). selected, access to presets. – Telephone connected via Bluetooth and Type 2 Radio: display the list of stations.
Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). Steering mounted controls - Media: display the list of tracks. – USB Memory stick. Type 1 Radio (press and hold): update the list of – Media player connected via the auxiliary Voice commands: stations received.
socket (depending on equipment). This control is located on the steering
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk Radio: (depending on equipment). Menus Select the previous/next preset radio Short press, smartphone voice commands via station. the system. Applications
Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list. Increase volume. Media: Select the previous/next track. Decrease volume. Select the previous/next item in a menu or a list. Mute by pressing the volume increase Radio: and decrease buttons simultaneously Short press: display the list of radio (depending on equipment).
stations. Restore the sound by pressing one of the two Long press: update the list. In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to volume buttons. Media: create a profile for an individual or for a (short press): change the Short press: display the list of folders. Media group of people with shared interests, and multimedia source.
Long press: display the available sorting options. configure a wide range of settings (radio Telephone (short press): start telephone Change audio source (radio; USB; AUX if Access configurable equipment. presets, audio settings, ambiences, etc.). call. equipment connected; CD; streaming). Settings are applied automatically. (short press): access Confirm a selection. Call in progress telephone menu. (long press): reject an incoming call, In very hot conditions, the volume may Increase volume. Telephone be limited to protect the system. It may end call; when no call is in progress, access telephone menu. enter standby mode (with the screen and Decrease volume. sound off) for 5 minutes or more. Radio (rotate): automatic search for the previous/next station. The system will resume normal operation Mute/restore sound by simultaneously (rotate): previous/next track, move in a when the temperature in the passenger pressing the increase and decrease Media list. compartment has dropped. volume buttons.
200 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing Radio Media Settings selected, access to presets. 11 Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks. Radio (press and hold): update the list of stations received. Menus Applications
Select an audio source or radio station. Configure a personal profile and/or configure the sound (balance, ambience, etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, Telephone etc.).
Driving
Access configurable equipment.
Connect a mobile phone via Bluetooth®.
Run certain applications on a smartphone connected via MirrorLinkTM, CarPlay® or Android Activate, deactivate or configure certain Auto. vehicle functions.
201 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Navigation Applications Press this button to search and select a Enter the FM and AM waveband values recipient. using the virtual keypad. Viewing photos Select the "Quick messages” tab. Press "OK" to confirm. Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. Press this button to select the display Radio reception may be affected by the settings for messages. To protect the system, do not use a USB use of electrical equipment not approved Press this button to write a new message. hub. by the Brand, such as a USB charger connected to the 12 V socket. The system can read folders and image files in Press the bin alongside the selected The exterior environment (hills, buildings, the formats: .tiff; .gif; .jpg/jpeg; .bmp and .png. message to delete it. tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Press Applications to display the main Press this button alongside the selected
block reception, including in RDS mode. page. message to display the secondary page. This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the Configure the navigation and select your Press "Photos". Press this button to edit and modify the TM ® context of radio wave transmission, and destination via MirrorLink , CarPlay or existing text. in no way indicative of an audio system Android Auto. Select a folder. Press this button to write a new message. malfunction.
Air conditioning Select an image to view. Press the bin to delete the message.
Changing the waveband Press this button to display the details of Press Radio Media to display the main the photo. Radio page. Press the back arrow to go back a level. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the 18,5 21,5 secondary page. Selecting a station Press "Band" to change waveband. Managing messages Press Radio Media to display the main Press Applications to display the main page. Press in the shaded area to confirm. page. Press one of the buttons to perform an automatic search for radio stations. Press "SMS". Manage various temperature and air flow Or Presetting a station Move the slider to manually search for settings. Select the "SMS” tab. Select a radio station or frequency. frequencies up or down. Make a short press on the star outline. If Or Press this button to select the display the star is solid, the radio station is Press the frequency. settings for messages. already preset.
202 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Enter the FM and AM waveband values Or Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the using the virtual keypad. Select a radio station or frequency. secondary page. 11 Press "OK" to confirm. Press "Preset". Activate/deactivate "News". Make a long press on one of the buttons to preset the station. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Radio reception may be affected by the use of electrical equipment not approved Activating/Deactivating RDS by the Brand, such as a USB charger RDS, if activated, allows you to continue Playing TA messages connected to the 12 V socket. listening to the same station by automatically The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives The exterior environment (hills, buildings, retuning to alternative frequencies. priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may Press to display the main function needs good reception of a radio station block reception, including in RDS mode. Radio Media page. that transmits this type of message. While traffic This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the Press the " " button to access the information is being broadcast, the current context of radio wave transmission, and OPTIONS secondary page. media is automatically interrupted so that the in no way indicative of an audio system Activate/deactivate " ". TA message can be heard. Normal play of the malfunction. RDS previously playing media resumes at the end of Press in the shaded area to confirm. the message. Changing the waveband Press Radio Media to display the main page. Press Radio Media to display the main RDS station tracking may not be Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the page. available nationwide, as many radio secondary page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the stations do not cover 100 % of the country. Activate/deactivate "TA". secondary page. This explains the loss of reception of the Press "Band" to change waveband. station during a journey. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Press in the shaded area to confirm. Displaying text information The "Radio Text" function displays information Audio settings Presetting a station transmitted by the radio station relating to the Press Radio Media to display the main Select a radio station or frequency. station or the currently playing song. page. Make a short press on the star outline. If Press Radio Media to display the main Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the the star is solid, the radio station is page. secondary page. already preset. Press "Audio settings".
203 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Select the "Tone", "Balance", "Sound", DAB (Digital Audio Press in the shaded area to confirm. Playlists are updated whenever the ignition "Voice" or "Ringtones" tab to configure is switched off or a USB memory stick is the sound settings. Broadcasting) radio connected. The audio system memorises these If "FM-DAB Follow-up" is activated, there Press the back arrow to confirm. lists, which will subsequently load faster if they Terrestrial Digital Radio may be a time offset of a few seconds have not been changed. when the system switches to "FM" analogue In the "Tone" tab, the Ambience, Bass, Terrestrial Digital Radio radio, and in some cases a change in volume. Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket Medium and Treble sound settings are When the digital signal quality is restored, the Digital radio provides higher quality sound. Depending on equipment different and independent for each audio system automatically changes back to "DAB". The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a Connect a portable device (MP3 player, source. choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an In the "Balance” tab, the All passengers, If the "DAB" station being listened to is order. audio cable (not supplied). Driver and Front only settings are common not available on "FM", or if "FM-DAB Press Radio Media to display the main This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" to all sources. Follow-up" is not activated, the sound will cut page. has been selected in the audio settings. In the "Sound” tab, activate or deactivate out while the digital signal is too weak. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the First adjust the volume on the portable device "Volume linked to speed", "Auxiliary input" secondary page. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the and "Touch tones". Press "Band" to select "DAB band". audio system. Media Controls are managed via the portable device. The balance/distribution (or spatialisation Press in the shaded area to confirm. with the Arkamys© system) uses audio Selecting the source processing to adjust the sound quality USB port Press Radio Media to display the main according to the number of passengers in the FM-DAB Follow-up Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port or connect the USB device to the page. vehicle. "DAB" does not cover 100 % of the country. USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Press the "SOURCES" button. When the digital radio signal is poor, the Select the source. Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© "FM-DAB Follow-up" enables you to continue To protect the system, do not use a USB optimises the sound distribution inside listening to the same station by automatically hub. BluetoothStreaming® the passenger compartment. switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed station (if there is one). The system builds playlists (in temporary memory); this operation can take from a from your smartphone. Press Radio Media to display the main The Bluetooth profile must be activated. page. few seconds to several minutes at the first connection. First adjust the volume on the portable device Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the secondary page. Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. system. Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up".
204 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Playlists are updated whenever the ignition If play does not start automatically, it may be Information and advice is switched off or a USB memory stick is necessary to start the audio playback from the 11 The system supports USB mass storage connected. The audio system memorises these smartphone. devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players lists, which will subsequently load faster if they Control is from the portable device or by using via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not have not been changed. the system's touch buttons. supplied. Auxiliary (AUX) jack socket Once connected in Streaming mode, the Devices are managed using the audio system smartphone is considered to be a media controls. Depending on equipment source. Other devices, not recognised on connection, Connect a portable device (MP3 player, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an ® a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth audio cable (not supplied). Connecting Apple players streaming, if compatible. This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" Connect the Apple® player to the USB socket To protect the system, do not use a USB has been selected in the audio settings. using a suitable cable (not supplied). hub. First adjust the volume on the portable device Play starts automatically. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the Control is via the audio system. The audio system will only play audio files with audio system. ".wav", ".wma", ".aac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file Controls are managed via the portable device. The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists/ extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and Selecting the source albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ 320 Kbps. podcasts). It is also possible to use a It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. Press Radio Media to display the main classification structured in the form of a No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. page. library. All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. Press the "SOURCES" button. The default classification used is by artist. To The supported sampling rates are 11, 22, 44 and Select the source. modify the classification used, return to the 48 KHz. BluetoothStreaming® first level of the menu then select the desired To avoid reading and display problems, we classification (playlists for example) and recommend choosing file names less than 20 Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed confirm to go down through the menu to the characters long that do not contain any special from your smartphone. desired track. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù). The Bluetooth profile must be activated. Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format First adjust the volume on the portable device The version of software in the audio system may (File Allocation Table). (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the not be compatible with the generation of the We recommend using the original USB system. Apple® player. cable for the portable device.
205 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Telephone MirrorLinkTM smartphone Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® application in the system. interface. USB sockets connection Once the connection is established, a page is On connecting the USB cable, the TM displayed, showing the applications already Depending on equipment, for more information The "MirrorLink " function requires a CarPlay® function deactivates the downloaded to the smartphone that are on the USB sockets compatible with the compatible smartphone and applications. ® TM system's Bluetooth mode. CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto compatible with MirrorLink technology. applications, refer to the "Ease of use and Access to the different audio sources remains TM When the USB cable is disconnected comfort" section. Telephone not connected by available in the margin of the MirrorLink Bluetooth® display, using the touch buttons located in the and the ignition is switched off then back on, the system will not automatically switch to The synchronisation of a smartphone When connecting a smartphone to the upper bar. Radio Media mode; the source must be allows users to display applications system, we recommend enabling Access to the menus for the system is possible ® TM changed manually. adapted to the CarPlay , MirrorLink or Bluetooth® on the smartphone. at any time using the dedicated buttons. Android Auto technology of the smartphone Connect a USB cable. The smartphone ® ® There may be a pause before The CarPlay navigation can be accessed on the vehicle screen. For the CarPlay charges when connected by a USB cable. ® applications become available, at any time by pressing the system's technology, the CarPlay function must be From the system, press " " to Telephone depending on the quality of the network. Navigation button. activated on the smartphone beforehand. display the main page. For the communication process between TM Press "MirrorLink " to start the Android Auto smartphone the smartphone and the system to work, it is application in the system. CarPlay® smartphone essential in all cases that the smartphone is Depending on the smartphone, it may be connection unlocked. TM connection necessary to activate the "MirrorLink " On the smartphone, download the Connect a USB cable. The smartphone As the principles and standards are function. Android Auto application. charges when connected by a USB cable. constantly changing, it is recommended During the procedure, several screen From the system, press to The "Android Auto" function requires the that you keep the smartphone's operating pages relating to certain features are Telephone display the CarPlay® interface. use of a compatible smartphone and system up-to-date, as well as the date and displayed. Or applications. time of the smartphone and of the system. Accept to start and complete the connection. For the list of eligible smartphones, go to the If the smartphone has already connected Brand's national website. Telephone connected by Bluetooth® by Bluetooth®. Telephone not connected by Connect a USB cable. The smartphone ® Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Bluetooth charges when connected by a USB cable. charges when connected by a USB cable. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone From the system, press "Telephone" to From the system, press "Telephone" to charges when connected by a USB cable. display the main page. display the main page. From the system, press "Telephone" to Press the "PHONE" button to access the Press the "PHONE" button to display the display the main page. secondary page. secondary page.
206 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® Press "Android Auto" to start the Pairing a Bluetooth® interface. application in the system. 11 Depending on the smartphone, it may be telephone On connecting the USB cable, the necessary to activate the "Android Auto" CarPlay® function deactivates the The services available depend on the function. system's Bluetooth® mode. network, the SIM card and the During the procedure, several screen compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. pages relating to certain features are Consult the telephone user guide and the When the USB cable is disconnected displayed. service provider to check which services are and the ignition is switched off then back Accept to start and complete the connection. available. on, the system will not automatically switch to When connecting a smartphone to the Radio Media mode; the source must be system, we recommend enabling The Bluetooth function must be activated changed manually. Bluetooth® on the smartphone. and the telephone configured as "Visible ® The CarPlay navigation can be accessed Telephone connected by Bluetooth® to all” (in the telphone settings). at any time by pressing the system's From the system, press "Telephone" to Navigation button. To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is display the main page. used (from the telephone or from the system), Android Auto smartphone Press the "PHONE" button to display the ensure that the code is the same in the system secondary page. and in the telephone. connection Press "Android Auto" to start the On the smartphone, download the application in the system. If the pairing procedure fails, we Android Auto application. Access to the different audio sources remains recommend deactivating and then available in the margin of the Android Auto reactivating the Bluetooth function on the The "Android Auto" function requires the display, using the touch buttons located in the telephone. use of a compatible smartphone and upper bar. applications. Access to the menus for the system is possible Procedure from the telephone at any time using the dedicated buttons. Select the name of the system in the list Telephone not connected by There may be a pause before of detected devices. Bluetooth® applications become available, In the system, accept the connection request Connect a USB cable. The smartphone depending on the quality of the network. from the telephone. charges when connected by a USB cable. From the system, press "Telephone" to display the main page.
207 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Procedure from the system Visit the Brand's website for more information Press on the name of the telephone Calling a new number Press Telephone to display the main (compatibility, additional help, etc.). selected in the list to disconnect it. Press Telephone to display the main page. Press again to connect it. page. Press "Bluetooth search". Automatic reconnection Enter the phone number using the digital The list of detected telephones is On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone Deleting a telephone keypad. displayed. connected is present again, it is automatically Press the basket at the top right of the Press "Call" to start the call. Select the name of the chosen telephone recognised and within about 30 seconds screen to display a basket alongside the in the list. after switching on the ignition, the pairing is telephone chosen. established automatically (Bluetooth activated). Press the basket alongside the telephone Calling a contact Connection sharing To modify the connection profile: chosen to delete it. Press Telephone to display the main The system offers to connect the telephone with Press Telephone to display the main page. 3 profiles: page. Receiving a call Or press and hold – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), Press the "PHONE" button to access the An incoming call is announced by a ring and a – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of secondary page. superimposed display in the screen. the steering mounted PHONE button. audio files on the telephone), Press "Bluetooth connection" to Make a short press on the steering – "Mobile internet data". display the list of paired devices. mounted PHONE button to accept an Press "Contacts". Select one or more profiles. Press the "Details" button for a paired incoming call. Select the desired contact from the displayed list. device. And Press "Call". Press "OK" to confirm. Select one or more profiles. Make a long press
Depending on the type of telephone, you may by Press "OK" to confirm. on the steering mounted PHONE button Calling a recently used prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and to reject the call. number messages. Or Managing paired telephones Press "End call". Press Telephone to display the main The ability of the system to connect just This function lets you connect or disconnect a page. one profile depends on the telephone. device or delete a pairing. Or All three profiles may connect by default. Press Telephone to display the main Making a call Press and hold page. The profiles compatible with the system Press the "PHONE" button to access the Using the telephone is not recommended the steering mounted button. are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, secondary page. while driving. MAP and PAN. Press "Bluetooth connection" to Parking the vehicle. Press "Recent calls". display the list of paired devices. Make the call using the steering mounted Select the desired contact from the displayed list. controls.
208 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Calling a new number It is always possible to make a call Press the back arrow again to confirm. directly from the telephone; as a safety 11 Press Telephone to display the main page. measure, first park the vehicle. Press this button to reset the selected Enter the phone number using the digital profile. keypad. Setting the ringtone Press "Call" to start the call. Adjusting the brightness Press Telephone to display the main Press Settings to display the main page. page. Calling a contact Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press Brightness. secondary page. Press Telephone to display the main Press "Ring volume" to display the page. Move the slider to adjust the brightness of volume bar. Or press and hold the screen and/or the instrument panel Press the arrows or move the slider to set (depending on version). the ring volume. the steering mounted PHONE button. Press in the shaded area to confirm.
Press "Contacts". Settings Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Modifying system settings Press "Call". Configuring profiles Press Settings to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Configuration" to access the Calling a recently used secondary page. Press "Profiles". number Press "System configuration". Press Telephone to display the main Select "Profile 1", "Profile ",2 "Profile 3” or Press the "Units" tab to change the units of page. " ". Common profile distance, fuel consumption and temperature. Or Press this button to enter a name for the Press the "Factory settings" tab to restore the Press and hold profile using the virtual keypad. initial settings. Press "OK" to save. the steering mounted button. Returning the system to factory settings Press the back arrow to confirm. activates the English language by default Press "Recent calls". (depending on version). Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Press this button to activate the profile.
209 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Press the "System info" tab to display the Press the back arrow to confirm. Press the back arrow to save the settings. Frequently asked versions of the various modules installed in the system. questions The system may not automatically Press the "Privacy" tab, Selecting the language manage the change between winter and The following information groups together the or Press to display the main page. Settings summer time (depending on the country of answers to the most frequently asked questions Press Settings to display the main page. sale). concerning the system. Press "Configuration" to access the Press "Privacy" to activate or deactivate secondary page. Radio the private data mode. Select "Language" to change the Setting the date The reception quality of the tuned radio Activate or deactivate: language. Press Settings to display the main page. station gradually deteriorates or the station Press the back arrow to confirm. presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Press "Configuration" to access the is displayed, etc.). – "Only data sharing” secondary page. The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s – "Data and vehicle position sharing" Setting the time Press "Date and time". transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the Press the back arrow to confirm. Press Settings to display the main page. geographical area. Select "Date". ► Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar Press Settings to display the main page. Press "Configuration" to access the Press this button to set the date. to enable the system to check whether there is secondary page. a more powerful transmitter in the geographical Press "Configuration" to access the Press "Date and time". Press the back arrow to save the date. area. secondary page. The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, Press "Screen configuration". Select "Time". Select the display format for the date. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, Press this button to set the time using the including in RDS mode. Press "Brightness". virtual keypad. Press the back arrow again to confirm. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is Move the slider to adjust the brightness of Press "OK" to save the time. not indicative of an audio system malfunction. the screen and/or the instrument panel The aerial is missing or has been damaged Time and date setting is only available if (depending on version). Press this button to set the time zone. (for example while entering a car wash or "GPS Synchronisation:" is deactivated. Press the back arrow to confirm. underground car park). Select the display format for the time ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. Press "Animation". (12h/24h). I cannot find some radio stations in the list of Activate or deactivate: “Automatic Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 received stations. scrolling”. hour). The name of the radio station changes. Select "Animated transitions". Activate or deactivate GPS The station is no longer received or its name has synchronisation (UTC). changed in the list.
210 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Frequently asked ► Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer "Radio" page. of this information. 11 questions Some radio stations send other information The following information groups together the in place of their name (the title of the song for Telephone answers to the most frequently asked questions example). I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. concerning the system. The system interprets these details as the station The telephone's Bluetooth function may be name. switched off or the telephone may not be visible. Radio ► Press the round arrow on the "List" tab on the ► Check that the telephone has Bluetooth The reception quality of the tuned radio "Radio" page. switched on. station gradually deteriorates or the station ► Check in the telephone settings that it is presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz Media "visible to all". is displayed, etc.). Playback of my USB memory stick starts only The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). the system. transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the Some files supplied with the memory stick may ► Check the compatibility of the telephone on geographical area. greatly slow down access to reading the memory the Brand's website (services). ► Activate the "RDS" function in the upper bar stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing Android Auto and CarPlay do not work. to enable the system to check whether there is time). Android Auto and CarPlay may not activate if the a more powerful transmitter in the geographical ► Delete the files supplied with the memory USB cables are of poor quality. area. stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the ► Use genuine USB cables to ensure The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, file structure on the memory stick. compatibility. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, Some characters in information about the The volume of the telephone connected in including in RDS mode. currently playing media are not displayed Bluetooth mode is inaudible. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is correctly. The volume depends on both the system and the not indicative of an audio system malfunction. The audio system is unable to process certain telephone. The aerial is missing or has been damaged types of character. ► Increase the volume of the audio system, to (for example while entering a car wash or ► Use standard characters to name tracks and maximum if required, and increase the volume of underground car park). folders. the telephone if necessary. ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. Playback of streaming files does not start. Ambient noise affects the quality of the I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The connected device does not automatically telephone call. received stations. launch playback. ► Reduce ambient noise (close windows, The name of the radio station changes. ► Start playback from the device. reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.). The station is no longer received or its name has Track names and playing times are not The contacts are not listed in alphabetical changed in the list. displayed on the audio streaming screen. order.
211 PEUGEOT Connect Radio
Some telephones offer display options. When the engine is off, the system switches Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can off after several minutes of use. be transferred in a specific order. When the engine is switched off, the system's ► Modify the telephone directory display operating time depends on the state of charge of settings. the battery. The switch-off is normal: the system Settings automatically goes into energy economy mode When the treble and bass settings are and switches off to maintain an adequate charge changed, the ambience is deselected. in the battery. When the ambience is changed, the treble ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the and bass settings are reset. charge of the battery. Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and bass settings, and vice versa. ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. When the balance settings are changed, the distribution is deselected. When the distribution setting is changed, the balance settings are deselected. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the balance settings, and vice versa. ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution setting to obtain the desired sound quality. There is a difference in sound quality between audio sources. To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound settings can be tailored to different audio sources, which can generate audible differences when changing source. ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate to the sources listened to. Adjust the sound functions to the middle position.
212 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
PEUGEOT Connect Nav applications interrupt their display while the Use the menu buttons on either side of or below
vehicle is moving). the touch screen for access to the menus, then 12 – Watching a video (the video stops when the press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. vehicle starts to move again). Depending on the model, use the "Source" or – Changing the system settings and "Menu" buttons to access the rolling menus, then configuration. press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Display the rolling menus at any time by pressing The system is protected in such a way the screen briefly with three fingers. that it will only operate in the vehicle. All of the touch areas of the screen are white. The Energy Economy Mode message is Press the back arrow to go back a level. displayed when the system is about to enter Press "OK" to confirm.
the corresponding mode. The touch screen is of the "capacitive" GPS navigation - type. System and map updates can be To clean the screen, use a soft, non-abrasive Applications - Multimedia downloaded from the Brand’s website. cloth (e.g. spectacles cloth) with no additional audio system - Bluetooth® The update procedure is also available on the product. website. Do not use sharp objects on the screen. telephone Do not touch the screen with wet hands. The functions and settings described The system’s Open Source Software Certain information is displayed permanently vary according to the vehicle version and (OSS) source codes are available at the in the side bars or in the upper bar of the touch configuration. following addresses: screen (depending on equipment): https://www.groupe-psa.com/fr/oss/ – Air conditioning status information (depending https://www.groupe-psa.com/en/oss/ For safety reasons and because they on version), and direct access to the require sustained attention by the driver, corresponding menu. the following operations must be carried out – Go directly to the audio source selection with the vehicle stationary and the ignition First steps option, to view the list of radio stations (or list of on: With the engine running, a press mutes titles depending on the source). – Pairing the smartphone with the system in the sound. – Go to the "Notifications" of messages, emails, Bluetooth mode. With the ignition off, a press turns the system on. map updates and, depending on the services, – Using the smartphone. Increase or decrease the volume using the navigation notifications. ® TM – Connection to the CarPlay , MirrorLink the wheel or the "plus" or "minus" buttons – Go to the settings for the touch screen and the or Android Auto applications (certain (depending on the equipment). digital instrument panel.
213 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Audio source selection (depending on enter standby mode (with the screen and Telephone (long press): reject an incoming call, Applications equipment): sound off) for 5 minutes or more. end call; when no call is in progress, access – FM/DAB/AM radio stations (depending on The system will resume normal operation telephone menu. equipment). when the temperature in the passenger Radio (rotate): automatic search for the – Telephone connected via Bluetooth and compartment has dropped. previous / next station. Bluetooth multimedia broadcast (streaming). Media (rotate): previous / next track, move in a – USB memory stick. list. – Media player connected via the auxiliary Steering mounted controls Short press: confirm a selection; if nothing socket (depending on equipment). selected, access to presets. Voice control: – Video (depending on equipment). Radio: display the list of stations. This control is located on the steering Media: display the list of tracks.
wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk Radio (press and hold): update the list of (depending on equipment). stations received. Run certain applications on a smartphone Short press, system voice control. connected via CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM Long press, voice control for smartphone or (available in some countries) or Android Auto. CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM (availability depending on Menus Check the status of Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi country), Android Auto via the system. connections. Increase volume. Connected navigation Radio Media Decrease volume. Mute by pressing the volume increase In the "Settings" menu, it is possible to and decrease buttons simultaneously FM 87.5 MHz create a profile for an individual or for a (depending on equipment). group of people with shared interests, and Restore the sound by pressing one of the two configure a wide range of settings (radio volume buttons. presets, audio settings, navigation history, Media (short press): change the favourite contacts, etc.). Settings are applied multimedia source. automatically. Telephone (short press): start telephone call.
Call in progress (short press): access Enter navigation settings and choose a In very hot conditions, the volume may Select an audio source or radio station, or telephone menu. destination. be limited to protect the system. It may Use real-time services, depending on equipment. display photographs.
214 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Applications Telephone Vehicle 12
Run certain applications on a smartphone Connect a telephone via Bluetooth®, read Activate, deactivate or configure certain connected via CarPlay®, MirrorLinkTM messages and emails and send quick vehicle functions. (available in some countries) or Android Auto. messages. Check the status of Bluetooth® and Wi-Fi Air conditioning connections. Settings
Radio Media
18,5 21,5 FM 87.5 MHz
Manage various temperature and air flow Configure a personal profile and/or settings.
configure the sound (balance, ambience, Select an audio source or radio station, or etc.) and the display (language, units, date, time, display photographs. etc.).
215 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Voice commands Example of a "voice command" for the radio and step. There's more information available in media: "novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to "Play artist Madonna" "expert" when you feel comfortable. Steering wheel-mounted Example of a "voice command" for the controls telephone: Global voice commands Voice commands: "Call David Miller" Voice commands Voice commands can be issued from any The voice commands, with a choice of 17 screen page after a short press on the "Voice languages (Arabic, Brazilian, Czech, Set dialogue mode as novice - expert commands" button located on the steering Select user 1 / Select profile John Danish, Dutch, English, Farsi, French, Increase temperature wheel or at the end of the lighting control stalk German, Italian, Norwegian, Polish, A number of commands are available when a Decrease temperature (depending on equipment), as long as there is no Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish, menu is selected.
telephone call in progress. Turkish), are made using the language Help messages To ensure that voice commands are previously chosen and set in the system. There are lots of topics I can help you with. always recognised by the system, please For some voice commands, there are You can say: "help with phone", "help with follow these recommendations: alternative synonyms. navigation", "help with media" or "help with – Example: Guide to / Navigate to / Go to / ... use natural language in a normal tone radio". For an overview on how to use voice The voice commands in Arabic for: "Navigate without breaking up words or raising your controls, you can say "help with voice controls". to address" and "Display POI in the city", are voice. Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" – always wait for the "beep" (audible signal) not available. and we'll start that again. before speaking.
– for best results, closing the windows and Information - Using the "Navigation" voice sunroof is recommended, to avoid extraneous Press the Push To Talk button and tell me interference (depending on version). system what you'd like after the tone. Remember commands – before issuing a voice command, ask any When voice commands are activated, by you can interrupt me at any time by pressing this Voice commands other passengers to refrain from speaking. briefly pressing the button, help is button. If you press it again while I'm waiting for displayed on the touch screen, offering various you to speak, it'll end the conversation. If you Navigate home menus and enabling voice-based interaction with need to start over, say "cancel". If you want to Navigate to work First steps the system. undo something, say "undo". And to get Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club
Example of a "voice command" for information and tips at any time, just say "help". Navigate to contact, John Miller navigation: If you ask to me do something and there's some Navigate to address 11 regent street, London "Navigate to address 11 regent street, information missing that I need, I'll give you Help messages London" some examples or take you through it step by
216 PEUGEOT Connect Nav step. There's more information available in To plan a route, say "navigate to" followed by the distance" or "arrival time". To learn more "novice" mode. You can set the dialogue mode to address, the contact name or an intersection. For commands, try saying "help with navigation". 12 "expert" when you feel comfortable. example, "navigate to address 11 Regent Street, Voice commands London", "navigate to contact, John Miller", Global voice commands or "navigate to intersection of Regent Street, Show POI ''hotel'' at the destination Voice commands London". You can specify if it's a preferred Show nearby POI petrol station address, or a Point of Interest. For example, say Navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London Set dialogue mode as novice - expert "navigate to preferred address, Tennis club", or Navigate to POI petrol station along the route Select user 1 / Select profile John "navigate to POI Heathrow Airport in London". Help messages Increase temperature Or, you can just say, "navigate home". To see Decrease temperature Points of Interest on a map, you can say things To see points of interest on a map, you can Help messages like "show POI hotels in Banbury". For more say things like "show hotels in Banbury", "show information say "help with points of interest" or nearby parking", "show hotel at the destination" There are lots of topics I can help you with. "help with route guidance". or "show petrol station along the route". If you You can say: "help with phone", "help with To choose a destination, say something like prefer to navigate directly to a point of interest, navigation", "help with media" or "help with "navigate to line three" or "select line two". If you you can say "navigate to nearby petrol station". radio". For an overview on how to use voice can't find the destination but the street's right, If you feel you are not being well understood, controls, you can say "help with voice controls". say for example "select the street in line three". try to say the word "POI" in front of the point Say "yes" if I got that right. Otherwise, say "no" To move around a displayed list, you can say of interest. For example say "navigate to POI and we'll start that again. "next page" or "previous page". You can undo restaurant at the destination". your last action and start over by saying "undo", To choose a POI, say something like "select "Navigation" voice or say "cancel" to cancel the current action. line 2". If you've searched for a Point of Interest commands Voice commands and don't see the one you're after, you can filter further by saying something like "select POI in Voice commands Tell me the remaining distance line 2", or "select the city in line 3". You can also Tell me the remaining time scroll through the list by saying "next page" or Navigate home Tell me the arrival time "previous page". Navigate to work Stop route guidance Navigate to preferred address, Tennis club Depending on the country, give Help messages Navigate to contact, John Miller destination (address) instructions in the language configured for the system. Navigate to address 11 regent street, London You can say "stop" or "resume route guidance".
Help messages To get information about your current route, you can say "tell me the remaining time", "remaining
217 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
"Radio Media" voice Voice commands Media voice commands are available David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of only with a USB connection. calls, say "display calls". For more information on commands What's playing? SMS, you can say "help with texting". Voice commands Help messages To choose a contact, say something like "select "Telephone" voice line three". To move around the list say "next Turn on source radio - Streaming Bluetooth To choose what you'd like to play, start by saying commands page" or "previous page". You can undo your last - … "play" and then the item. For example, say "play action and start over by saying "undo", or say Help messages song Hey Jude", "play line 3" or "select line 2". If there is no telephone connected by "cancel" to cancel the current action. You can undo your last action and start over Bluetooth, a voice message announces: You can select an audio source by saying "turn by saying "undo", or say "cancel" to cancel the "Please first connect a telephone", and the "Text message" voice on source" followed by the device name. For current action. voice session is closed. commands example, "turn on source, Streaming Bluetooth", Voice commands Voice commands or "turn on source, radio". Use the command If there is no telephone connected by "play" to specify the type of music you'd like to Play song Hey Jude Bluetooth, a voice message announces: Call David Miller* hear. You can choose between "song", "artist", Play artist Madonna "Please first connect a telephone", and the Call voicemail* or "album". Just say something like "play artist, Play album Thriller voice session is closed. Display calls* Madonna", "play song, Hey Jude", or "play Help messages album, Thriller". Help messages The "Text messages" voice commands Voice commands I'm not sure what you'd like to play. Please say To make a phone call, say "call" followed by function allows you to dictate and send "play" and then a song title, an album title, or the contact name, for example: "Call David an SMS. Tune to channel BBC Radio 2 an artist name. For example, say "play song Miller". You can also include the phone type, for Dictate the text, taking care to pause briefly Tune to 98.5 FM Hey Jude", "play artist Madonna" or "play example: "Call David Miller at home". To make between each word. Tune to preset number five album Thriller". To select a line number from the a call by number, say "dial" followed by the When you have finished, the voice recognition Help messages display, say "select line two". To move around phone number, for example, "Dial 107776 835 system will automatically generate an SMS. a displayed list, you can say "next page" or 417". You can check your voicemail by saying You can pick a radio station by saying "tune to" "previous page". You can undo your last action Voice commands "call voicemail". To send a text, say "send quick and the station name or frequency. For example and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" message to", followed by the contact, and then "tune to channel Talksport" or "tune to 98.5 to cancel the current action. Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late the name of the quick message you'd like to FM". To listen to a preset radio station, say for Help messages send. For example, "send quick message to example "tune to preset number five".
* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding * This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding download has been performed. download has been performed.
218 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
David Miller, I'll be late". To display the list of From the list of quick messages, say the name of Bill Carter, I'll be late". Check the phone menu calls, say "display calls". For more information on the one you'd like to send. To move around the for the names of the supported messages. 12 SMS, you can say "help with texting". list you can say "go to start", "go to end", "next The system only sends pre-recorded To choose a contact, say something like "select page" or "previous page". You can undo your last "Quick messages". line three". To move around the list say "next action and start over by saying "undo", or say page" or "previous page". You can undo your last "cancel" to cancel the current action. action and start over by saying "undo", or say Voice commands "cancel" to cancel the current action. Navigation Send SMS to John Miller, I'm just arriving "Text message" voice Send SMS to David Miller at the office, don't Choice of a destination commands wait for me Help messages To a new destination If there is no telephone connected by Intuitive method: Bluetooth, a voice message announces: Please say "call" or "send quick message to", Press Navigation to display the main "Please first connect a telephone", and the and then select a line from the list. To move page. voice session is closed. around a list shown on the display, you can Press "Search…". say "go to start", "go to end", "next page" or The "Text messages" voice commands "previous page". You can undo your last action Enter an address or key words for your function allows you to dictate and send and start over by saying "undo", or say "cancel" destination. an SMS. to cancel the current action. Press "OK" to select the "Guidance Dictate the text, taking care to pause briefly Voice commands criteria". between each word. Or When you have finished, the voice recognition Listen to most recent message* Guided method: system will automatically generate an SMS. Help messages Before you can use the navigation Voice commands To hear your last message, you can say "listen to feature, you must enter the "City", the most recent message". When you want to send "Street" (suggestions are displayed Send quick message to Bill Carter, I'll be late a text, there's a set of quick messages ready for automatically when you begin typing), and the Help messages you to use. Just use the quick message name "Number" on the virtual keypad, or select an and say something like "send quick message to
* This function is available only if the telephone connected to the system supports downloading of contacts and recent calls and the corresponding download has been performed.
219 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
address from the "Contact" list or the address To a recent destination To a contact "History". Press Navigation to display the main Press Navigation to display the main page. page. If you do not confirm the house number, Press the "MENU" button to access the Press the "MENU" button to access the the navigation system will show one end secondary page. secondary page. of the street. Select "My destinations". Select "My destinations". Press the "MENU" button to access the Select the "Recent” tab. Select the "Contact” tab. secondary page. Select the address chosen in the list to display Select a contact in the list to start guided Select "Enter address". the "Guidance criteria”. navigation. Press "OK" to start guided navigation. Then To points of interest (POI) Select the Country Guided method: Select "Position" to see the point of Points of interest (POI) are listed in different Select the keyboard “language”. arrival on the map. categories. Press to display the main Change the keyboard "type" according to Navigation page. the selected "language": ABCDE; To "Home" or "My work" Press the " " button to access the AZERTY; QWERTY or QWERTZ. Press Navigation to display the main MENU secondary page. Enter the "City", the "Street" and the page. Select "Points of interest". "Number", and confirm by pressing on Press the "MENU" button to access the the displayed suggestions. secondary page. Select the "Travel", "leisure", Press "OK" to select the "Guidance Select "My destinations". "Commercial", "Public" or "Geographic” criteria". tab. And/or Select the "Preferred” tab. Or Select "See on map" to choose the Select "Home". Select "Search" to enter the name and "Guidance criteria". address of a POI. Press "OK" to start guided navigation. Or Select "My work". Press "OK" to calculate the route.
Zoom in/out using the touch buttons or Or Or with two fingers on the screen. Select a preset favourite destination. Intuitive method:
220 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
You can only select this method in order To a point on the map A marker is displayed in the middle of the to use the service if a network connection screen, with the "Latitude" and 12 Press Navigation to display the main is active; this may be either a "network " " coordinates. page. Longitude connection provided by the vehicle", if you Choose the type of coordinates: Explore the map by sliding a finger on the use the Peugeot Connect Packs solution, or DMS for: Degrees, Minutes, Seconds. screen. else a "network connection provided by the DD for: Degrees, Decimals. Select the destination by pressing on the map. user" via a smartphone, Press this button to start guided Tap the screen to place a marker and In both cases, the system is automatically navigation. display the sub-menu. connected to the Internet, if network coverage Or Press this button to start guided permits. Press this button to save the displayed navigation. address. Or Press Navigation to display the main OR Press this button to save the displayed page. Press this button to enter the " " address. Latitude Press the "MENU" button to access the value using the virtual keypad. secondary page. A long press on a point opens a list of And Select "Search". nearby POIs. Press this button to enter the "Longitude" value using the virtual keypad. Press on the mode shown in the bottom right of the screen (On-Board or Connected) to change To GPS coordinates TMC (Traffic Message "Database". Press Navigation to display the main Select the "Database" in "On-Board" page. Channel) mode (integrated into the map), or in Explore the map by sliding a finger on the Available in some countries. "Connected" mode (connected to the Internet). screen. TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages Press the back arrow to confirm. Touch the screen with a finger to go to the next are based on a European standard for traffic image. information broadcasting via the RDS system on Enter an address or key words for your Press this button to display the world FM radio, sending traffic information in real time. destination (POI). map. The TMC information is then displayed on a GPS Press "OK" to start the search. Using the grid, select the desired country or Navigation system map and taken into account region by zooming. straight away when routes are calculated, to Select the "On the route", "Around the Press this button to display or enter the avoid accidents, traffic jams and closed roads. vehicle" or "At destination" tab to refine GPS coordinates. Danger zone alerts may or may not be your search. displayed, depending on the applicable Select the desired address to calculate the route.
221 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
legislation and subscription to the update the smartphone operating system Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or Press "Private mode". corresponding service. as well as the date and time on the "Stored” tab. smartphone and system, to ensure that the Select a network. THEN communication process between the Activate or deactivate: Connected navigation smartphone and the system functions Using the virtual keypad, enter the Wi-Fi correctly. network "Key” and "Password". – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Depending on version, vehicle trim level and Press "OK" to establish a connection – “Only data sharing" subscription to online services and options. USB connection between the smartphone and the – "Sharing data and vehicle position" Connect the USB cable. vehicle’s system. Connected navigation The smartphone charges when connected Settings specific to by the USB cable. Usage restrictions: connection ® Bluetooth connection – With CarPlay , connection sharing is connected navigation Network connection provided by the Activate the Bluetooth function on the only available with a Wi-Fi connection. Press Navigation to display the main – With MirrorLinkTM, connection sharing is page. vehicle telephone and ensure that it is visible to all (see the "Connect-App" section). only available with a USB connection. Press the "MENU" button to access the If you use the Peugeot Connect Packs Wi-Fi connection The quality of services depends on the quality secondary page. solution, the system is automatically Select a Wi-Fi network detected by the of the network connection. Select "Settings". connected to the Internet and connected system and connect to it. services, and does not require the user to Select the "Map” tab. provide a connection via their smartphone. This function is only available if it has Authorize sending OR been activated either via the information Activate or deactivate: "Notifications" or via the "Applications" menu. – "Allow declaration of danger zones". Network connection provided by the Press Settings to display the main page. – "Guidance to final destination on foot". Press "Notifications". user These settings must be configured for each Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the
profile. Select Wi-Fi to activate it. secondary page. Select "System configuration". Press “OK” to confirm your selection. For the list of suitable smartphones, visit OR Select the "Alerts” tab. the Brand's national website. Press Connect-App to display the main Select the "Private mode” tab. page. Activate or deactivate: Activate and enter settings for sharing the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the OR smartphone connection. secondary page. Press "Notifications". – "Advise of car park nearby". Select "Wi-Fi network connection". As processes and standards are – "Filling station alert". constantly changing, we recommend you
222 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press "Private mode". – “Risk areas alert" then press the warning icon Declaration: "Risk areas (triangle) to configure alerts. 12 THEN – "Give an audible warning". alert" Activate or deactivate: – "Advise proximity of POI 1". To send information about danger zones, – "Advise proximity of POI 2". select the option:Allow declaration of – "No sharing (data, vehicle position)". Press “OK” to confirm your selection. danger zones – “Only data sharing" – "Sharing data and vehicle position" Press Navigation to display the main The "Notifications", in the upper bar, can page. be accessed at any time. Settings specific to Press the "Declare a new danger zone" connected navigation button located in the side bars or the Danger zone alerts may or may not be upper bar of the touch screen (depending on Press Navigation to display the main displayed, depending on the applicable equipment). page. legislation and subscription to the Select the "Type” option to select the type Press the "MENU" button to access the corresponding service. of "Danger area". secondary page. Select the ""Speed" option and enter it Select "Settings". When "TOMTOM TRAFFIC” appears, the using the virtual keypad. services are available. Press "OK" to save and send the Select the "Map” tab. The services offered with connected information. navigation are as follows. Activate or deactivate: A Connected Services pack: Displaying fuel information – "Allow declaration of danger zones". – Weather, Press Navigation to display the main – "Guidance to final destination on foot". – Filling stations, page. These settings must be configured for each – Car park, Press this button to display the list of profile. – Traffic, services. Press “OK” to confirm your selection. – POI local search. Press "POI on map" to display the list A Danger area pack (optional). of points of interest. Select the "Alerts” tab. Press one of the buttons to search for " ". Activate or deactivate: Stations Activate/deactivate "Stations". – "Advise of car park nearby". Press this button to display a secondary – "Filling station alert". page.
223 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Select the "Settings” tab. Press this button to display the list of CarPlay® function must first be activated on Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® services. the smartphone. interface. Select the desired fuel. Select "View map". In all cases, the smartphone must be On connecting the USB cable, the unlocked, to enable the communication CarPlay® function deactivates the Press "OK" to save. Select "Weather". process between the smartphone and the system's Bluetooth® mode. system to function. Press this button to display basic As principles and standards are constantly Displaying charging station information. changing, we recommend keeping the When the USB cable is disconnected details Press this button to display detailed smartphone's operating system up-to- and the ignition is switched off then back weather information. date, together with the date and time on on, the system will not automatically switch to Press Navigation to display the main the smartphone and the system. Radio Media mode; the source must be page. The temperature displayed at 6 a.m. will changed manually. Press this button to display the list of be the maximum temperature for the day. services. The temperature displayed at 6 p.m. will be Connectivity TM Press "POI on map" to display the list the minimum temperature for the night. Press Applications to display the main MirrorLink smartphone of points of interest. page. connection Press one of the buttons to search for Press "Connectivity" to access the CarPlay®, The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires a "Stations". Applications MirrorLinkTM or Android Auto functions. Activate/deactivate "Stations". compatible smartphone and compatible USB ports CarPlay® smartphone applications. Press this button to display a secondary Depending on equipment, for more information You can check that your telephone is ® connection page. on the USB ports compatible with CarPlay , compatible on the Brand's website (services). TM Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Select the "Settings” tab. MirrorLink or Android Auto applications, refer When connecting a smartphone to the to the "Ease of use and comfort" section. charges when connected by a USB cable. system, we recommend enabling Select the desired connector type. Press "Telephone" to display the ® For the list of suitable smartphones, visit CarPlay® interface. Bluetooth on the smartphone. the Brand's national website. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Press "OK" to save. Or Connect a USB cable. The smartphone charges when connected by a USB cable. Synchronising a smartphone enables charges when connected by a USB cable. From the system, press "Applications" to Displaying weather users to display applications that support From the system, press "Applications" to display the main page. the smartphone’s MirrorLinkCarPlay®, TM or display the main page. Press "Connectivity" to access the TM information Android Auto technology on the vehicle’s Press "Connectivity" to access the "CarPlay®” "MirrorLink ” function. TM Press Navigation to display the main screen. For CarPlay® technology, the function. Press "MirrorLink " to start the page. application in the system.
224 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press "CarPlay" to display the CarPlay® Depending on the smartphone, it may be From the system, press "Applications" to interface. necessary to activate the "MirrorLinkTM" display the main page. 12 function. Press "Connectivity" to access the "Android On connecting the USB cable, the During the procedure, several screen Auto” function. CarPlay® function deactivates the pages relating to certain features are Press "Android Auto" to start the system's Bluetooth® mode. displayed. application in the system. Accept to start and complete the connection. During the procedure, several screen When the USB cable is disconnected Once the connection is established, a page is pages relating to certain features are and the ignition is switched off then back displayed, showing the applications already displayed. on, the system will not automatically switch to downloaded to the smartphone that are Accept to start and complete the connection. Radio Media mode; the source must be compatible with MirrorLinkTM technology. Access to the different audio sources remains changed manually. Access to the different audio sources remains available in the margin of the Android Auto available in the margin of the MirrorLinkTM display, using the touch buttons located in the MirrorLinkTM smartphone display, using the touch buttons located in the upper bar. upper bar. Access to the menus for the system is possible connection Access to the menus for the system is possible at any time using the dedicated buttons. at any time using the dedicated buttons. The "MirrorLinkTM" function requires a In Android Auto mode, the function that compatible smartphone and compatible There may be a pause before displays rolling menus by briefly pressing applications. applications become available, the screen with three fingers is disabled. You can check that your telephone is depending on the quality of the network. compatible on the Brand's website (services). There may be a pause before applications become available, When connecting a smartphone to the Android Auto smartphone depending on the quality of the network. system, we recommend enabling connection Bluetooth® on the smartphone. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Install the "Android Auto" application on Car Apps charges when connected by a USB cable. the smartphone via "Google Play". Press Applications to display the main From the system, press " " to Applications The "Android Auto" function requires the use page. display the main page. of a compatible smartphone and applications. Press "Car Apps" to display the applications Press " " to access the Connectivity home page. "MirrorLinkTM” function. Connect a USB cable. The smartphone Press "MirrorLinkTM" to start the charges when connected by a USB cable. application in the system.
225 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Internet Browser If the pairing procedure fails, we – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of Wi-Fi connection sharing recommend deactivating and then audio files on the smartphone), Press Applications to display the main Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system. reactivating the Bluetooth function on the – "Mobile internet data". page. Press Connect-App to display the main smartphone. Press "Connectivity" to access the "Connected The "Mobile internet data" profile must page. Apps” function. be activated for connected navigation (if Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press "Connected Apps" to display the browser Procedure from the smartphone the vehicle does not have "Emergency and secondary page. home page. Select the name of the system in the list assistance call" services), after first activating Select "Share Wi-Fi connection". Select the country of residence. of detected devices. smartphone connection sharing. In the system, accept the connection request Select the "Activation" tab to activate or Select one or more profiles. Press "OK" to save and start the browser. from the smartphone. deactivate Wi-Fi connection sharing. And/or Press "OK" to confirm. Select the "Settings" tab to change the system’s Connection to the internet is via one of Procedure from the system network name and password. the network connections provided by the Press Connect-App to display the main Press "OK" to confirm. vehicle or the user. page. Wi-Fi connection Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Network connection via the smartphone's Wi-Fi. secondary page. To protect against unauthorised access ® Press Connect-App to display the main Bluetooth connection Press "Bluetooth connection". and to make all systems as secure as page. possible, the use of a security code or a The services available depend on the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select "Search". complex password is recommended. network, the SIM card and the secondary page. The list of detected smartphones is compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. Select " ". displayed. Wi-Fi network connection Consult the smartphone user guide and the Select the name of the chosen Managing connections service provider to check which services are Select the "Secured", "Not secured" or smartphone in the list. Press Connect-App to display the main available. " ” tab. Stored page. Depending on the type of smartphone, Select a network. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the you may by prompted to accept the The Bluetooth function must be activated secondary page. transfer of contacts and messages. Using the virtual keypad , enter the Wi-Fi and the smartphone configured as Select "Manage connection". "Visible to all". network "Key" and "Password". Press " " to establish the connection. OK With this function, you can view the access to To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is Connection sharing connected services, the availability of connected used (from the smartphone or from the system), The system offers to connect the smartphone services and modify the connection mode. ensure that the code is the same in the system with 3 profiles: The Wi-Fi connection and Wi-Fi and in the smartphone. – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), connection sharing are exclusive.
226 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Wi-Fi connection sharing Radio This phenomenon is perfectly normal in the context of radio wave transmission, and 12 Creation of a local Wi-Fi network by the system. in no way indicative of an audio system Press Connect-App to display the main Selecting a station malfunction. page. Press Radio Media to display the main Press the " " button to access the OPTIONS page. secondary page. Press "Frequency". Presetting a station Select " ". Share Wi-Fi connection Press one of the buttons to perform an Select a radio station or frequency. automatic search for radio stations. (refer to the corresponding section) Select the "Activation" tab to activate or Or Press "Presets". deactivate Wi-Fi connection sharing. Move the slider to manually search for Make a long press on one of the buttons And/or frequencies up or down. to preset the station. Select the " " tab to change the system’s Settings Or network name and password. Press Radio Media to display the main Changing the waveband Press "OK" to confirm. page. Press Radio Media to display the main Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the page. To protect against unauthorised access secondary page. To change the waveband, press "Band…", and to make all systems as secure as Select "Radio stations" on the secondary displayed at the top right of the screen. possible, the use of a security code or a page. complex password is recommended. Press "Frequency". Activating/Deactivating RDS Enter the values using the virtual keypad. RDS, if activated, allows you to continue First enter the units then click on the listening to the same station by automatic Managing connections decimals field to enter the figures after the retuning to alternative frequencies. Press Connect-App to display the main decimal point. Press Radio Media to display the main page. Press "OK" to confirm. page. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the secondary page. Radio reception may be affected by the secondary page. Select "Manage connection". use of electrical equipment not approved Select "Radio settings". by the Brand, such as a USB charger With this function, you can view the access to connected to the 12 V socket. Select "General". connected services, the availability of connected The exterior environment (hills, buildings, Activate/deactivate "Station follow". services and modify the connection mode. tunnels, basement car parks, etc.) may block reception, including in RDS mode.
227 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Press "OK" to confirm. TA message can be heard. Normal play of the Press Radio Media to display the main Media previously playing media resumes at the end of page. the message. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the RDS station tracking may not be Select "Announcements". secondary page. USB port available nationwide, as many radio Activate/deactivate "Traffic Select "Radio settings". Insert the USB memory stick into the USB stations do not cover 100 % of the country. announcement". port or connect the USB device to the This explains the loss of reception of the Press "OK" to confirm. Select "General". USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). station during a journey. Activate/deactivate "FM-DAB Follow-up". To protect the system, do not use a USB hub. Displaying text information DAB (Digital Audio Activate/deactivate "Station follow". The "Radio Text" function displays information The system builds playlists (in temporary transmitted by the radio station relating to the Broadcasting) radio Press "OK". memory); this operation can take from a station or the currently playing song. few seconds to several minutes at the first Terrestrial Digital Radio connection. Press Radio Media to display the main If “FM-DAB auto tracking" is activated, Reduce the number of non-music files and the page. there may be a time offset of a few Terrestrial Digital Radio number of folders to reduce the waiting time. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the seconds when the system switches to "FM" Digital radio provides higher quality sound. Playlists are updated whenever the ignition secondary page. analogue radio, and in some cases a change The various "multiplexes/ensembles" offer a is switched off or a USB memory stick is Select "Radio settings". in volume. choice of radio stations organised in alphabetical connected. The audio system memorises these When the digital signal quality is restored, the order. lists, which will subsequently load faster if they Select "General". system automatically changes back to "DAB". Activate/deactivate "Display radio text". Press Radio Media to display the main have not been changed. page. If the "DAB" station being listened to is Press " " to confirm. Press “Band …" at the top right of the screen to Auxiliary socket (AUX) OK not available on “FM” (“ " option display the "DAB" waveband. FM-DAB Depending on equipment shaded), or "FM-DAB auto tracking" is not Connect a portable device (MP3 player, activated, the sound will cut out while the FM-DAB tracking etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an Playing TA messages digital signal is too weak. The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives “DAB" does not cover 100 % of the territory. audio cable (not supplied). priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this When the digital radio signal is poor, “FM-DAB This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" function needs good reception of a radio station auto follow-up" enables you to continue listening has been selected in the audio settings. that carries this type of message. While traffic to the same station by automatically switching to First adjust the volume on the portable device information is being broadcast, the current the corresponding FM analogue station (if there (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the media is automatically interrupted so that the is one). audio system. Controls are managed via the portable device.
228 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Media Selecting the source If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the 12 Press Radio Media to display the main smartphone. page. USB port Control is from the portable device or by using Select "SOURCES". Insert the USB memory stick into the USB the system's touch buttons. Select the source. port or connect the USB device to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Once connected in streaming mode, the Watching a video smartphone is considered to be a media To protect the system, do not use a USB Depending on equipment/Depending on version/ source. hub. Depending on country. Insert a USB memory stick in the USB port. The system builds playlists (in temporary Connecting Apple® players memory); this operation can take from a Video control commands are accessible Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using few seconds to several minutes at the first only through the touch screen. a suitable cable (not supplied). connection. Play starts automatically. Press Radio Media to display the main Reduce the number of non-music files and the Control is via the audio system. number of folders to reduce the waiting time. page. Playlists are updated whenever the ignition Select "SOURCES". The classifications available are those of is switched off or a USB memory stick is Select Video to start the video. the portable device connected (artists/ connected. The audio system memorises these albums/genres/playlists/audio books/ lists, which will subsequently load faster if they To remove the USB memory stick, press podcasts). have not been changed. the pause button to stop the video, then The default classification used is by artist. To remove the memory stick. modify the classification used, return to the Auxiliary socket (AUX) The system can play video files in the MPEG-4 first level of the menu then select the desired Part 2, MPEG-2, MPEG-1, H.264, H.263, VP8, Depending on equipment classification (playlists for example) and WMV and RealVideo formats. Connect a portable device (MP3 player, confirm to go down through the menu to the desired track. etc.) to the auxiliary jack socket using an ® audio cable (not supplied). Streaming Bluetooth The version of software in the audio system may This source is only available if "Auxiliary input" Streaming allows you to listen to the audio feed not be compatible with the generation of the has been selected in the audio settings. from your smartphone. Apple® player. First adjust the volume on the portable device The Bluetooth profile must be activated. (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of the First adjust the volume on the portable device (to audio system. a high level). Controls are managed via the portable device. Then adjust the volume of the audio system.
229 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Information and advice Telephone Procedure from the system The ability of the system to connect just one profile depends on the telephone. The system supports USB mass storage Press Telephone to display the main All three profiles may connect by default. devices, BlackBerry® devices and Apple® players Pairing a Bluetooth® page. via the USB ports. The adapter cable is not Press "Bluetooth search". supplied. telephone The profiles compatible with the system Or are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, Devices are managed using the audio system The services available depend on the Select "Search". MAP and PAN. controls. network, the SIM card and the The list of detected telephones is Other devices, not recognised on connection, compatibility of the Bluetooth devices used. displayed. Visit the Brand's website for more information must be connected to the auxiliary socket using Consult the telephone user guide and the Select the name of the chosen telephone (compatibility, additional help, etc.). a jack cable (not supplied) or via Bluetooth service provider to check which services are in the list. streaming, if compatible. available. Automatic reconnection The audio system will only play audio files with On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone ".wma", ".aac", ".flac", ".ogg" and ".mp3" file Connection sharing The Bluetooth function must be activated connected is present again, it is automatically extensions, at bit rates between 32 Kbps and The system offers to connect the telephone with and the telephone configured as "Visible recognised and within about 30 seconds 320 Kbps. 3 profiles: to all” (in the telphone settings). after switching on the ignition, the pairing is It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. – "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone only), established automatically (Bluetooth activated). No other file types (".mp4", etc.) can be read. – “Streaming" (streaming: wireless playing of To complete the pairing, whichever procedure is To modify the connection profile: All ".wma" files must be standard WMA 9 files. audio files on the telephone), used (from the telephone or from the system), Press Telephone to display the main The supported sampling rates are 32, 44 and – "Mobile internet data". ensure that the code is the same in the system page. 48 KHz. and in the telephone. The "Mobile internet data" profile must Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the To avoid reading and display problems, we be activated for connected navigation, secondary page. recommend choosing file names less than 20 If the pairing procedure fails, we after first activating smartphone connection Select "Bluetooth connection" to display characters long that do not contain any special recommend deactivating and then sharing. the list of paired devices. characters (e.g. “ ? . ; ù). reactivating the Bluetooth function on the Press the "Details" button. Use only USB memory sticks in FAT32 format telephone. Select one or more profiles. (File Allocation Table). Select one or more profiles. Press "OK" to confirm. We recommend using the original USB Procedure from the telephone cable for the portable device. Select the system name in the list of Press "OK" to confirm. Depending on the type of telephone, you may by detected devices. prompted to accept the transfer of contacts and In the system, accept the connection request messages. from the telephone.
230 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
The ability of the system to connect just Managing paired telephones Select "End call" on the touch screen. one profile depends on the telephone. This function lets you connect or disconnect a 12 All three profiles may connect by default. device or delete a pairing. Press Telephone to display the main Making a call The profiles compatible with the system page. Using the telephone is not recommended are: HFP, OPP, PBAP, A2DP, AVRCP, Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the while driving. MAP and PAN. secondary page. Park the vehicle. Select "Bluetooth connection" to display Make the call using the steering mounted Visit the Brand's website for more information the list of paired devices. controls. (compatibility, additional help, etc.). Press on the name of the telephone selected in the list to disconnect it. Automatic reconnection Press again to connect it. Calling a new number On returning to the vehicle, if the last telephone Press Telephone to display the main connected is present again, it is automatically Deleting a telephone page. recognised and within about 30 seconds Select the basket at top right of the Enter the phone number using the digital after switching on the ignition, the pairing is screen to display a basket alongside the keypad. established automatically (Bluetooth activated). telephone chosen. Press "Call" to start the call. To modify the connection profile: Press the basket alongside the telephone Press Telephone to display the main chosen to delete it. page. Calling a contact Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Receiving a call Press Telephone to display the main secondary page. An incoming call is announced by a ring and a page. Select "Bluetooth connection" to display superimposed display in the screen. Or press and hold the list of paired devices. Make a short press on the steering Press the "Details" button. mounted telephone button to accept an the steering mounted telephone button. incoming call. Select one or more profiles. And Select "Contact". Make a long press Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Press "OK" to confirm. Select "Call". on the steering mounted telephone button to reject the call. Or
231 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Calling a recently used Press this button to sort contacts by Managing quick messages Access to email messages depends on Surname+first name or by First the compatibility between the Press Telephone to display the main number name+surname. smartphone and the onboard system. page. Press Telephone to display the main Press the " " button to access the page. The "Email" function allows email OPTIONS secondary page. Or addresses to be entered for a contact, Select " " to display the Settings Press and hold but the system is not able to send emails. Quick messages list of messages. Select the "Delayed", "My arrival", "Not the steering mounted telephone button. Managing messages Audio settings available" or "Other" tab, enabling you to Press Settings to display the main page. Press Telephone to display the main create new messages. Select "Calls". page. Press " " to write a new message. Select the desired contact from the displayed list. Create Select "Audio settings". Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the It is always possible to make a call secondary page. Select the message chosen in one of the Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", directly from the telephone; as a safety Select "Messages" to display the list of lists. "Voice" or "Ringtone". measure, first park the vehicle. messages. Press "Transfer" to select one or more Press "OK" to save the settings. Select the "All", "Incoming" or "Sent” tab. recipients. Press " Play" to start playing the Managing contacts/entries Select the details of the message chosen message. The balance/distribution (or spatialisation Press Telephone to display the main in one of the lists. with the Arkamys© system) uses audio page. Press "Answer" to send a quick message Managing email processing to adjust the sound quality Select "Contact". stored in the system. Press Telephone to display the main according to the number of passengers in the Select " " to add a new contact. Create Press "Call" to start the call. page. vehicle. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Available only with the front and rear speaker Press the " " tab to enter the Telephone Press " Play" to listen to the message. secondary page. configuration. contact’s telephone number(s). Select "Email" to display the list of Press the "Address" tab to enter the The Ambience setting (choice of 6 Access to "Messages" depends on the messages. contact’s address(es). ambiences) and the , and compatibility between the smartphone Select the "Incoming", "Sent" or "Not Bass Medium Press the "Email" tab to enter the sound settings are different and and the onboard system. read” tab. Treble contact’s email address(es). independent for each audio source. Some smartphones retrieve messages or Select the message chosen in one of the lists. Press "OK" to save. Activate or deactivate " ". email messages more slowly than others. Press " Play" to start playing the Loudness message.
232 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Access to email messages depends on The "Position” settings (All passengers, Press "OK" again to save the settings. the compatibility between the Driver and Front only) are common to all 12 smartphone and the onboard system. sources. The location for the photograph is Activate or deactivate "Touch tones", square; the system reshapes the original "Volume linked to speed" and "Auxiliary photograph if in another format. Settings input". Press this button to reset the selected Audio settings Onboard audio: Arkamys Sound Staging© profile. optimises the sound distribution inside Press Settings to display the main page. Resetting the selected profile activates the passenger compartment. the English language by default. Select "Audio settings". Configuring profiles Select a "Profile" (1 or 2 or 3) to link "Audio settings" with it. Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", Press Settings to display the main page. "Voice" or "Ringtone". Select "Audio settings". Press "OK" to save the settings. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Then select "Ambience", "Position"; "Sound", secondary page. "Voice" or "Ringtone". Select "Setting of the profiles". The balance/distribution (or spatialisation Press "OK" to save the selected profile’s © with the Arkamys system) uses audio settings. processing to adjust the sound quality Select "Profile 1", "Profile ",2 "Profile 3” or according to the number of passengers in the "Common profile". Modifying system settings Press this button to enter a name for the vehicle. Press Settings to display the main page. Available only with the front and rear speaker profile using the virtual keypad. Press "OK" to confirm. configuration. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the secondary page. Press this button to add a photograph to The Ambience setting (choice of 6 Select "Screen configuration". the profile. ambiences) and the Bass, Medium and Insert a USB memory stick containing the Treble sound settings are different and Select "Animation". photograph in the USB port. independent for each audio source. Activate or deactivate:Automatic Select the photograph. Activate or deactivate "Loudness". scrolling Press "OK" to accept the transfer of the Select "Brightness". photograph.
233 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Move the slider to adjust the brightness of Select "Setting the time-date". Press "OK" to confirm. Navigation the screen and/or the instrument panel. I cannot enter the navigation address. Press Settings to display the main page. Select "Date". The system may not automatically The address is not recognised. Press this button to set the date. manage the change between winter and ► Use the "intuitive method" by pressing Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the summer time (depending on the country of the "Search…" button at the bottom of the secondary page. Press "OK" to confirm. sale). "Navigation” page. Select "System settings". The route calculation is not successful. Select the display format for the date. The route settings may conflict with the current Select " " to change the units of distance, Units Colour schemes location (for example, if toll roads are excluded fuel consumption and temperature. Time and date setting is only available if Depending on equipment/Depending on version. but the vehicle is on a toll road). Select "Factory settings" to restore the initial "GPS synchronisation" is deactivated. ► Check the route settings in the "Navigation" settings. As a safety measure, the procedure for menu. changing the colour scheme is only I do not receive "Danger zone” alerts. Resetting the system to "Factory possible when the vehicle is stationary. settings" activates English and degrees Setting the time You have not subscribed to the online services Fahrenheit and deactivates summer time. Press Settings to display the main page. Press Settings to display the main page. option. ► If you have subscribed to the option: Select "System info" to display the versions of Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the Select "Color schemes". - a few days may elapse before the service is the various modules installed in the system. secondary page. activated, Select "Setting the time-date". Select a colour scheme in the list then - services may not be selected in the system Selecting the language press "OK" to confirm. menu, Press Settings to display the main page. Select "Time". - online services are not active ("TOMTOM Whenever the colour scheme is Press this button to set the time using the TRAFFIC" not shown on the map). changed, the system restarts, temporarily Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the virtual keypad. The POIs do not appear. displaying a black screen. secondary page. Press "OK" to confirm. The POIs have not been selected. Select "Languages" to change the ► Set the zoom level to 600 ft (200 m) or select language. Press this button to set the time zone. POIs in the POI list. Frequently asked The "Danger zone" audible warning feature is Setting the date Select the display format for the time questions not working. Press Settings to display the main page. (12h/24h). The audible warning is not active or the volume Activate or deactivate summer time (+1 The following information groups together the is too low. Press the "OPTIONS" button to access the hour). answers to the most frequently asked questions secondary page. Activate or deactivate GPS concerning the system. synchronisation (UTC).
234 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Navigation ► Activate the audible warning in the The altitude is not displayed. "Navigation" menu and check the voice volume On starting, GPS initialisation may take up to 12 I cannot enter the navigation address. in the sound settings. 3 minutes to receive more than 4 satellites The address is not recognised. correctly. ► Use the "intuitive method" by pressing The system does not suggest a detour ► Wait until the system has started up the "Search…" button at the bottom of the around an incident on the route. The route settings do not take account of TMC completely so that there is GPS coverage by at "Navigation” page. messages. least 4 satellites. The route calculation is not successful. ► Configure the "Traffic info " function in Depending on the geographical environment The route settings may conflict with the current the route settings list (Without, Manual or (tunnel, etc.) or the weather, the conditions of location (for example, if toll roads are excluded Automatic). reception of the GPS signal may vary. but the vehicle is on a toll road). This behaviour is normal. The system is ► Check the route settings in the "Navigation" I receive a warning about a "Danger area" dependent on the GPS signal reception menu. that is not on my route. As well as providing guided navigation, the conditions. I do not receive "Danger zone” alerts. system announces all "Danger areas" positioned My navigation is no longer connected. You have not subscribed to the online services in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may During start-up and in certain geographical option. provide an alert for "Danger areas" located on areas, the connection may be unavailable. ► If you have subscribed to the option: nearby or parallel roads. ► Check that the online services are activated - a few days may elapse before the service is ► Zoom the map to show the exact location (settings, contract). activated, of the "Danger area". You can select "On the - services may not be selected in the system route" to stop receiving warnings or decrease the menu, Radio warning duration. - online services are not active ("TOMTOM The reception quality of the tuned radio TRAFFIC" not shown on the map). Certain traffic jams along the route are not station gradually deteriorates or the station indicated in real time. The POIs do not appear. presets are not working (no sound, 87.5 MHz On starting, a few minutes may elapse before The POIs have not been selected. is displayed, etc.). the system begins to receive traffic information. ► Set the zoom level to 600 ft (200 m) or select The vehicle is too far from the selected station’s ► Wait until traffic information is being received POIs in the POI list. transmitter, or no transmitter is present in the correctly (traffic information icons shown on the The "Danger zone" audible warning feature is geographical area. map). not working. ► Activate the "" function by means of the In certain countries, only major routes The audible warning is not active or the volume short-cut menu to enable the system to check (motorways, etc.) are listed for the traffic is too low. whether there is a more powerful transmitter in information. the geographical area. This is perfectly normal. The system is dependent on the traffic information available.
235 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
The aerial is missing or has been damaged There may be an extended pause after The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with Settings (for example while entering a car wash or inserting a USB stick. the system. When the treble and bass settings are underground car park). The system reads a variety of data (folder, title, ► You can check that your telephone is changed, the ambience is deselected. ► Have the aerial checked by a dealer. artist, etc.). This can take from a few seconds to compatible on the Brand's website (services). When the ambience is changed, the treble The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, a few minutes. The volume of the telephone connected in and bass settings are reset. basement car parks, etc.) is blocking reception, This is perfectly normal. Bluetooth mode is inaudible. Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and including in RDS mode. The volume depends on both the system and the Some characters in information about the bass settings, and vice versa. This is a perfectly normal phenomenon, and is telephone. currently playing media may not be displayed ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience not indicative of an audio system malfunction. ► Increase the volume of the audio system, to correctly. settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. I cannot find some radio stations in the list of The audio system is unable to process certain maximum if required, and increase the volume of When the balance settings are changed, the stations received. types of character. the telephone if necessary. distribution is deselected. The name of the radio station changes. ► Use standard characters to name tracks and Ambient noise affects the quality of the When the distribution setting is changed, the The station is no longer received or its name has folders. telephone call. balance settings are deselected. changed in the list. ► Reduce the ambient noise level (close Playback of streaming files does not start. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the Some radio stations send other information The connected device does not automatically windows, reduce ventilation, slow down, etc.). balance settings, and vice versa. in place of their name (the title of the song for launch playback. Some contacts are duplicated in the list. ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution example). ► Start playback from the device. The options for synchronising contacts are: setting to obtain the desired sound quality. The system interprets these details as the station Track names and playing times are not synchronise the contacts on the SIM card, the There is a difference in sound quality name. displayed on the audio streaming screen. contacts on the telephone, or both. When both between audio sources. ► Press the "Update list" button in the "Radio The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer synchronisations are selected, some contacts To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound stations” secondary menu. of this information. may be duplicated. settings can be tailored to different audio ► Select "" or "". sources, which can generate audible differences Media Telephone The contacts are not listed in alphabetical when changing source. Playback of my USB memory stick starts only I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone. order. ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate Some telephones offer display options. after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes). The telephone's Bluetooth function may be to the sources listened to. We recommend Depending on the settings chosen, contacts can Some files supplied with the memory stick may switched off or the telephone may not be visible. setting the sound functions (Bass:, Treble:, be transferred in a specific order. greatly slow down access to reading the memory ► Check that the telephone has Bluetooth Balance) to the middle position, setting the ► Modify the telephone directory display stick (multiplication by 10 of the cataloguing switched on. musical ambience to "None", setting loudness settings. time). ► Check in the telephone settings that it is correction to "Active" in USB mode and "Inactive" ► Delete the files supplied with the memory "visible to all". The system does not receive SMS. in Radio mode. SMS text messages cannot be sent to the stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the ► Deactivate then reactivate the telphone’s ► In all cases, after applying sound settings, system in Bluetooth mode. file structure on the memory stick. Bluetooth function. adjust the volume level on the portable device (to
236 PEUGEOT Connect Nav
Settings a high level) first.Then adjust the volume level on the audio system. 12 When the treble and bass settings are When the engine is off, the system switches changed, the ambience is deselected. off after several minutes of use. When the ambience is changed, the treble When the engine is switched off, the system's and bass settings are reset. operating time depends on the state of charge of Selecting an ambience imposes the treble and the battery. bass settings, and vice versa. The switch-off is normal: the system ► Modify the treble and bass or ambience automatically goes into energy economy mode settings to obtain the desired musical ambience. and switches off to maintain an adequate charge When the balance settings are changed, the in the battery. distribution is deselected. ► Start the vehicle’s engine to increase the When the distribution setting is changed, the charge of the battery. balance settings are deselected. Selecting a distribution setting imposes the The date and time cannot be set. Setting of the date and time is only available balance settings, and vice versa. if the synchronisation with the satellites is ► Modify the balance setting or the distribution deactivated. setting to obtain the desired sound quality. ► Settings menu / Options / Time-Date setting. There is a difference in sound quality Select the "Time" tab and deactivate the "GPS between audio sources. synchronisation" (UTC). To allow for optimal listening quality, the sound settings can be tailored to different audio sources, which can generate audible differences when changing source. ► Check that the sound settings are appropriate to the sources listened to. We recommend setting the sound functions (Bass:, Treble:, Balance) to the middle position, setting the musical ambience to "None", setting loudness correction to "Active" in USB mode and "Inactive" in Radio mode. ► In all cases, after applying sound settings, adjust the volume level on the portable device (to
237 Alphabetical index
Android Auto connection 225 Braking 99 A Anti-lock braking system (ABS) 68 Braking assistance system 68 ABS 68 Antitheft / Immobiliser 31 Braking, automatic emergency 124–126 Accessories 65 Apple CarPlay connection 206, 224 Braking, dynamic emergency 91–93 Active Safety Brake 124–126 Applications 225 Brightness 197, 209 AdBlue® 20, 158 Assistance call 66 Bulbs 171 AdBlue® tank 159 Assistance, emergency braking 68, 126 Bulbs (changing) 170–172 Additive, Diesel 156 Audible warning 66 Adjusting headlamps 59 Audio streaming (Bluetooth) 194, 205, 229 Adjusting head restraints 41 Adjusting seat 41–42 C Adjusting the air distribution 47–48 Cable, audio 229 Adjusting the air flow 47–48 B Cable, Jack 229 Adjusting the date 210, 234 Battery 152 Capacity, fuel tank 140 Adjusting the height and reach Battery, 12 V 156, 178–180 Cap, fuel filler 140 of the steering wheel 43 Battery, ancillaries 178 Care of the bodywork 161 Adjusting the lumbar support 42 Battery, charging 141, 145, 179–180 CD 194, 205 Adjusting the seat angle 42 Battery, remote control 35–36 CD, MP3 194, 205 Adjusting the temperature 47–48 Blind 54 Central locking 33–34 Adjusting the time 197, 210, 234 Blind spot monitoring system, active 124 Changing a bulb 170–172 Advice on care and maintenance 55, 142, 161 Blind spot sensors 122, 124 Changing a fuse 173–174, 176–177 Advice on driving 7, 85–86 BlueHDi 20, 156, 163 Changing a wheel 164, 167 Airbags 71–73, 76 Bluetooth Changing a wiper blade 62–63 Airbags, curtain 73–74 (hands-free) 195, 207–208, 230–231 Changing the remote control battery 35 Airbags, front 72–73, 76 Bluetooth Charger, induction 52 Airbags, lateral 73–74 (telephone) 195–196, 207–208, 230–231 Charger, wireless 52 Air conditioning 46, 49–50 Bodywork 161 CHECK 23 Air conditioning, automatic 48, 50 Bonnet 153 Checking the engine oil level 19 Air conditioning, manual 47 Boot 37, 55 Checking the levels 154–156 Air intake 49 Brake discs 157 Checking tyre pressures Air vents 46 Brake lamps 172–173 (using the kit) 165, 167 Alarm 37–38 Brakes 157 Checks 154–155, 156–158
238 Alphabetical index
Checks, routine 156–157 Cruise control, adaptive 112 Driving economically 7 Child lock 83–84 Cruise control by speed limit recognition Driving modes 99 Children 71, 77–79, 82 107–108 Dynamic stability control (DSC) 68–69 Children (safety) 83 Cruise control, dynamic with Stop Child seats 71, 74–77 function 107–108 Child seats, conventional 77–78 Child seats, i-Size 82 E Child seats, ISOFIX 79–80 EBFD 68 Cleaning (advice) 142, 161–162 D Eco-driving (advice) 7 Closing the boot 33, 37 DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) - ECO mode 99 Closing the doors 33, 36 Digital radio 193, 204, 228 Economy mode 152 Collision Risk Alert 124–125 Date (setting) 210, 234 Electric motor 5, 28, 141, 188 Configuration, vehicle 27 Daytime running lamps 58, 171 Electric windows 39 Connected applications 226 Deactivating the passenger airbag 72, 76–77 Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD) 68 Connection, Deadlocking 31, 33 Emergency braking assistance (EBA) 68 Bluetooth 195–196, 207–208, 226, 230–231 Defrosting 50 Emergency call 66 Connection, MirrorLink 206, 225 Defrosting, front 50 Emergency switching off 89–90 Connection, Wi-Fi network 226–227 Demisting 50 Emergency warning lamps 65, 163 Connectivity 224 Demisting, front 50 Emissions control system, SCR 21, 158 Consumption figures 28 Demisting, rear 50 Energy economy mode 152 Container, AdBlue® 159 Demisting, rear screen 50 Energy flows 28 Control, emergency boot release 37 Dials and gauges 9–10 Energy recovery 21, 99 Control, emergency door 34–35 Dimensions 189 Engine 158 Control, heated seats 42–43 Dipstick 19, 154 Engine compartment 154–155 Controls, steering mounted 95–98 Direction indicators 58, 171–173 Engine, Diesel 140, 154, 163, 187 Control stalk, lighting 57–58 Display screen, instrument panel 9–10 Engine, petrol 154, 184 Control stalk, wipers 61–64 Doors 36 Engines 183–184, 187 Control unit 143–144 Drive Assist Plus 112 Environment 7, 36, 85 Courtesy lamp, front 54 Driver’s attention warning 127 ESC (electronic stability control) 68 Courtesy lamps 53–54 Driving 85–86 Expanded traffic sign recognition 108 Cover, load space 55 Driving aids camera (warnings) 104 Cruise control 107–108, 110–112 Driving aids (recommendations) 103
239 Alphabetical index
F G I Fatigue detection 126–127 Gauge, fuel 140 Ignition 89, 232 Filling the AdBlue® tank 156, 159 Gearbox, automatic 94–98, 100, 102, 157, 179 Ignition on 89 Filling the fuel tank 140–141 Gearbox, manual 93, 100, 102, 157 Ignition switch 87–88 Filter, air 156 Gear lever, manual gearbox 93 Immobiliser, electronic 86 Filter, oil 156 Gear shift indicator ~ Gear efficiency Indicator, AdBlue® range 20 Filter, particle 156 indicator 100–101 Indicator, coolant temperature 20 Filter, passenger compartment 46, 156 Glove box 52 Indicator, engine oil level 19 Fitting a wheel 168–169 G.P.S. 221 Indicators, direction 58, 172 Fitting roof bars 151 Inflating tyres 157, 189 Fittings, boot 55–56 Inflating tyres and accessories Fittings, interior 52 (using the kit) 165, 167 Flap, charging 28, 143, 145–147 H Infrared camera 104 Flap, fuel filler 140–141 Hazard warning lamps 65, 163 Instrument panel 11, 23–24, 105 Flashing indicators 58, 172 headlamp adjustment 59 Instrument panel, LCD 9 Fluid, brake 155 Headlamp adjustment 59 Instrument panel, matrix 9 Fluid, engine coolant 155 Headlamps, automatic dipping 60–61 Instrument panels 9–10 Foglamp, rear 57, 173 Headlamps, automatic illumination 59 Internet browser 222, 226 Folding the rear seats 45 Headlamps, dipped beam 171 ISOFIX mountings 79 Frequency (radio) 228 Headlamps, halogen 59, 171–172 Fuel 7, 140 Headlamps, main beam 171 Fuel consumption 7 Head restraints, front 41 Fuel tank 140–141 Head restraints, rear 45 J Full Park Assist 134 Heating 46 Jack 164–165, 167, 229 Fusebox, dashboard 174 Heating, programmable 28, 51 Jump starting 178 Fusebox, engine compartment 174, 176–177 High voltage 141 Fuses 173–174, 176–177 Hill start assist 100 Histogramme, fuel consumption 28 Horn 66 K Horn for pedestrians 66, 85 Key 30–31, 34–35 Key, electronic 32–33
240 Alphabetical index
Keyless Entry and Starting 32–33, 88–89 Lighting, welcome 59 Key not recognised 89–90 Loading 151 N Key with remote control 30, 86–87 Load reduction mode 152 Navigation 220–222 Kit, hands-free 195, 207–208, 230–231 Locating your vehicle 31 Navigation, connected 222–224 Kit, puncture repair 164 Locking 31, 33 Kit, temporary puncture repair 163–165, 167 Locking from the inside 34 Locking the doors 34 Low fuel level 140 O Lumbar 42 Obstacle detection 127 L Oil change 154 Labels, identification 189 Oil consumption 154 Lamp, boot 55 OIl, engine 154 Lamps, parking 58 M On-board tools 55, 163–165 Lamps, rear 172 Maintenance (advice) 55, 142, 161 Opening the bonnet 153 Lams with “Full LED" technology 59 Maintenance, routine 105, 156 Opening the boot 32, 37 Lane assist 112, 115–117, 119 Manoeuvring aids (recommendations) 103 Opening the doors 32, 36 Lane departure warning active 119, 124 Map reading lamps 53–54 Opening the panoramic sunroof blind 54 Leather (care) 162 Markings, identification 189 Opening the windows 30 LEDs - Light-emitting diodes 58, 171 Massage function 42 Level, AdBlue® 156 Mat 53–54, 105 Level, brake fluid 155 Menu 206 Level, Diesel additive 156 Menu, main 27 P Level, engine coolant 20, 155 Menus (audio) 191–192, 201–202, 214–215 Pads, brake 157 Level, engine oil 19, 154 Menu short cuts 27 Paint 161, 189 Levels and checks 154–157 Messages 232 Paint colour code 189 Level, screenwash fluid 62, 156 Messages, quick 232 Panoramic glass sunroof 55 Light-emitting diodes - LEDs 58, 171 Mirror, rear view 44 Parcel shelf, rear 55 Lighting dimmer 23 Mirrors, door 43–44, 50, 122 Park Assist 131 Lighting, exterior 57 Mirror, vanity 52 Parking brake 90, 157 Lighting, guide-me home 31, 59–60 Misfuel prevention 141 Parking brake, electric 90–93, 157 Lighting, interior 53–54 Motor, electric 5, 89, 141, 188 Parking sensors, audible and visual 127 Lighting, mood 54 Mountings, ISOFIX 79 Parking sensors, front 128
241 Alphabetical index
Parking sensors, rear 128 Reinitialisation of the under-inflation detection Seat angle 42 Personalisation 11 system 103 Seat belts 70–71, 77 Plates, identification 189 Reinitialising the remote control 36 Seat belts, rear 70 Player, Apple® 194, 205 Reminder, key in ignition 88 Seat, rear bench 44 Player, Apple® 229 Reminder, lighting on 57 Seats, electric 42 Player, USB 194, 204, 229 Remote control 30–34 Seats, front 41–42 Port, USB 52, 194, 204, 224, 229 Removing a wheel 168–169 Seats, heated 42–43 Power 21 Removing the mat 53–54 Seats, rear 44–45, 75 Power indicator 21 Replacing bulbs 170–172 Selector, drive 98 Pressures, tyres 157, 167, 189 Replacing fuses 173–174 Selector, gear 95–98 Pre-tensioning seat belts 71 Replacing the air filter 156 Sensors (warnings) 104 Priming pump 163 Replacing the oil filter 156 Serial number, vehicle 189 Priming the fuel system 163 Replacing the passenger compartment Service indicator 19, 23 Profiles 209, 233 filter 156 Servicing 19, 156, 158 Protecting children 72, 74–79, 82 Reservoir, screenwash 156 Settings, equipment 27 Puncture 165, 167 Reset trip 24 Settings, system 197–198, 209, 233 Rev counter 10 Sidelamps 58, 171–173 Reversing camera 104, 129–130 Side parking sensors 128 Reversing lamps 172–173 Snow chains 103, 151–152 R Roof bars 151 Socket, 12 V accessory 52 Radar (warnings) 104 Running out of fuel (Diesel) 163 Socket, auxiliary 194, 205, 229 Radio 192–194, 202, 205, 227 Socket, Jack 229 Radio, digital (Digital Audio Speed limiter 107–110 Broadcasting - DAB) 193, 204, 228 Speed limit recognition 105, 107 Range, AdBlue 20, 156 S Speedometer 9–10, 105 RDS 193, 203, 228 Safety, children 72, 74–79, 82 Sport mode 99 Rear screen, demisting 50 Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel) 156 Spotlamps, side 60 Recharging the battery 179–180 Screen menu map 206 Stability control (ESC) 68–69 Recirculation, air 49 Screenwash 62 Starting a Diesel engine 140 Recovery 181–182 Screenwash, front 62 Starting the engine 87, 89 Reduction of electrical load 152 Screenwash, rear 62 Starting the vehicle 87–88, 95–98 Regeneration of the particle filter 156 SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) 21, 158 Starting using another battery 89, 178
242 Alphabetical index
State of charge, battery 28 Total distance recorder 23 Station, radio 192–193, 202, 227–228 Touch screen 26, 28–29, 51 V Stay, bonnet 153 Towball, quickly detachable 148–151 Ventilation 46 Steering mounted controls, audio Towbar 69, 148 Video 229 190–191, 200, 214 Towbar with quickly detachable Visibility 50 Steering wheel, adjustment 43 towball 148–151 Visiopark 1 129 Stickers, customising ~ Stickers, expressive 161 Towed loads 183–184, 187 Voice commands 216–218 Stopping the vehicle 87–89, 95–98 Towing another vehicle 181–182 Stop & Start 25, 47, 50, 101–102, Traction control (ASR) 68–69 140, 153, 156, 181 Traffic information (TMC) 221 Storage 52 Trailer 69, 148 W Storage box 55 Trailer stability assist (TSA) 69 Warning and indicator lamps 12 Storage wells 55 Trajectory control systems 68 Warning lamp, driver''s seat belt Sunshine sensor 46 Triangle, warning 163 not fastened 71 Sun visor 52 Trip computer 24–25 Warning lamps 12, 23 Suspension 158 Trip distance recorder 23 Warning lamp, seat belts 71 Switching off the engine 87, 89 Tyres 157, 189 Warnings and indicators 12 Synchronising the remote control 36 Tyre under-inflation detection 102, 167 Washing 105 Washing (advice) 142, 161 Weights 183–184, 187 Welcome lighting 31, 60 T U Wheel, spare 157, 163–165, 167–168 Tables of engines 188 Under-inflation (detection) 102 Windscreen, heated 50 Tables of fuses 174, 176–177 Unlocking 30, 32 Windscreen wipers 61, 63 Tank, fuel 140–141 Unlocking from the inside 34 Wiper blades (changing) 62–63 Technical data 184, 187–188 Unlocking the boot 31, 33 Wiper, rear 62 Telephone 52, 195–196, 207–208, 230–232 Unlocking the doors 34 Wipers 61, 64 Temperature, coolant 20 Unlocking the tailgate 33 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive 63–64 Time (setting) 197, 210, 234 Updating the date 210, 234 TMC (Traffic info) 221 Updating the time 197, 210, 234 Tool box 55 USB 194, 205, 224, 229 Tools 163–165 Topping-up AdBlue® 159
243
Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, in accordance with the provisions of the European legislation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End-of-Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this legislation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells. Reproduction or translation of all or part of this document is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT.
Printed in the EU
09-19
www.peugeot.com *19P21.0040* ANG. 19P21.0040